Home

Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

Contents

1. NOTE If you apply a dark background color to a table you may want to apply a light foreground color to the text Use the font color button AX to change the text color To assign a background color to your table click the Background Color field on the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background W Unassigned Background Color When you click that field a color dialog box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the background of the table Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 476 Manipulating Your Table s Format Basic colors EE ERED Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Deleting a Table s Background Color To delete a table s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned Specifying a Background Image for a Table If you want a background image to appear in all table cells use the Background Image field of the Insert Table dialog box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 477 Custom Backgrou
2. 7 Click the Save button 5 You can now assign content to the collection See Assigning Content to the Collection on page 264 Default Template vs Quicklinks You can specify a template that determines the screen display for a collection when it is published on a Web page See your system administrator for information about Ektron CMS400 NET templates Or you can disable the template and instead use Quicklinks to Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 262 Working with Collections determine the page template See Also Quicklinks and Forms on page 210 If you specify a template all content in the collection uses the same screen elements other than the specific content For example the page header footer and information in the right frame of the screen are all the same On the other hand if you use Quicklinks every page in the collection uses its original template As a result the surrounding information may change for every content item in the collection Here is an example of links using Quicklinks Notice that content uses several templates As a result when a user clicks content in the collection the screen information around the content changes according to its template Title ID i Home Page Content 1 MS300Sample index asp id 1 Support Page g CMS300Sample index asp id 8 Plastic Molder 123 13 9 CMS300Sample hr asp id 13 RC Cheetah 5 CMS300Sample products asp id 5 RC Redst
3. E K tr on ___Redefining Web Content Management Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Ektron Inc 5 Northern Blvd Suite 6 Amherst NH 03031 Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 Email sales ektron com http www ektron com Copyright 2005 Ektron Inc All rights reserved EKTRON is a registered trademark of Ektron Inc Release 5 1 Revision 5 November 2005 For the latest version of this manual go to http www ektron com cms400 web cms aspx id 1701 documentation EKTRON INC SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT READ THIS BEFORE LOADING SOFTWARE YOUR RIGHT TO USE THE PRODUCT DELIVERED IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT USING THIS PRODUCT SIGNIFIES YOUR AGREEMENT TO THESE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT DO NOT DOWNLOAD CUSTOMER should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using the software program s contained herein the Software Downloading and or using the Software or copying the Software onto CUSTOMER S computer hard drive indicates CUSTOMER S acceptance of these terms and conditions If CUSTOMER does not agree with the terms of this agreement CUSTOMER should not download Ektron Inc Ektron grants and the CUSTOMER accepts a nontransferable and nonexclusive License to use the Software on the following terms and conditions 1 Right to use The Software is licensed for use
4. at the top of the window 4 The content is in the approval chain The next user in the chain receives an email saying the content is ready for approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 89 Approving Declining Content eee Request for content approval File Edt View Tools Message Help G Ga 2 a KX BE Fron Webmaster your company com Date Friday May 03 2002 4 16 PM To SportsEditon yourdomain com Subject Request for content approval The content Red Sox Win World Seres has been submitted tor your approval by Sports Writer To locate the content the folder path in your workarea 1s Sports The following lnk will take you to the submutted content block on the Web site httow 192 168 0 156 CMS200Samplefndes asp 7id 17 Please Note You must loan and select the preview icon to view the changes The content was submitted for approval on 03 May 2002 4 16 19 PM Approvals SportsEditor Editorln Chief Comment NOTE Emails are only sent if your Administrator enables them The content contributor Sports Writer has completed his role in the approval chain but continues to receive emails notifying him of changes in the content s status First Approver After Sports Writer submits the content the first user in the approval chain Sports Editor receives an email stating content needs his approval He can change and approve the content or decline i
5. RE Sportster 7 lore Info Icons on the View Menus Screen The following icons indicate the type of each menu item and the options you can perform on them Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 293 Working with Menus Icon Menu item Menuitem type Reorder submenu items Edit submenu Delete submenu fF Edit Web page on your site E Web page on your site Delete Web page on your site ff External Web page Edit external Web page Delete External Web page i Library asset Edit library asset Delete library asset fF Editing a Menu Item via Menus Module Available actions For more information see Adding an Item to a Submenu on page 289 Reordering Menu Items on page 306 Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 279 Deleting a Submenu on page 307 a Content Menu Item on page 296 Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on page 308 Editing an External Hyperlink Menu Item on page 300 Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on page 308 Editing a Library Asset Menu Item on page 300 Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on page 308 To edit a menu via the Menus module follow these steps 1 Access the Menu Report screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 305 2 Click the menu you want to edit Ektron CMS400 NET U
6. Text Target Frame Quick Link select link 3 Click in the Link field after nttp 7 Then enter the address of the destination Web page For example to enter a hyperlink to the ektron Web site enter www ektron com 4 lf desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 504 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 5 Click OK Testing a Hyperlink Within the eWebEditPro XML editor you can test a hyperlink To do this select the hyperlink then double click it That action launches the Web page assigned to the hyperlink Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 508 Using Hyperlinks Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page Sometimes the destination Web page contains bookmarks and you want to jump from your page to a bookmark on another page Bookmarks are described in Using Bookmarks on page 501 To create a hyperlink that jumps to another page s bookmark follow these steps Go to the destination Web page 2 Click the bookmark that you want to jump to For example on the illustration below the text Benefits to Partners jumps to a bookmark further down on the page PARTNER PROGRAM OVERYIEW Welcome Executive Summary Ektron Partner Programs Ektron Technology Partners e Benefits to Partn
7. gt Eorms Books 5 Calendar 5 CenturyMedicalSery HD Contacts 15 Dynamic Content I A FAO F J Form Example SHED IntranetBasic 106 Employees E 30 Directory BEY FAQ A form consists of the following components e Form title ID number whether the form data is sent as email and or saved to a database etc e Content information title start and or end date status postback message etc e Form fields plain text field password field text area hidden text choices checkbox select list calendar submit button etc Form Folders and Content Before creating a form select the Forms folder then select an existing folder or create a new folder The ability to create a new folder is a permission If you create a new subfolder a corresponding folder is automatically created in the Content folder IMPORTANT Technical note for developers Any folder that contains forms must use a template that contains the formblock server control or function For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Working with HTML Forms gt Forms Must Use Template with FormBlock Server Control Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 138 Working with HTML Forms View Forms of folder Support 5 Forms Leh oo rh E view English U5 TI a 44 Human Resources i m 2 Title Language ID Status Date Modified Last Edito 2 Marketing maa L a aal MMMM 4 Support
8. to insert it Using Image to Replace Title Text Alternatively you can have the image replace the menu text so that only the image appears to indicate the kind of information on the menu To do this check the Use image instead of a title checkbox CMS400Example Image Link l Use image instead of a title poms Fit icMs4annexamnled Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 298 Working with Menus p URL Link After you create a menu your developer links it to text or an image on a Web page by modifying a page template As a result when a user reading that Web page moves the cursor over the text or image the menu appears In the illustration below the menu appears when the user moves the cursor over Products Product Support Hews Careers You can also assign a URL link to a menu using this field If you do and the user clicks the link text or image he jumps to the specified page For example in this field you assign the product landing page CMS400Example products aspx In the illustration above if the user moves the cursor over Products the assigned menu appears However if the user clicks Products as indicated by the hand he jumps to CMS400Example products aspx Entering the Path to the Landing Page This path must be relative For example 400Sample index aspx This URL path can be a static template path like the one mentioned above or a dynamic path such as
9. Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties To see and update additional form information that does not appear on the View Form screen view its properties To do so follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 178 Working with HTML Forms 1 Navigate to the View Form screen of the form whose properties you want to view as described in Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 178 2 Click the Form Properties button 3 The Form Properties screen displays a subset of form information e Title and Description e Database or Mail if form data is emailed whenever a site visitor submits it enter mail property information below See Mail Properties on page 179 e Assign task to see Assigning a Task to a Form on page 170 e Form block s ID number e Mail Properties see Mail Properties on page 179 Mail Properties e Sy Email address to which the form is sent when submitted See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 180 Text that appears in the email s From field See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 180 Text that appears in the email s CC field See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 180 Subject Text that appears in the email s subject field See Also Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields on page 182 Preamble Beginni
10. 400Sample index aspx id 25 Target Select how the library menu item will display Popup Opens in a new browser window Self Opens in the same window Parent Opens in the parent window Top Note By default the target option is set to self See Template Link on page 282 5 Click the Save button 1 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 299 Working with Menus Editing a Library Asset Menu Item To edit a library menu asset via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu whose items you want to edit by referencing Viewing a Menu on page 301 2 The View Menu screen displays the menu items 3 Click the edit icon next to the library asset KE you want to edit The Edit Menu Item screen opens 5 Make changes to the library asset menu item For documentation of the fields see Fields on the Edit Menu Item Screen on page 297 6 Click the Save button I Editing an External Hyperlink Menu Item To edit an external hyperlink menu item via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu that you want to edit by referencing Viewing a Menu on page 301 2 The View Menu screen displays the menu items 3 Click the edit icon py next to the external hyperlink you want to edit 4 The Edit Menu Item screen opens Update as needed Use the table below to guide you through the fields Name Descri
11. 9 The document appears within the host application 10 Enter a Title and add content to the document Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 235 Using the Document Management Functionality NOTE If you want to retain the original document name insert the full filename into the Title field For example you could enter mydocument doc 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if it should be searchable 12 If desired add a Summary metadata a schedule and comments See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 73 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 66 13 If desired you can edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 232 14 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would a content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 232 and Adding Content on page 46 Importing Several Office Documents Your computer or network may have several Office documents that you want the Document Management functionality to manage Follow these steps to import several Office documents at once See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 238 and Drag and Drop File Uploading Vs the Add Content Buttons on page 250 1 Place all files to be imported in the same folder on your computer or network 2 From the Wo
12. B T Ls 3rd submenu D A of L RedStar Airplane smaller version B T ore Info 4 Click the Add Item icon next to the submenu The Add Menu screen opens displaying items you can add 6 Refer to the table below for selecting a menu item and follow the steps to add it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 289 Working with Menus Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 286 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 287 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 288 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 288 Adding New Content to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page NoTE You can only use this feature after your Web developer has modified a page __ template to display the menu This procedure is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Manual section Custom ASP Functions gt Menus To add new content to a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Place the mouse on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 3 The menu appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 290 Working with Menus 4 Click Add Content NOT
13. Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel Specifying a Cell s Background Color Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 476 explains how to apply a background color to a table You can also apply a background color to a cell To apply a background color to a cell follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 487 Working with Table Cells Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu Click the Background Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box Custom Background Background Color Sccaec ae W Unassigned 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears See Also Using the Color Box on page 490 Color Basic colors EE 8 6616 Oe EE HEHEHHE EE EHHH Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 6 Click a color to apply to the background of the cell Deleting a Cell s Background Color To delete a cell s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Cell Properties dialog box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 488 Working with Table Cells Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned specifying a Background Image for a Cell Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 477 explains how to apply a background image to a table You can also apply a backgr
14. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Button Menu Insert gt Insert Table Menu Table gt Insert Table Keystroke None Button rows F column 4 Menu Table gt Insert Row or Column Keystroke None Button None Menu Table gt Insert Cell Keystroke None Button ar Menu Table gt Delete Row Keystroke None Button F Menu Table gt Delete Column Keystroke None Button None Menu Table gt Delete Cell Keystroke None Button Ti Menu Table gt Split Cell Keystroke None Button AJ Menu Table gt Merge Cell Keystroke None Insert a table When using the Table button a table appears below the button and allows you to choose how many columns and rows you want When using a menu to insert a table the insert table dialog box appears Add a row or column to an existing table Inserts a cell where the cursor is located in a table Cells in that row to the right of the new cell are shifted to the right Deletes the row where the cursor is located Deletes the column where the cursor is located Deletes a cell where the cursor is located in a table and shifts the remaining cells in that row to the left If multiple cells are selected they are deleted and the remaining cells are shifted to the left Launches a dialog box that allows you to split a cell into multiple columns or rows This only a
15. Make the text bold Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 536 Align Left Align Center Align Right Unordered List Ordered List Decrease Indent Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Button i Menu Format gt Italic Keystroke Control Button U Menu Format gt Underline Keystroke Control U Button Menu Format gt Align Left Keystroke Control L Button Menu Format gt Align Center Keystroke Control E Button Menu Format gt Align Right Keystroke Control R Button Menu Format gt Unordered List Keystroke None L Button Menu Format gt Ordered List Keystroke None Button Menu Format gt Decrease Indent Keystroke None Make the text italic Make the text underlined Aligns the text to the left of the page For example This text is aligned left Aligns the text to the center of the page For example This text is aligned center Aligns the text to the right of the page or table cell For example This text is aligned right Begin the line on which the cursor rests or all selected lines with a bullet Begin the line on which the cursor rests with a number If the line above this line is not numbered assign this line 1 numbered assign a number one more than the line above Decrease the current line s indent distance from the
16. No information is added to Summary Metadata or Comments when a file is added via drag and drop You can edit this information by clicking Edit CY then the appropriate tab Steps to Adding Files via Drag and Drop In the Workarea click the Content folder button Select the folder in which you want to place the files Open Windows Explorer Find the files you want to upload PURNS NOTE You cannot drag and drop folders You can however grab all files in a folder and drag and drop them Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 248 Using the Document Management Functionality 5 From Windows Explorer drag and drop the files onto the Workarea s drag and drop window Workarea for admin Microsoft Internet Explorer O X C Documents and Sett File Edit View Favorites m E 4 5 P CLP ee ee ree i lirano aA Te AA i a i iL Bi T d A LTT Ty Py Re ee a ar J 5 Ee A ANAA NAAMAA BAEAN AAA ENANA A MEAE AEAEE ENAA E IOANE CN a saan ana E rey Mi Sa Fr E E oo TT ee N PINOLE AOL AD PEORSALAAST ALARM CAL ANTANI OTRAI ETARA TIARAS EA Aa PTA NES AEA TAA a Y p aa Paa eeg AATA AAS TERA Ty Pi ae ae RR Pe ae ene Satya LAY E ee MW ped ae kaha Es Nae a erat LW re ls Beem os E OOS Lines da Wee hal A ee bn kap X View Contents of Folder Content Address C Documents and Name p ndar IE fy Eye hevMeddl haa Te See ee tacts 2 New Micro
17. on page 398 Finding and Replacing Text on page 398 376 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only uy Spell Check Begin spell checker manual Turn on or off spell check as you type HEC a Spell Check feature automatic Change information about a hyperlink Edit Hyperlink A Remove a hyperlink Remove Hyperlink Insert a library file fy Library l Upload any external files such as Upload Files oe images to the server Translate content into another language af Translate oe Add Comment Insert a comment into the content Insert a picture Picture Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 For more information see Checking Spelling Upon Demand on page 403 Checking Spelling as You Type on page 402 Using Hyperlinks on page 505 Removing a Hyperlink on page 510 Adding a Library File to Content on page 204 Moving an Image to the Server on page 423 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content gt Translating Content gt Using Machine Translation Adding Comments to Content on page 526 Inserting Images on page 410 377 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Edit an image Editing Images
18. on page 347 2 Click the History button E The history of task events appears example below view Task History for review today Date 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Initiator jedit jedit jedit jedit jedit jedit jedit Activity Creation Other Content Linked Start Date Changed Due Date Change Start Date Changed Due Date Change Information Task Assigned to All Authors Plastic Molder 123013 Date Set to 1 5ep 2004 Date Set to 22 Sep 2004 Date Set to 1 Sep 2004 Date Set to 42 Sep 2004 356 Managing Tasks Task Module Toolbar The following table explains the toolbar buttons available while managing tasks Add Comment Add a comment to the task Adding Comments to i Tasks on page 353 Add Task Access the Add Task screen from the Task Module Toolbar View Content page on page 357 Add Task Access Add Task screen from task Creating a Task via module folder the Task Folder on page 337 Delete Task Delete a task Deleting a Task on page 355 Edit Task Edit a task Editing a Task on page 352 ce Update Save task information View Task View task information Viewing a Task on page 347 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 357 Updating Your User Profile Updating Your User Profile When a new user is added to an Ektron C
19. 3 Press lt Delete gt Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 459 Introduction to Tables Inserting a Table within a Table You can insert a table within a table You might want to do this to arrange text in columns NOTE HTML does not let you use tabs or spaces to align text in columns You must use a table to align columns You can remove the table s border so that no lines appear between the columns and rows To insert a table within a table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert a table 2 Click the Insert Table button 3 3 Click Insert Table from the menu Insert Table Inzert Aor Insert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells Menge ells Split Cell Table Properties Cell Properties 4 The Insert Table dialog box appears 5 Edit the fields in the dialog box as needed Then click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 460 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus This section explains the menu options and dialog boxes you use to manipulate tables and cells In most cases you are referred to another section that describes the feature in more detail This section explains e The Insert Table Menu on page 461 e The Table Properties Dialog Box on page 463 e The Cell Properties Dialog Box on page 465 e The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 467 The Insert Table
20. Be sure to place the cursor where you want the quicklink or form to appear before inserting it When the quicklink or form is inserted the title of the jumped to content appears in the content To test the quicklink or form select the newly inserted title and double Click it When the page is published a reader can click the link to jump to the quicklink or form page Viewing Quicklinks or Forms To view a quicklink or form follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 198 The only difference is that you view a quicklink or form instead of a file The table below describes each field on the quicklinks display Field Deseriptom Title given to the hyperlink or form by the user who added it or last edited it URL Link URL link for the quicklink or form Library ID ID number assigned automatically by Ektron CMS400 NET when the quicklink or form was originally added Parent Folder Parent folder that the quicklink or form belongs to Users need permissions to this folder to be able to access the quicklink or form Last User to Edit Last user that made changes to the quicklink or form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 210 Library Folder Field Description Last Edit Date The date the quicklink or form was last edited Date Created The date and time the quicklink or form was originally added to the Ektron CMS400 NET library To preview a quicklink or form click the link at the
21. C Greeting 3 Press the Save button fy Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 341 Managing Tasks Adding a Task Category and Task Type Task Categories and Task Types let users and administrators sort task by user defined categories and types By clicking the Add link located next to the Task Type drop down box you can add Task Categories and Task Types This allows you to add categories and types without leaving the Add Task screen NOTE Administrators can also add and edit Task Categories and Task Types from the Workarea by clicking Settings gt Configurations gt Task Types See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types To add a Task Category and a Task Type follow these steps 1 Go to the Add Task screen as described in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 337 2 Click the Add link next to the Task Type drop down box Add Task Assigned To f jedit Select User or Group Language English U S Content Select Priority Task Category Task Type State Start Date E Due Date o i Description Not Specmfed Add Edit a l 3 The Add Task Type screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 342 Managing Tasks Add Task Type Task Type Onda Task Type to Basing Task ateo f Docs hd Task Type Description Add Task Type to New Task Category ee
22. Click the event you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete button A confirmation message appears Click OK oa Ss amp bh Deleting a Recurring Calendar Event You can delete a single event in a recurring series or all events in the series Deleting a Single Recurring Event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 333 2 3 4 5 6 Working with Calendars Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 324 Click the event you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete Content button i A confirmation message appears Click OK Deleting All Events in a Recurring Series 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for any date that contains an events in the series that you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 324 Click the event in the series that you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete This and Associated Recurring Events button E A confirmation message appears Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 334 Managing Tasks Managing Tasks A task is a request from one user to another to perform an action within Ektron CMS400 NET Examples of a tasks include e updating content e publishing content e updating an imag
23. Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Ctrl V Replace o r l Z y Cut Copy Fe Paste Paste Text Ctrl Y Reverse the undo action Mro OMY Pmvernite urination Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory also known as the clipboard If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Copy selected text and graphics into temporary memory Leave selected data where it Is If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain text That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Launches the Search and Replace dialog box The dialog searches for and lets you optionally replace text that you specify Find next occurrence of the string entered into the Find What field of the Search and Replace dialog box Reverse the most recent action as if it never occurred You can undo as many actions as you wish Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Toolbar Buttons For more information see Copying from Other Applications on page 397 Finding and Replacing Text
24. File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back index 1 Notepad Address E File Edit Format View Help RG lt Copyright 2002 Ektron Inc CMS sample site Al information in the sample site is fictional gt lt html gt Home F KTitle gt welcome to RC International lt Title gt lt meta name Keywords content RC International RC racing remote cont airplanes cars gt RC Intern years RC 1 link rel stylesheet href default css type text css gt to the spe r f HEAD striving tc lt B0DY topmargin 0 leftmargin 0 marginheight 0 marginwidth 0 For more information see Entering Title and Keywords on page 80 Entering Custom Metadata Your system administrator defines the metadata that can be added to content The metadata being collected can be customized for each folder When you create or update content you can define metadata using fields that the administrator specified NOTE In order to add metadata to content an administrator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content For example each document stored in the Document Management functionality has a unique part number Your system administrator adds a custom search field called Part Number and specifies that only numbers can be inserted into the field When you add a document to Ektron CMS400 NET you access the content s metadata and insert the correct part number
25. Folder Name Name of content folder to which the calendar is assigned for permission purposes You can only add edit or delete events for calendars in folders to which you have been granted permission Folder Path Complete path to the calendar s content folder The View Calendar screen may contain the following toolbar buttons that let you perform other tasks View Show calendar in the Workarea Viewing a Calendar on Ea Calendar page 320 Back Return to previous screen mie l Viewing a Calendar NOTE This section explains how to view a calendar and enter calendar events from the Workarea Once a calendar is available on your Web site you can also perform these actions by logging in and navigating to the calendar on your site To view a calendar follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar screen for the calendar you want to see as described in Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 315 2 Click the View Calendar E button 3 The calendar appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 320 Working with Calendars Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Bel 6 4 Bal e 5 EJA 6 Ed A 7 ALM Trade ALIM Trade SIT Trade show in show in show in Miani Miami Miani Ta E 11 Ed E 12 Ed E 13 Ed S 14 Ed E I Company meeting Ta E 18 Ed E 19 E S 20 Ed S 21 Ed 5l lk 1 See Also Tips on Viewing a Calendar on page 322 4 lf you want to view events of a certain type
26. GIF Files gif Cancel Mu Network P NOTE The dialog box only appears the first time you save the image If you later want to save it to a different folder or under a different name or file type use the Save As command Save As Standard Toolbar Button Description Save the current image under a different name or format For example you might save mypicture gif as mypicture jpg Your system administrator determines which file formats are available Dialog Box See Save on page 449 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 450 Editing Images Select Standard Toolbar Button Lt raian Pinion Description Selects an area of an image You can then execute other commands on the selected area such as blur sharpen cut and delete NOTE Once you press the Select command it remains selected and continues to be active until you press it a second time Sharpen Standard Toolbar Button A Description Sharpens edges within an image You can select a level of sharpness from 1 through 5 Sharpening brings an image into better focus and increases the detail If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 451 Editing Images Sharpen lel men _ Text Standard Toolbar Button T Description Places text on an image You can also change the text s size font color
27. The following table describes each button that may appear Approve Approve or decline a request to Approving Declining Content s publish or delete content on page 85 Add Task Assign a task to a user Managing Tasks on page 335 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 4 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Delete Open View Content page From it Viewing Content on page 40 you can delete the content mf Check out content for editing Editing Content on page 49 Logout Log out of Ektron CMS400 NET Logging Out of the Sample view of Web site Site on page 13 Preview content before it is published Open content s View Content page Viewing Content on page 40 View Display differences between a Comparing Versions of Content previous and published version of Content on page 95 Difference content Te View History Open View History screen where you Viewing and Restoring can view previous versions of content Previous Content on page 102 Workarea Opens Workarea from which you can The Workarea and Smart perform all Ektron CMS400 NET Desktop on page 15 tasks NOTE Your administrator can set up your system to have borders always appear on a page In that case the toolbar always appears in the content you don t need to click the mouse to make it appear For information on the classic user interface see the Administrators Manual gt Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET gt G
28. e Modify the Display of Top Level Folders on page 23 e Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea on page 25 Modify the Display of Top Level Folders The display of top level folders can appear in two formats Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 23 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Format Illustration A full button with an icon and text B Content An icon on the bottom of the left frame The full display is easier to see but the icon format allows more space for the folder structure You can decide which option best Suits your needs Switching Between Full Buttons and Icons By default top level folders appear as full buttons To switch the display of all folders to icons double click the down arrow circled below To switch back to full buttons double click the up arrow circled above You can also switch the display of folders one at a time by clicking the up or down arrow As an alternative method of switching the display you can 1 Place the cursor on the bar above the display of top level folders The bar has several dots in the middle Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 24 The Workarea and Smart Desktop zJ Modules Administrate 2 When the cursor turns to a double headed arrow drag it to the bottom bar To return the display to full buttons drag the same bar above Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea You can hide the left frame of the Workarea
29. on page 203 Delete library item See Deleting Library Items in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Return to previous screen ference Editing a File You can edit the title filename and description of any file that was copied to the library To do so follow these steps 1 Access the View File screen as described in Viewing Files on page 198 2 Click the Edit button L The Edit File screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 200 Library Folder Edit Library Item in Folder Contenti files Ed Tithe ID Filename ktron Partners and Customers 41 CMS400Exafnple uploadedFiles ektron partners custarr Description y Bs eo cs 3012 pt A W BZA Te Marketing description of Ektron s relationship with its partners 4 Change the title file name and or description of the file 5 Click the Update button i Overwriting Files If a library file becomes out of date or the wrong version was copied you may replace it with a new version Overwriting files lets you minimize disk space and the number of library files NOTE The ability to overwrite a library file is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see an Overwrite button Er on the View Library Item in Folder screen you do not have permission to overwrite NOTE You can only overwrite images and files The new image or file must have the same file extens
30. Appendix A Content Statuses Products Support Rms Se Content management systems from Eki Ektron is a recognized international leader in Web content authoring and publishing Ektron s easy to use affordabl full featured content management systems address tr organizational need of simplifying dynamic Web content management With Ektron s browser based solutions busin See ee ee ee eee Ue Oe eee eek eel OTS tet ene et oe ee See ie ee ee See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 89 Each toolbar button is described below a Submit Submit the content into the approval chain See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 89 Publish Approve and publish the content to the Web site Note You have this option only if you are the last approver in the chain See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 89 Decline Refuse to publish the submitted content and change its status to checked in C Edit Check out the content and make changes to it Note If you edit the content you need to re submit it to the approval chain g View Staged Click the View Staged button to view the content that has not Published yet been published Click the View Published to view the content that is live on the Web site See Also Staged Content on page 547 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 545 Appendix A Content Statuses wien tome ome Go to previous window Marked
31. By Navigating the Site on page 310 Creating a Menu in Any Language To create a menu in any language follow these steps 1 Form the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus 2 From the language drop down list select the new menu s language ID Description 3 Create the menu See Adding a New Menu on page 277 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 311 Working with Calendars Working with Calendars Calendars in Ektron CMS400 NET perform the same function as a paper calendar they keep one or more users informed about upcoming events They can be displayed to all visitors to your Web site and any authorized user can add events to a calendar Typical calendar events could include e company meeting e reserving a conference room for an interview e company holidays e deadlines These are only a few uses of calendar events Calendars are versatile and can easily meet all of your needs A sample calendar appears below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 312 Working with Calendars Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Bal E a Ee 5 mE 6 Tal z Edel ALIM Trade ALM Trade ALM Trade show in show in show in Miami Miami Miami Ta 6 11 Ed S 12 E E 13 Ga S 14 Ed 6 Company meeting al 6 18 Fal Sl 19 Gal S 20 Ed S 21 Gal S The Calendar Feature is explained through the following topics e Understanding Calendars on page 314 e Accessing the View Ca
32. CMS400Example uploadediImages type and folder CMS400 Logo Images CMS400Example uploadediImages name Codes Images CMS400Example uploadediImages CRSM Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Gilbane Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Market Cycle Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Panorama Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Adding Subfolders To further organize content in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site you can create subfolders to store related content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 62 Working with Folders and Content NOTE The ability to add a subfolder is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see an Add Folder button I on the View Contents of Folder screen you do not have permission to do so To add a subfolder follow these steps 1 Navigate to and click the folder under which you want to create a subfolder D 192 168 0 171 CME 36 Content J Human Resour GEA Markatinn 2 The contents of the folder appear in the main section of the Workarea Click the Add Folder button i The Add Subfolder screen appears 5 Enter the required information in the fields Use the following table to assist you Field Description O Enter a name for the subfolder Enter a full description of the folder Style Sheet Specify the style sheet that the content in the folder will use If left blank the folder inherits the style sheet from the pa
33. Comment or Web Alerts tab to edit that information Click a workflow button Submit for Publication or Publish Editing a Form s Properties See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 178 Mailto or Database Form The Forms feature lets you create a mailto or a database form to use on your Web site When creating or editing a form you must specify the type of form you are creating The options are Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 184 Working with HTML Forms e Send it via email e Store it in a database e Send it via email and store in a database See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 178 for information about toggling this option on and off Advantages of a Mailto Form By creating a mailto form any email generation is done on the server side not on the client This means that site visitors can submit email whether or not the client has email software Storing Form Data in a Database By storing form data in the Ektron CMS400 NET database you can keep information submitted by site visitors and view reports on that information You can also export the form data to a spreadsheet Deleting a Form You can easily delete forms that are no longer needed NOTE Deleting a form also deletes its associated content and information To delete a form follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to delete as described in Accessing t
34. Deleting a Menu Item on page 308 e Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 309 The Structure of Menus and Menu Items Menus have the following structure e menu top level structure that is a placeholder for menu items and submenus It is assigned to a content folder If a menu item links to content it must reside in the assigned folder or one of its subfolders A menu also identifies the page template used to display menu options that are content e menu item the individual options on a menu can be any of the following content library asset Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 275 Working with Menus external hyperlink link to a page outside your Web site submenu a link to another menu In the illustration below the menu on the right is a submenu It appears when the user hovers the cursor over the menu item to the left RC Planes The right pointing arrow indicates that a submenu is available ucts Support News Careers Search Calendar Access to the Menus Feature There are three ways to access the Menus feature the Workarea by choosing the associated content folder then clicking the View Menus button the Workarea by choosing Modules gt Menus the Edit Menu option on the sample menu displayed above lf you choose the first or second option you then select a specific menu Next that menu appears on the View menus screen
35. E Colombian Decaffeinated oa Costa Rica Tarrazu 4 Decaffeinated Dark 1 Ethiopia Limu oa French Roast French Vanilla Le French Wanilla Decaf 2 Guatemala Antigua Dark 1 House Blend Irish Cream 4 Kenya kilimandjaro Dark ar Macadamia Nut Sumatra oa vanilla Hazelnut Hazelnut 2 Contact Information este a ID Address Email Business Phone Home Phone Date Submitte 34 Jim Smithfield 003 594 0249 11 11 2005 2 02 5 Northern Boulevard Amherst WH 03031 C 33 Bob Bolton o00 458 7854 11 11 2005 2 02 75 Main St Springfield Wy 14587 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 176 Working with HTML Forms Exporting Form Reports After you run a report you can export its data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file xls for further analysis If a form uses an XML structure each XML tag becomes a column header in the spreadsheet To export form data follow these steps 1 Access the View Form Reports screen for the report you want to export as described in Viewing Form Reports on page 173 2 Click the Export Reports button R 3 A File Download dialog box is displayed Choose the option that best suits your needs 4 After the data is exported you can analyze and modify the xls file Viewing Form Information You can view e information about a form e information about a form s properties Viewing a Form s Information After a form is created you ca
36. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 165 Working with HTML Forms Select List Field Hame Tool Tips List Custom ltem List tern Value Text me Fields on the Select List Field Dialog Ca aa Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters 8 lt gt into this field Tool Tips Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 166 Working with HTML Forms SS List Item Value Item Text Item List First item is not a Valid Selection Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item and Item List fields to do this See Also Customizing a Standard List on page 167 Languages list of languages supported by Windows Countries list of all countries in the world U S States and Territories list of all states and territories that make up the U S Canadian Provinces list of all Canadian provinces Age Ranges Use the predefined choices for age ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Numeric Ranges Use the predefined choices for numeric ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Years list of calendar years ranging from 2004 to 2014 Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item For examp
37. Height Border Thickness Alignment Reset When deciding how to align a picture you need to become familiar with these terms e baseline of text the imaginary line on which the text lies Some letters such as g p and y have descenders segments of letters that extend below the baseline e bottom of text the lowest section of a line to which a descender extends e top of text the highest spot of a line to which any segment of a letter extends e vertical center the midpoint between the top and bottom of the line top vertical 5 OCCUPYING r bottom The following table lists your alignment choices Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 419 Inserting Images To align Click this in the Illustration Alignment field The picture on the left margin allowing Left subsequent text to wrap around it Qi The picture on the right margin allowing subsequent text to wrap around it calls The top of the picture with the top of the Text Top Top texttop The vertical center of the picture with the baseline of the text middle The vertical center of the picture with the AbsMiddle vertical center of the text The bottom of the picture with the Bottom Baseline baseline of the text This is the default alignment bokon The bottom of the picture with the bottom AbsBottom of the text absbottom Resetting Width Height Border Thickness and Alignment If you adjust the picture s width he
38. John Edit content blocks needing approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 353 Managing Tasks Several comments can be added to a task to record its progress from assignment to completion To add a comment to a task follow these steps NOTE When an approver approves declines content from the Content Awaiting Approval screen if the content has an active task the Add Comments to Task screen appears The screen lets the approver insert comments about the task associated with the content 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 347 2 Click the Add Comment button EA 3 The Comments window appears Comments Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt hi A oy E 7 U A BBoa y E 4 Enter your comment in the editor Note that you can format and spell check the text using the toolbar buttons 5 Click the button 6 The View Task screen reappears with the comment at the bottom of the page Updating Comments To update a comment follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 354 Managing Tasks 1 Access the View Task screen that contains the comment you want to update as described in Viewing a Task on page 347 2 Click the comment s Date Time link illustrated below View Task oe ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Task Title Make sure to review your approval list Assigned T
39. Non Updated Count Oo Percent of Stale Folder Name Calendar Updated Count 0 Non Updated Count Oo Percent of Stale Folder Name Form_Example Updated Count 0 Hon Updated Count 1 Percent of Stale 100 8 If you want to include all subfolders under the selected folder click Include Subfolders 9 Click Get Result The Display of Information on the Report The Site Activity Update Report displays the following information for the content that satisfies the selection criteria e Folder Name the top level folder appears first in blue followed by any subfolders following the top level folders are the first level subfolders in alphabetical order Their subfolders do not appear but their content affects the totals for each subfolder e Updated Count number of content items in each folder that have been created or updated within the selected date range For every folder other than the top level folder which appears in blue the count includes content items in their subfolders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 130 Content Workflow Reports e Non Updated Count number of content items in each folder that have not been created or updated within the selected date range For every folder other than the top level folder which appears in blue the count includes content items in their subfolders e Percentage of Stale Content The percentage of content items that have not been either create
40. Rearranging the Items on a Menu 1 Click the button you want to move 2 Click Move Up and Move Down to move the button up or down one slot for each click Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 388 Customizing Your Toolbar Restoring Toolbars If you remove all toolbars from your menu and then want to restore the menus but do not have the Customize menu option follow these steps YS Place the cursor in the editor Right click the mouse A menu appears with a Redisplay toolbars option Click this option to restore all menus Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar To move a menu to a different toolbar location follow these steps 1 Creating a New Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the _ le E gi beginning of the menu Click the mouse Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere else on the toolbar Note that your Webmaster can define a menu so that it cannot reside on the same row with another menu If you move such a menu it will not remain on a row with another menu Instead it will move down to the next row After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Menu Place the cursor on the toolbar Right click the mouse A dropdown list appears Click Customize Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 389 Customizing Your Toolbar 4 The Toolbar Customization dialo
41. This command is a toggle which means the first time you click it it is on and the next time you click it it is off Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 445 Editing Images Polygon Standard Toolbar Button i Description Draws a polygon that is a closed figure surrounded by straight lines To use this command follow these steps 1 Click the polygon command 2 Drag the line in one direction as far as you want 3 Drag the line in the other directions to complete the polygon 4 Double click the mouse to terminate the polygon 5 To change the polygon s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Line Attributes Color Attributes Line Size E I Highlight Cancel Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 446 Editing Images Rectangle Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws a rectangle To use this command click the rectangle command drag a rectangle and release the mouse To change the rectangle s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Attnbubes Fa Line Attributes Color Attributes Line Size E M Highlight Cancel Redo Standard Toolbar Button Description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 447 Editing Images lf you use the Undo command and then decide
42. Working with Menus 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu 2 Click the View Menus button The View All Menus screen displays a list of menus in that folder hoe View All Menus Content r Content J4 Human Resources a Marketing ei sy ete e 3 News Sample menu 6 02 Sep 2004 03 15 PM 36 Products ae Support HE Syndication 4 Click the menu you want to view 5 The menu s options appear The following illustration describes the icon accompanying each option View Menu Products or 2 CY O view In English US Submenu 2Rc Cars B FOO RC Planes B E RC Lily O LIRC Redstar O L save 3 0 he Trinity Exhaust Pipe O D RE Sportster E lore Info 6 Click More Info to view the details about the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 302 Working with Menus View Menu test menu ia Co FF j aT ae a oa Fa alate Soc lin pe ph oe a ee i SRR eee ee eae eee ee Se gt sae Se oF tiie a Pica oP E N E T I A Ed a Pale nie caine weenie ED _ D serp ee oma re ps ee pees poms Pome poms Pome Po ee pee ee Po ee Poe po ee poe Poe Pe a e T ote fies pee Poe pole aa aT Tithe A RedStar Airplane smaller version B Servo Control Engineer 124 B Plastic Molder 123 yahoo lore Info Title test menu ID 6 Path Y Last User To Edit Application Administrator Last Edit Date 25 Jun 2004
43. You can change the size of the thumbnail images in the right frame The default size is small You can change it to medium or large NOTE You can only adjust the size of HTML or XML content If the content is an external file such as a Word document you cannot adjust the thumbnail size Note that menu options allow you to change just the selected image or all images in the right frame The new size is only used for the current viewing of the folder Once you view other folders or return to this one the default size is used Tesence with Markebno Interactive and Wi IF and BGT par Fi i EIn oe All Small All Medium All Large E an Pohanceie Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 220 Using Ektron Explorer To display the menu for changing the thumbnail size move the cursor to the text in the right frame and right click the mouse Then select View Removing Ektron Explorer from Display To remove Ektron Explorer from display click the X in the top corner of the left frame see below Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ektron Explorer eal contacti Thanks for E xplore Search information call you sho S Pas Last edited alendar Administrato 9 Form Example Application i Searching for CMS Content The Explorer s search feature lets you look for CMS content by entering some of the contents title or some of the its text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5
44. e an optional range of created or modified dates Only content created or updated within a date range is found by the search Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 55 Working with Folders and Content e the last name of the editor who updated the content most recently e the status of the content e any metadata criteria assigned to the folder e if the content includes Microsoft Word documents the size of the documents e fthe content includes Powerpoint presentations the number of slides in the presentation Each feature is explained below NOTE To help track words and phrases site visitors are entering on the search screen the Search Phrase Report provides a count of all phrases searched within a date range In Ektron CMS400 NET this report is available from the Smart Desktop gt Reports For documentation of this report see Search Phrase Report on page 134 Specifying the Kind of Content to Search Near the top of the screen check boxes let you determine the kinds of content to search M Content MW Forms M Assets Include Archived NOTE Assets only appears if your organization has implemented Ektron s Document Management feature Office documents and managed files See Also Using the Document Management Functionality on page 227 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 56 Working with Folders and Content Include Archived Content forms and assets that have been a
45. e kjeft e right Vertical If desired enter the caption s vertical alignment Caption Alignment e bottom e top After you complete the Table Properties dialog click OK to make the table comply with Section 508 Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes You can modify abbreviation ABBR and category AXIS attributes within a table To do so follow these steps Select one or more cells Right click the mouse On gt Select Table gt Cell Properties 4 Access the Cell Properties dialog The Cell Properties dialog includes fields that let you adjust the Abbreviation and Category Attribute field values see illustration below NOTE Your system administrator can add or remove the Accessibility fields from the Cell Properties dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 522 Section 508 Compliance Cell Properties x Span Rows Spanned Cancel Columns Spanned Layout Borders M Use Default Color f Not Specified Border Color C Percent i Word Wrap C Pizel Accessibility Horizontal Slignmert Abbreviation Vertical Alignment Categories Custom Background Background Color Background Image From File The following explains how to respond to these fields Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog i Abbreviation Sets or retrieves abbreviated text for the content in the tag Can be used to render non visual media such as s
46. move the cursor over it to see a popup box with the event name location and start and end times lf a Web page is linked to the event you can click the event name to jump to that page e Click the number that represents any day to view detail for that day illustrated below an 3 31 2005 Friday April 01 2005 As fs 00 AM 0 00 AM 2 00 PM birthday party 00 PM 00 PM e From the daily view you can see all events and the hours they span proceed to the previous or next day click a date in the upper left or right corner return to the month view by clicking on today s date view detail about an event by clicking on it e From the event view illustrated below you can view the event s location and start and end times Click the date to return to the daily view Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 323 Working with Calendars birthday party Friday April 01 2005 Location my house Start 12 00 PM End 1 00 PM Adding a Calendar Event Nore You can only add a calendar event if you have add or edit permission for the __ calendar s folder To add a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the calendar to which you want to add an event as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 320 NOTE You can also add a calendar event after viewing the View Events screen See Also Viewing a Calendar Event on page 329 2 Navigate to the month and day for
47. 2004 6 40 lf ViewletBuilder 8 In the left frame navigate to the folder that contains the files you want import 9 Inthe right frame click the checkbox next to each file you want to import You can only import files in the selected folder NOTE If you select both Office documents and managed files the Office documents are imported as Office documents and others are imported as managed files 10 In the Title field enter a title for all imported files See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 238 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 12 Click the Check in Efi or Submit for Publishing button E See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 232 and Adding Content on page 46 13 The selected files are imported into DM Editing a Managed File After a managed file is stored in DM follow these steps to edit it 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the managed file s folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 245 Using the Document Management Functionality 3 From the View Contents of Folder screen click the managed file 4 The Content tab displays the file name and a button to let you view the file within its host application View Content topic links Cy fs Bb a aei mmm Pe se n 7 3 I tte my a on Ee aaa IE AU Properti
48. 4 JavaScript Object Model evVVebEditPro error messages Windows P Service Pack 2 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 254 Working with Collections This section explains how to create collections Your system administrator would then modify content to display the collections on your Web site using the ecmCollection function or server control NOTE Your system administrator must assign to you permission to work with collections For details see the Collections chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual This section explains how to find create and manage collections through the following subtopics e Finding Collections on page 255 e Viewing a Collection on page 258 e Creating a Collection on page 260 e Editing Content in a Collection on page 267 e Reordering Collections List on page 268 e Editing Collection Information on page 269 e Deleting a Collection on page 270 e Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 2 0 e Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Features on page 272 Finding Collections Every collection is assigned to a folder If you want to find the collections assigned to any folder navigate to it and click the Collection button For more information see Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 256 Since collections can be assigned to several content folders the Modul
49. 77 e Managing Tasks on page 335 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 66 10 Save the file within the host application 11 Check in or submit the file for publishing as you would any content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 232 Importing Files via Drag and Drop You can import files to DM using drag and drop You can add one or several files using this method It doesn t matter whether the files are Office or Managed files NOTE If you upload a file using drag and drop whose type is not supported the Document Management functionality ignores it and moves on to the next file After the files upload a dialog reminds you which files types are supported See Also Supported Types of Documents on page 226 When you drag and drop a file into DM the file s name becomes its title The file is assigned a content ID and submitted to the approval process If either of the following is true the file s status is set to checked in e you are required to complete metadata for the file e the folder in which you are adding the file is set to create PDF documents when a file is published Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 247 Using the Document Management Functionality lf you add more than one file with the same name or the same file twice a number is assigned to the end of the title For example when adding a second test doc file the new file is named test doc 1
50. Accessing The Library scevicccaissncicneanccenedsunsscsninwesnsngetvecstvececiacnes 189 Library Folder Properties cccccsssccssssseesesseseenseeseeseseenseeses 191 Searching the Library ccsssececsssseescesseeseeenseeseesneeseeeseees 192 DNS E E A EEE B E E E E E E O EE A EE A 195 maae E A EE A E E O E E T 208 DEE A E E T be AE A E E E 208 Quicklinks and FOrmS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseenenaeeees 210 Using Ektron Explorer cccseceseeceseceneenseeeseneneees 212 Installing Ektron Explorer cccscessseseseceseseeseeeeeseeeeeeees 214 Displaying Ektron Explorer ccsssccsssesssseesesesesseeeseeeeseeoees 218 Searching for CMS Content ccssseeessesseeseeesseesseeneessenees 221 Inserting External Files into Ektron CMS400 NET 223 Using the Document Management Functionality 225 Supported Types of DoCuMents ccceeseeeeeseeseeneeeeeeees 226 Se D y APEN T E EE AE AE A E A E 228 Working with Office DOCUMENTS ccccceeseeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 228 Working with Managed Files ccsssecsssseesseseeseenseneeseeees 241 Importing Files via Drag and Drop cccsssseeesseeeeeeeneeeenees 247 Document WorkfloW nosis osicas scenisxacnintmnanesnnnsnnanespenennanensonestaatenses 250 Viewing Documents within the CMS s sccssssseesseeseees 251 Deleting a Document scccicccsssececcavends
51. Help Quick Start Manual diministrator Manual User Manual 5 Click on a link to open the documentation or Web page NOTE Your computer requires an internet connection to access the help page on Ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 367 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is a browser based Web content editor designed for dynamic Web sites It lets you create and publish your own Web content in any language supported by the operating system and your Web site More specifically eWebEditPro XML lets you perform Web page editing functions such as e copy content from any Windows based application e use Microsoft Word to edit Web content e cut copy and paste e find and replace text e check spelling e edit an image e change font style size attributes bold italics underline and color e begin lines with bullets or numbers e adjust indentation e right center or left justify text and images e adda bookmark hyperlink image or table e view your text as WYSIWYG or HTML code e insert or clean HTML source code You gain access to these functions either from the toolbar at the top of the editor window or from a menu that appears when you right click the mouse inside the editor Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 368 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML Using eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is like many other word processing applications You
52. Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 306 Working with Menus Deleting a Menu Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can delete a menu via e its content folder e menus module You cannot delete a menu from the navigation link on a Web page Deleting a Menu via Content Folder To delete a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 301 Click the Delete button Lu A confirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK to delete the menu NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its Jinks to content but has no effect on the content Deleting a Menu via Menus Module To delete a menu via its menus module follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 305 Click the Delete button 1 A confirmation message is displayed Click OK NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its links to content but has no effect on the content Deleting a Submenu 1 Access the View Menu page as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 305 2 Select the submenu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revis
53. Menu You access the Insert Table menu by clicking on the Insert Table button while the cursor is inside a table NOTE Before you click the button make sure the table is not selected that is the table is not Surrounded by small boxes When you do the following menu appears E Insert Table Insert Aow Insert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells sa Merge Welle Split Cell a Table Properties sta Cell Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 461 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Insert Table Inserts a new table where the Creating a Table on page 458 cursor is currently resting Insert Row Creates a new table row above the Adding or Removing Rows and row in which the cursor is currently Columns on page 469 resting Insert Column Creates a new table column next to Adding or Removing Rows and the column in which the cursor is Columns on page 469 currently resting Insert Cell Inserts a cell to the left of the cursor in a table Delete Rows Deletes table row in which the Adding or Removing Rows and cursor is currently resting Columns on page 469 Delete Column Deletes table column in which the Adding or Removing Rows and cursor is currently resting Columns on page 469 Delete Cells Deletes the selected cells a Merge Cells Combines the content
54. Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 2 7 Working with Menus you cannot select the menu s language it assumes the current language In contrast if you create a menu after choosing a content folder you can select a language during the menu creation process you cannot select the menu s folder it is automatically assigned to the root folder In contrast if you create a menu after choosing a content folder you select a folder while creating the menu Adding a Menu via Content Folder i o P eow Add Menu Navigate to the content folder that contains the content you want to display on the menu The content can reside in the selected folder or any of its subfolders In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu you want to create Click the View Menus button The View All Menus screen appears Click the Add button dh The Add Menu screen appears N uJ os os F ej sA p 5 s Pi pre Pe Poa ee ee aa oF Par p a Aa sm r 5 s n pre aT I5 5 Cnn EE a cn a a Pee ee r al pte Ss a 5 eae ii pet eee fee eae pas r e wha A sete Pe Sa Si 5 i Gr RE Pe pet ma aS a Hs ae ae ES r a ana a n a net aA ee ee ele be era ie a ene ur foo Meo Nao for ae ve br bma ra ora yaa onal ar pra at vrs ee ea _ ia Title English fU 5 4 Advance Settings 7 Atminimum a menu requires a title If you want to add more information click Advance
55. NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 385 Customizing Your Toolbar Removing Or Adding Menus To remove or add a menu follow these steps Place the cursor on the toolbar Right click the mouse A dropdown list appears It displays all menus available to you and the Customize option Z Edit e View As ve Paragraph Format Format e Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Text Direction Customize NOTE If Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar Menus that are checked appear on your toolbar In the above example the Special Characters View As Format and Paragraph Format menus appear The Table Position Objects and Text Directions menus which are not checked are available but do not currently appear on the toolbar 4 To adda menu to your toolbar that appears on the list but is not currently checked place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse A check mark appears and the menu appears on the toolbar To remove a menu from your toolbar place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse The check mark disappears and the menu no longer appears on the toolbar Removing or Adding Menu Items 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 386 Customizing Your Toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize NOTE lf Customize does not appe
56. NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 414 Inserting Images NOTE The title is also the alt text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display for any reason 5 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box lf you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box Click OK The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the picture s properties For more information see e Adjusting a Picture on page 416 e Setting a Border on page 418 e Aligning the Picture on page 419 Adding Space around the Picture on page 421 Editing the Picture s Title on page 422 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box When using the second Media Selection dialog box you can insert a picture from any folder available to your computer whether the folder is on your computer or a remote computer or from the Web server Your Webmaster determines which pictures are available on the Web server To insert a picture from a folder available to your computer click Select New File navigate to the file of interest and click OK the Web server click the Select Server File button You are prompted to enter a User Name and Password Your Webmaster assigns these codes to you
57. New Roman 3 12 pt A dy E 7 U B Bom Y sA John Edit URL btp d l9 166 0 17 CMs 3005 amplefndes asp rid 44 zi Send Email Cancel The following sections explain how to set up and use Instant email e Conditions for Instant eMail on page 29 e Where Instant email is Available on page 30 e Modifying Instant eMail on page 30 Conditions for Instant eMail e You must have a valid email address set up in the user profile If not email icons do not appear in Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Updating Your User Profile on page 358 e Your system administrator must enable the feature Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 29 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Where Instant email is Available Instant email is available from several screens that display users and user groups Typically you click a user name or the email icon to launch an email Screens in the following Ektron CMS400 NET features support instant email e Smart Desktop e Tasks e Approvals e Reports e User and user group setup Wherever instant email is available one of the email icons appears Modifying Instant eMail When the email screen appears the following information is copied from Ektron CMS400 NET into the email Source of Default Information Editable User you selected to receive the email If the user does Yes not have valid email address an error message appears on the screen see below If you then
58. Once on page 238 e The Work Offline Option on page 239 e Editing an Office Document on page 239 Notes on Working with Office Documents e If you have an Excel spreadsheet open outside DM then you open one within it and navigate to another template page on your Web site then return to the spreadsheet outside DM a new open worksheet appears Close it e If you are working with an Excel spreadsheet the File and Open toolbar buttons within Excel appear active that is not grayed out but are not operable Ea Microsoft Excel Eile Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window e lf you access an Office document on a Web page you must close that instance of the browser before proceeding to another Web page If you do not close the browser and continue to add or edit documents the original document continues to use up your computer s resources Creating a New Office Document To create a new Office document follow these steps 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 229 Using the Document Management Functionality 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the document See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view a list of items you can add Yiew Contents of Folder Conte HTML Content Office Documents Managed Files 4 Select Office Document
59. Or ii Ph zi yo Peace ees Thur rsday Au 200 Fail jt JZE i E reer ea r A oe a A G r ee oll PON apa epee eo R e r E a r E ar ga get Opel a AN z ant Summary Metadata Schedule v Apply Style Heading 1 3 12 pt A 4 E 7 U A PREABRAA SPA om Ye AAAG aay e kal 2 nbsp e m i mBe2lBE vt Click the down arrow ge to return the content area to normal size The top row of buttons and title also return to the screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 45 Working with Folders and Content Adding Content If you have permission to add content to a folder you can create content for that folder After you create the content your system administrator must insert in onto a page on your Web site The following flowchart illustrates a typical sequence of events when working with content Approval Chain Publish to Web site To add content follow these steps Edit Browse to the folder where you want to create the new content Select a language from the language dropdown list Click the Add button The Add Content window opens oe I Create content in the editor using the following table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 46 Working with Folders and Content Responding to the Fields on the Add Content Screen Se Enter a title for the content Add to Check if you want to save a Quicklink to this Quicklinks content Table Se
60. Report Recipients If you cannot easily find a user a search of all users and groups is available To use it follow these steps 1 Display the report that you want to email Click the email button A list of all users and user groups in your Ektron CMS400 NET appears Click the Search for User button h The following screen appears First Name Last Name User Name cend Errail Enter whatever information you know about the users Click the Send email button All users that satisfy the search criteria appear on a new screen 9 Click the checkbox of every user or group to receive the report Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 117 Content Workflow Reports Approvals Reports Each content item awaiting your approval appears on this report Thus you can quickly find all such content without searching through every folder The View All Content Awaiting Approval screen displays the following information about this content Description Title of content Request Type Request made for the content Either Publish or Delete Start Date Start date if any assigned to the content Determines when content will go live on Web site C Below is an example of the View All Content Awaiting Approval screen View All Content Awaiting Approval iew English Us lt All Types Title Request Type Start Date Date Modified JCMS Develoner Publish Sunday
61. Revision 5 69 Scheduling Content to Begin and End What Happens After Set an End Date If you set an end date to content and it gets published to your Web site the content is visible on the Web site When content reaches its end date you have three choices for what to do with it These are explained in Setting Archive Options on page 70 If your choice means the content will not appear on the Web site Ektron recommends having another content item ready to replace it If not and a site visitor goes to the page containing the content he sees the template without the content Appearance on Content Reports After content reaches its end date it appears on the Expired Content report which helps you keep track of expired content See Also Expired Content Report on page 125 Also the Content to Expire report lists all content whose end date will occur within a number of days that you specify See Also Content to Expire Report on page 125 setting Archive Options After setting an End Date you can specify content s archive options which determine what happens upon reaching its end date time To be eligible for any option the content must reach its end date time progress through its approval chain and be published Until those events occur the content remains visible both within its content folder and on the site The archive options illustrated below appear below the Start Date and End Date fields on th
62. Update Activity Report 127 Smart Desktop definition 20 hiding left panel 25 modifying folder display 23 navigating 22 set as start location for user 362 Smart Detect field eWebDiff 99 space character inserting 378 spacing cell 499 spanning table columns 491 table rows 491 special characters inserting 379 spelling check a single word 405 check as you type 402 check on demand 403 check selected text 405 checking file addresses 405 checking Internet addresses 405 checking uppercase words 405 checking words with numbers 405 fix errors 403 splitting a cell 496 staged content block viewing 37 stale content report 127 start date content block setting 66 setting results 68 start time event calendar 326 style class assigning to text 379 submenus adding as menu item 288 adding items 289 definition 276 deleting 307 submit toolbar button 36 submitted content definition 544 summary adding 73 content creating for existing content block 75 creating for new content block 74 editing 75 T tables alignment 474 background color applying 476 deleting 477 background image deleting 478 inserting 477 border color 479 invisible 480 size 481 columns adding 469 deleting 469 spanning 491 specifying 468 creating 458 deleting 459 inserting within a table 460 locking in position 382 rows adding 469 deleting 469 spanning 491 specifying 468 section 508 518 width setting by percentage 471 setting by pixels 473 ta
63. Web site Its appearance on this report indicates that it is due for review See Also Setting Archive Options on page 70 Each item on the report contains the following information Title Title of content ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Date Date and time the content was last updated Modified Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Removing Expired Content from Site lf you review content and decide it should no longer appear on your site follow these steps to remove it The content will be visible if you browse to it through the Workarea but won t appear to site visitors 1 e oa From the Expired Content Report click the content From the View Content screen click the Edit button L Click the Schedule tab Under Action on End Date click Archive and remove from site expire Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 124 Content Workflow Reports Expired Content Report The Expired Content report displays all content whose end date has passed Such content is no longer visible on the Web site Each item on the list contains the following information Column Description Title of content i ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content End Date Date and time the content expired Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Ed
64. When clicked a screen prompts you to enter keywords and then finds content containing the keywords The Editing Process After you find content click the Edit button 4 to open it in an editor Below is an example of content within the editor Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 6 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Edit Content in Folder Content Wa ba Tl Title Se eee English U S Content Meta Data Schedule E Apply Style Normal 10 pt A Os E 7 U 45 BBBRBAA SOY Aeee E amp 2 nbsp e TH j a e H lae f A Native NET Content Management Solution Improve developer productivity and kt experience with drag and drop CMS Ac A AA L components kel AE e The editor resembles popular word processing E N You can enter text then select it and click a button to change its display properties For example you can make text bold change the color or copy and paste it You can also insert images tables links to other Web pages and check spelling The Lifecycle of Content After you edit content you typically submit it for approval to one or more individuals who oversee changes to your Web site These people can review edit and approve the change When the last approver signs off the new content becomes available on the Web site In some cases you are one of the content approvers In this case you receive an email notif
65. about to edit your document im MS Word Due to the limitations of HTML there may be a loss of formatting Ls Do you wish to proceed Microsoft Word opens Any content that was in eWebEditPro XML when you pressed the Word button is copied to Word Edit content as desired Press File gt Close Another warning like the one in Step 3 may appear Press Yes to copy the edited content back to eWebEditPro XML When done return to eWebEditPro XML and press the Word toolbar button again Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 407 Editing in Microsoft Word 9 If you change your mind and decide to restore the content to the way it was before you edited it in Word press the undo button If you want to restore the Word changes after pressing Undo press the redo button Uploading an Image in a Microsoft Word Document If you insert an image into the Word content and then paste that content or save it the following dialog box appears The box lists all images in the content and asks if you want to copy them from your computer to your organization s Web server Files Waiting for Upload Files for Upload Upload Now Upload Later Cancel Woodgrove Re About Estimated Upload Time 00 00 1 2 If you are ready to publish your Web content and want to display the image click Update Now If you plan to add more content later you can click Upload Later and upload all images at th
66. adding files using the Add Content buttons you can choose whether the files are published Submitted to the approval chain checked in or saved See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 232 This process requires more mouse clicks than drag and drop You choose a folder an document type browse to the folder where the files are located add the details and publish the files Document Workflow An document proceeds through the same workflow as any other type of content A diagram is below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 250 Using the Document Management Functionality Edit Approval Chain Luj Publish to Web site on schediwed See Also e Viewing Documents within the CMS on page 251 e Deleting a Document on page 252 e Approving Documents on page 252 e Adding Documents to Collections and Menus on page 252 e Document Reports on page 252 Viewing Documents within the CMS To view a document follow these steps From the Workarea select the Content folder Select the document s folder From the View Content screen click the document a ee E a The View Content screen for the document appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 251 Using the Document Management Functionality Deleting a Document You can only delete a document if its status is Checked In or Approved To delete a document follow these steps From the Workarea select th
67. advantage of this feature is that you can see a Web page as it will appear to visitors to your site Continue editing until you are satisfied with its appearance To learn what the border color indicates see Appendix A Content Statuses on page 540 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 3 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET The Floating Toolbar When content s border is visible you can right click the mouse to display a floating toolbar an example is in the green box below Our Camnanwv LY Edit UT view History o our customers T Delete to conduct i i sion is to develop Add Task alability flexibility Title Corporate Published ang alfordabte P ie nE fill Rogers founded ey Workarea for Application Administrator ced on the that creating and managing Web Ne a content should be simple and 5 affordable Today Ektron is based on the same principle Logout Toolbar buttons let you act on the displayed content and view important information about it The toolbar buttons change depending on the content s status or your permissions for the content For example one toolbar button lets you edit the content while another lets you view previous versions of it If granted permission by your administrator you can create new content and edit or delete existing ones Most of your work with Ektron CMS400 NET involves working with content Buttons on the Menu
68. after you choose this option Marital Status Use the predefined choices for marital status You can see the values on the screen after you choose this option Allow Click More than one to allow the site visitor to select more than one item on Selection the data entry screen Otherwise click Only one For example if you click More than one and the choices are music art sports the user could select all three choices If you click Only one the user could only select one choice A selection is required Check this box if the user must select at least one item in the list Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 163 Working with HTML Forms SS Appearance Click Vertical List to arrange the choices vertically ee a art music sports Click Horizontal List to arrange the choices horizontally el le at music sports Click List Box to display all choices in a box The box lengthens to display all entries Interests i MUSIC sports Item Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item Value For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here Item Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen Text After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size f
69. and saves the file a new copy is stored In this way you can review and if needed restore a prior version This chapter explains the Document Management Functionality through the following topics e Supported Types of Documents on page 226 e Security on page 228 e Working with Office Documents on page 228 e Working with Managed Files on page 241 e Importing Files via Drag and Drop on page 247 e Document Workflow on page 250 e Viewing Documents within the CMS on page 251 e Deleting a Document on page 252 e Approving Documents on page 252 e Adding Documents to Collections and Menus on page 252 e Document Reports on page 252 Supported Types of Documents e Microsoft Office 2000 or later documents Word Excel Powerpoint Project Publisher Visio etc e Managed files any Windows executable file such as zip files PDFs txt files graphic files such as gif and jpeg etc NoTE The file types that can be uploaded are determined by your administrator If you try to upload the wrong type of file the following error message appears File Type Not Supported P j File type not supported only file types supported are doc 1ds ppt pdf gif jpg jpeg tet log vsd dot zip Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 226 Using the Document Management Functionality Office Documents You can edit any Office document within the Content tab j
70. appears next to it 3 From this screen you can perform the following functions Add anew event See Also Adding a Calendar Event on page 324 View edit and delete an existing event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 330 Working with Calendars Editing Calendar Events The section explains how to edit a single event or a recurring series of events NOTE You can only edit a calendar event if you have edit permission for the folder to which the calendar is assigned See Also Adding a Calendar Event on page 324 Editing a Single Event After a calendar event is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location times etc To edit a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to edit as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 324 Click the event you want to edit The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 331 Working with Calendars Edit Calendar Event E i LU 4 AN a d i Pe a E rna A Ai aa Event Title company meeting Event f montreal room Location One Time Recurring Date 56 Apr 2006 pa Start 1 00 00 PM End 2 00 00 PM W Display the times for the event Hyperlink C Launch link in a new browser Event Type 4yvatlable Selected Company Holiday gt Company Event Trade S
71. appears with original language content Translate into the new language then delete the original content If desired you can click the Translate button 4 If you do a new screen prompts you to identify the original language new language and the glossary to use Then the content is translated If you like the translation click Paste Content and the translated content replaces the original Once the translated content is inserted into the editor you can edit it as needed 5 When you save the content it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language Deleting Content NOTE The ability to delete content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Delete button i on the screen you do not have permission to do so The Delete command lets you permanently delete obsolete content from your Web site You can only delete content if its status is Approved Like publishing deleted content must go through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content on page 86 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 51 Working with Folders and Content You can delete a single content item or several content items in a folder Both procedures are explained below Deleting a Single Content Item To delete one content item follow these steps Deleting Conte
72. approval chain for the content this is replaced by a SUBMIT button If you click Publish but the content item has an incomplete task assigned to another user the content cannot be published Instead the following error message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer This content has been submitted Buk waiting For completion of associated tasks ataa The publishing process will not proceed until the task has been completed The user to whom the task is assigned must complete it before you can publish the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 87 Approving Declining Content Reject changes and keep current version of content live on the Web site Check out content and change it if desired Toggle between the currently published version and submitted version of content This can help you compare versions See Also Staged Content on page 54 7 View Published Staged View Diff View differences between the version awaiting approval and the currently published content See Also Comparing Versions of Content on page 95 Return to previous screen Approve Decline Several Content Items To approve several submitted content items without reviewing them follow these steps P 1 Select the submitted content you want to approve as described in Approve Decline One Content Item on page 86 2 Click the Approve All button I 3 The following message appears Microsoft Internet E
73. assigned to this calendar See Also Understanding Event Types on page 327 One section of the Add Calendar Events screen displays available event types and lets the user assign them to the event Event Type Available Selected Company Holiday gt Mo Event Types Trade Show Title Company Event By default this text is Event Type Your system administrator can edit the text Event Types Available A green check means you can add event types to the calendar Event Types Required A green check means that when entering a calendar event you must assign an event type to it Instructions If this calendar uses event types text appears at the bottom of the screen that explains how to use the event type selection box By default this text is Select Event Type to View Select Event Type To View Opa All OO Company Holide Trade Show Your system administrator can change this text Show All Label If this calendar uses event types the list of event types appears at the bottom of the screen On top of the list is text indicating that all event types will appear on the calendar By default this text is Show All Select Event Type To View Chay AJl Company Holiday rade Show r Your system administrator can change this text Long Description Lets the user enter additional text while adding a calendar event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 319 Working with Calendars SS
74. below assume you entered these words into the Search Text field e partners e content e Monday e employee e green All Words All Words works like an and function The search returns only content that has the words partners and content and Monday and employee and green The words can be in any order within the file Any Word Any Word is almost the opposite of All of the Words It works like an or function When you select this option the search returns all files that have at least one of the words entered in the search text field In other words it returns files with the word partners or content or Monday or employee or green Exact Phrase Exact Phrase returns content that have all five words in the order specified in the search text field A better example would be to search for a phrase such as Content Management Solution The search yields only content with that exact phrase Contains Match Partial Words Although you cannot search for wild cards the Match Partial Words option does almost the same For example enter at into the search text field then select Match Partial Words The search returns all content with the letters at finding words such as At Bat Chatter Atoll ATM etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 59 Working with Folders and Content Additional Search Criteria The next section of the search screen lets you choose one or more customized search criteria Note that
75. can assign each file a unique title Also any summary metadata schedule comment and task information applies to that file only If you import several at once you are not required to assign a title If you do not assign a title the file s title is the same as its name including the extension For example Proposal for Town Manager PDF If you do assign a title to several files appended to the title in parentheses is the original file name including the extension So for example if you import three personnel forms at once and assign them the title Personnel the titles might look like this Personnel Vacation Request doc Personnel Direct Deposit Form doc Personnel Absence Report Form doc Also any summary metadata schedule comment or task information you enter applies to all files So tt would be efficient to enter this kind of information if it applies to all or even most of the files For example if you are importing 10 files and eight have the same metadata insert the metadata before checking them in Then change the metadata for the remaining two After you check in or publish these files you can edit the summary metadata schedule comment or task information by selecting the files individually Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 238 Using the Document Management Functionality The Work Offline Option After creating or editing a document you can save it to your local compute
76. chain is indicated by red text on the Approvals line Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 122 Content Workflow Reports Start Date None Specified End Date None Specified Date Created 07 Jun 2004 10 37 AM Approval Method Force All 4oprovers Lpprovals EditorInchiet SportsEditor XML Configuration None Specified HTML Content 4ssumedtinheritec Path Sports Content Searchable es Content Pending Start Date Report The Pending Start Date Report displays all content that was approved but whose start dates haven t occurred Each content item on the report contains the following information Title Title of content ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Start Date Date and time content will go live on Web site Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Editing Content with a Pending Start Date You may edit content on the Pending Start Date Content report To do so follow these steps 1 Click the content you want to view 2 The View Content page is displayed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 123 3 Content Workflow Reports Using the toolbar at the top of the page perform any action available Refresh Reminder Report The Refresh Report displays all content whose end date has passed and whose archive option is set to Refresh Report This content is still visible on the
77. content If you add any other type of file the file name appears as a hyperlink within the content When a site visitor viewing that page clicks the hyperlink the inserted file is launched Adding a Library File to Content 1 Invoke the editor by adding or editing content in Ektron CMS400 NET Edit Content in Folder Press Releases Title Ektron Announces Winner of All Stars Customer Compet English U S amp Apply Style Normal 3 2010 pt A Og TUA X TABBAR SS Blo aly a Paaa E i amp pi M W amp 2 mp eeom gi E gt B i Ektron Announces Winner of All Stars Customer Competition u i ml uFi IH i il 2 Place the cursor within the content where you want the library file to appear Click the library button fi The library opens Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 205 Library Folder 5 Navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to insert Library Library Folder Content images H O books PAOD elim vica a Calendar ETI ETETE ae ee ae ET RETE wore Ey ete es foot og ole ETET pe ale ee Pore ae RETE safer Peel ain es fee YE Cent vMedicalServi Tile Tr EL a a a RE TET 7 LU IL ee ANM uploadediImages faim 2 git Gi Esi I Contacts T ANIM on DEMAND H0 Dynamic Content In Co ATRA crea W Hi FAC N a5 Form Example ChMS400 Logo uploadedimagqesicms400 50 qif 1 HS IntranetBasic a al is MS400 net 0 myte
78. content that can be edited independently The border disappears when you move the cursor out of the area Your system administrator controls the design of each page and determines where the content appears NOTE The colored borders appear when you are not in site preview mode See Also Site Preview on page 11 Also your administrator can set up your system so that the borders always appear on a page instead of appearing only when you move the mouse over them Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 2 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Our Company Intranet t the heart of Acme is our commitment to our customers and our dedication to finding a better way to conduct business effectively and efficiently Our mission is to develop best of breed solutions that encompass scalability flexibility and ease of use without losing focus of being affordable LTI In 1996 William Acmefounded Acme Services based on the philosophy that services should be simple and affordable Today Acme is based on the same principle Acme released its first product a services toal that allows users to deliver services quickly and easily Because thistool is so easy to integrate and use sales quickly grew and Acme expanded with offices in Amherst New Hampshire the ma United Kingdom and Germany 4cmes services s tool has became a leader in the industry and partnerships have been made with every major services vendor The
79. dropdown list to view the document types you can add Erre View Contents of Folder Content Managed Files All Types HTML Content Language ID Office Documents 1033 2g Wanaged Files BERTA N JE EE folders 1033 41 Select Managed Files The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the managed files under a different language open the dropdown list and select the language Mar 2005 03 29 Mar 2005 01 14 Click the Add Several Files button Ta The View Contents of Folder screen splits in two resembling Windows Explorer The left section displays the folder structure of your PC and its network drives The right section displays the contents of the current folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 244 Using the Document Management Functionality Edit Content Title English fU 5 4 M Add to Quicklinks table M Content Searchable Content Search Data Schedule H Favorites Modified 4 My Documents 0O application error upon checkin of word SKE 3 8 2005 2 08 3 B Camtasia Studio 1 s msg at beg of installation aif SKB 10 22 2004 11 2 p LL My eBooks O untitled gif 11KB 12 21 2004 4 38 E caes C approval method gif IZKB 7 22 2004 5 04 H E My Webs O editfalder_properties gif 21KB 6 14 2004 4 13 LG webworks i E dental patient example gif 202KB 42972004 5 30 7 Start Menu CI Sample jpg 1OKB 3 4 28
80. end date setting for content 69 end time calendar event 326 eWebDiff window 98 exit without save WeblmageFX command 440 exit WeblmageFX command 439 Explorer Ektron changing thumbnail size 220 displaying 218 inserting external files 223 installing 214 introduction 212 search feature 221 extensions file allowed in library 192 image allowed in library 192 F files copying to library 195 extensions library setting 192 library inserting into content 204 overwriting 201 viewing 198 library editing title 200 finding content block 6 text 398 floating toolbar 4 folders button for deleting 35 delete 65 information available when viewing 38 fonts background color 380 color 380 heading size 379 size 380 style 379 form elements toolbar 384 forms adding to content 210 HTML accessing folder 139 assigning task 170 creating 141 creating content block 144 database 185 deleting 185 editing content block 184 introduction 183 summary 184 field validation options 155 implementing on Web page 170 inserting fields 147 calendar field 168 checkbox 151 choices 161 hidden text 152 password 157 select list 165 text 153 text area 159 introduction 135 mailto 185 processing overview 137 reports exporting 177 reports viewing 173 structure of data 137 toolbar 185 toolbar options 145 validation 150 viewing 177 properties 177 viewing 210 freehand WeblmageFX command 440 G gray content border color mea
81. feature click the automatic spell check button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 402 Checking Spelling When you click the button the spell checker reviews every word in the file A wavy red line appears under any word whose spelling is not found in the system s dictionary The spell checker continues to review each word as you type it marking any words not in the dictionary NOTE Depending on the speed of your computer there may be a short delay between the time you type an incorrect word and when the wavy red line appears Also the spell check does not check a word until you enter a space character after the word Fixing Spelling Errors There are two ways to fix a spelling error indicated by a wavy red line e Click the misspelled word and then right click A menu displays words that are similar to the misspelled word Click the correct word e If you know the correct spelling type the correction Checking Spelling Upon Demand lf you do not want to use the spell check as you type feature you can begin spell checking whenever you wish To do this click the spell check button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 403 Checking Spelling When you do the system checks each word in the file If the spell check finds a word in none of the dictionaries it displays the Spelling dialog box Spelling Mot in Dictionary O leal E O leal E All Sugges
82. for content by any status the search results display only the most recently published version If a version has never been approved nothing appears Custom Fields Custom fields are defined by your system administrator and applied to content by its author or editor They are custom defined so would be different for every site The custom search fields appear below the Status field Fields that Apply to MS Office Files Only Size of Document As displayed on the read only Size field on the File Properties window s General tab Number of slides As displayed on the read only Statistics Slides field on PowerPoint PowerPoint s File Properties window s Statistics tab Result Display Options At the top of the search screen a pull down list lets you choose the how to display the search results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 61 Working with Folders and Content Search Content Folder View Description option If the item is an image display the Title image in the left column If not l ANM OW DEMAND Airm ve on Demand Conference and Exhibit display its title ELLET ELE er ey rap be iia IETEN oe al l Ektron CMS400 Net logo large size display the item s CMS AQO net g g Description Teaser Note Mixed search results require the Internet Explorer browser version 6 or greater Display item s title in the left column Title Type Folder Name ee te SIM Images
83. for the document illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 78 Adding or Editing Metadata Edit Content in Folder Content Title cms Developer English U 5 4 Content Summary Meta Data Schedule Comment title CMS Developer Defaut current character count 13 500 max keywords leweaoo NET CMS Defaut current character count 15 500 max Separator Character description CMS400 developer section Defaut i current character count 24 500 max Separator Character robots index follow EE current character count 12 S00 max Separator Character j Seg rch Data Then anyone visiting your Web site can find that document by its part number or a range of part numbers using the field on your Web site s search screen illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 79 Adding or Editing Metadata Search Text Search All the words C Any of the words Exact Phrase Match Partial Words Part number retween an See Also Entering or Editing Metadata on page 82 NOTE When your system administrator sets up metadata he determines whether or not is it publicly viewable If it is the search field appears on the search screen that site visitors use along with the search screen in the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea If the data is not publi
84. function See Also Form Folders and Content on page 138 eh Search folder Look for forms in current folder that Searching the Workarea on satisfy user specified criteria page 55 View archived forms in this folder Setting Archive Options on page 71 See Also Working with HTML Forms on page 135 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 140 Working with HTML Forms Creating a New Form The screen you use to create a new form is broken down into five simple steps After you complete all steps you will have a new form that s ready to collect whatever information you need To make the task even easier Ektron CMS400 NET provides sample forms that you can start with then customize As explained in Mailto or Database Form on page 184 form data can be emailed and or saved to a database Forms created using the procedure described below are saved to a database by default but not emailed To change either setting use the Edit Properties screen See Editing a Form s Properties on page 184 To create a new form follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a form in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 923 1 Access a Forms folder as described in Accessing the Forms Folder on page 139 2 From the language drop down select the language in which to create the form 3 C
85. if you enter more than one criterion only content satisfying all criteria appears on the search results screen Fields that Apply to Content Forms and Assets Search criterion Comments Date Created Date Modified Last Editor s Last Name Description The title of the content form or asset You can enter a partial word For example entering Part yields the following results e Multi Hospital Nurse Executive Participation e Ektron Partners and Customers You can also enter more than one word or phrase as long as they are in the correct sequence The content or form s comments which can be inserted via the Comment tab The file s creation date You can enter a single date or a range of dates The search returns all items with that creation date that Satisfy all other criteria The late date when the file was modified You can enter a single date or a range of dates The search returns all items with that edit date that satisfy all other criteria The last name surname of the user who most recently changed the content or form This is taken from the Last Name field on the User Information screen The search returns all items last edited by that user that satisfy all other criteria Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 60 Working with Folders and Content Status The content status See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 523 Note Although you can search
86. insert a valid email address the email is sent If desired you can add recipients by _ _ typing them ae it eet ee a a ce este into this field 1 Administrater Ektron com If you specify a group to receive the message as long as one group member has a valid email address all group members with valid addresses receive the email Subject If the email message is linked to content its title appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 30 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Field Source of Default Information Editable Body of If the email message is linked to content a link to the Yes message content appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 31 Working with Folders and Content Working with Folders and Content Every content item resides in the Content folder or one of its subfolders So to work with existing content or create a new content you must first navigate to its folder A typical content folder screen appears below It consists of three sections e The top left frame shows the folder structure You can click any folder to display its content in the right frame while its subfolders appear below it e The right frame shows content in the currently selected folder Above the right frame is a toolbar of buttons that represent tasks you can perform on selected content e The lower left frame shows Ektron CMS400 NET s top level folders
87. it into DM Importing One Managed File To import a managed file into DM follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 241 Using the Document Management Functionality See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 238 and Drag and Drop File Uploading Vs the Add Content Buttons on page 250 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the file See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view the document types you can add View Contents of Folder Content Managed Files All Tyoes HTML Content Office Documents 1033 26 4 Select Managed Files 5 The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the managed file under a different language click the dropdown list and select the language Standard Mar 2005 03 29 Mar 2005 01 14 6 Click the Add Content button 7 The Edit Content screen opens as shown below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 242 Using the Document Management Functionality Edit Content eS k ni K aih ee ee ee ETTET TIETE Pe Oe PS a a ia Pan ee Pe pee Pon he Po be Pek Pe Pee Pe Pek he pet fe Pek ee Pett fe Poked te Poked Ce Patel ee Pode pol te Pokal ee Poke te Poked ee Poel ee Poet he Pee te Poke ee Poked fe fe Toe Title English C
88. n i Tl Ii lhi 2 Click the library button ff 3 The library opens 4 Navigate to the folder that will contain the file after you insert it 5 From the File types dropdown select the type of file you want to insert 6 Click the Add Library button ie A new screen appears Browse to the file you want to insert Or you can click the search button j to search for a file to insert Enter a Description for the file lf metadata is required for the library item you must complete it Metadata fields may appear in the lower section of the screen 10 Click the Add Library button is 11 The file is inserted into the selected library folder and the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 207 Library Folder Hyperlinks For a definition of the term hyperlinks see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 188 Adding Hyperlinks You must copy hyperlinks to the library before content creators can insert them into content To copy a hyperlink to the library follow the procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 196 The only difference is that you insert a hyperlink instead of a file Viewing Hyperlinks To view a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 198 The only difference is that you view a hyperlink instead of a file Editing Hyperlinks To edit a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Editing a File
89. number or A positive whole number or no response blank Non negative whole number A positive whole number required Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 155 Working with HTML Forms Option Characteristics of Valid Response Decimal number or blank A decimal number for example 12 345 or 12 or blank A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be a period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 Decimal number required A decimal number it cannot be blank of none one or two decimal places A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 gt gt gt That is 12 is 12 0000 Percent 0 100 required A whole number from 0 to 100 a a a where a is one or more characters email address list Several email addresses Each address s format is a a a where a is one or more characters The user must separate each address with a semicolon Zip code US 5 nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnnnn nnnn Zip code US required 5 nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnNNNn nnnn A response is required Social Security US Nine di
90. on Insert or edit a table Introduction to E Table Tables on page 457 Edit content in Microsoft Word Editing in Microsoft Edit in Microsoft Word on page 407 Word Switches to Data Design Mode Design Mode vs Data Entry Mode on page 179 Hd Data Design Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer feature ro Switches to Data Entry Mode Design Mode vs Data Entry Mode __ _ _ Data Entry Mode on Button only appears when page 1 9 eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer feature Display the page content as WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get E View as WYSIWYG p WYSIWYG is the ability to see in the editor what will appear when user views the Web page Display the page content as HTML Viewing and Editing Hay View as HTML HTML on page 511 el Copyright Insert a blank space character Although you can add spaces in the editor using the lt space gt bar on the keyboard those spaces are ignored when the content is displayed by a browser Insert copyright symbol Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 378 Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Registered Trademark i and Special Characters Fi Remove Style Style 4pply Style Heading Size Norrral 7 Times New Roman E Font Style Insert special characters such as
91. on ueo Program Like content summaries can include images and files as well as different font styles and sizes This chapter explains how to create summaries and how they can help navigation within your site Your system administrator determines how to display the summaries on your site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 73 Adding a Content Summary Creating Summaries There are two ways to create summaries e for anew content see Creating a Summary on New Content on page 74 e for an existing content see Creating a Summary for Existing Content on page 75 Creating a Summary on New Content 1 Navigate to the folder in which you want to create the content 2 Click the Add Content button The Add Content screen appears i BE s Eai i Ib ER Aa EEE AAE ASNS EAT E EASE E E R AS SIA VENS ANAE RENE RRAS EE AETA ANEA E E EA bf a 7 n a eo a oF hh r r F T T J 7 7 F j Title Comment I i Add to Quicklinks table M Content Searchable Start Date TS End Date ao PAoply Style gt Moral Verdana 2 10 pt R A J HEHE 7 U jeee z Eg Tas ui 1 Hi Ii Il IU 3 Insert a Title and content See Also Adding Content on page 46 Click the Summary tab Enter summary information for the content The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in the configuration setup screen Ektron CMS400
92. only in delivered code form Each copy of the Software is licensed for use only on a single URL Each license is valid for the number of seats listed below the Basic Package Any use of the Software beyond the number of authorized seats contained in the Basic Package without paying additional license fees as provided herein shall cause this license to terminate Should CUSTOMER wish to add seats beyond the seats licensed in the Basic Package the CUSTOMER may add seats on a block basis at the then current price for additional seats see product pages for current price The Basic Packages are as follows Ektron CMS100 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS200 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS300 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS400 NET Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro XML Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL For purposes of this section the term seat shall mean an individual user provided access to the capabilities of the Software The CUSTOMER may not modify alter reverse engineer disassemble or decompile the Software This software product is licensed not sold 2 Duration This License shall continue so long as CUSTOMER uses the Software in compliance with this License Should CUSTOMER breach any of its obligations here
93. site visitors meets your criteria For example a validation rule can specify that a site visitor s response to the Telephone field conforms to a standard format for example 7 or 10 digits If the response does not conform an error message informs the site visitor of the problem The input must conform before the form can be submitted For a list of validation rule types see Validation Options on page 155 When Validation Rules are Applied Validation rules are applied when a site visitor submits an entire form not as soon as the input is entered If invalid input is found the error message that you define appears The site visitor must change his response to conform to the validation rule When he does the next field is checked and if that is invalid its error message appears etc TIP If you apply validation rules to more than one field include the field name in the error message For example enter The name field only allows text This is good practice because error messages only appear after the form is submitted and if the message does not identify the field the user may not know which field needs correction Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 150 Working with HTML Forms Form Fields Inserting a Checkbox Field A Checkbox field is only one character wide and accepts one of two possible values checked or unchecked For example C Check if you are over 65 To insert a checkbox field f
94. steps to import any document into Ektron s Document Management functionality See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 238 and Drag and Drop File Uploading Vs the Add Content Buttons on page 250 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the document See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view the document types you can add View Contents of Folder Content Managed Files All Types HTML Content Ofice Documents jee Ge h danaqed Files A I a Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 234 Using the Document Management Functionality 4 Select Office Documents 5 Click the Add Content button 6 The Insert New Document Object screen appears Insert New Document Object E r x aia f Create New Microsoft Excel Chart Cancel eens fen ie Microzott Excel Worksheet T Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Microsoft Word Document Result Inserts a new Image Document object into your k document NOTE The list of object types is determined by the applications installed on your computer For example an MS Project file type only displays if MS Project is installed 7 Check the Create From File button Browse 8 Click the Browse button and browse to the file you want to import into DM Click OK
95. table applying 476 deleting 477 cell border 486 default 466 content block border meaning 540 depth specifying 456 font changing 380 picture border 418 table border 479 default 464 columns table adding 469 deleting 469 spanning 491 specifying 468 comments adding another 527 adding to a task 353 inserting into content 525 updating 528 viewing 527 Compare source code field eWebDiff 99 Compare visual aspect field eWebDiff 98 comparing content 95 content area explained 100 Diff tab 100 how status affects comparison 96 published tab 100 setup window 98 staged tab 101 toolbar 97 view tabs 100 when available 95 window explanation 96 content see also content block active definition 541 adding as menu option 286 adding to collection 264 approval process 89 archived toolbar button 34 archiving see archiving awaiting approval 21 checked in definition 542 checked out definition 544 collaboration 525 comparing see comparing con tent currently checked out 21 declining see declining content difference view button floating toolbar 5 viewing 95 editing toolbar button 35 end date setting 69 folder add button 34 screen display 32 View History Restore 105 history accessing from Web page 49 103 accessing via Workarea 49 103 marked for deletion definition 546 metadata see searchable proper ties pending start date 546 previous version viewing 102 publish see publish reports checked in content 120 c
96. the Explorer you may also have the ability to edit add and delete content The following is an example of the Ektron Explorer The left frame lets you navigate through Ektron CMS400 NET s folders The right frame shows the content in a selected folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 212 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer Search Results File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Keron Explorer x PAE AITANA RI NAANA i Explore Search E Content Calendar 9 For Example C Press Releases 9 Furchase_Orders O Books O Dynamic Content Inc i FAG Contacts O CentuyMedicalService E IntranetE asic 9 Jobs 9 Sales 9 Marketing 3 Employees Hews car 4 i Analyst Programmer VExpenence in the implementation maintenance financial and human resource applications i a In and ais Last edited by Administrator Application on 20i Assistant Payroll Manager Must have the ability to effectively con unic data and establish cooperative working relatio to Last edited by Administrator Application on 20 Operating Systems Analyst Bachelors degree in computer science infor communications or related field or similar certifi Ii Last edited by Administrator Application on 20i A second tab in the left frame lets you search for content When you do the right frame displays search results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Rev
97. the directions in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 337 The only differences are the content s ID number and title appear on the screen the language of the content is the default language Once a task is added with the exception of Administrators only the user who assigned the task and those to whom the task was assigned can view it To view a task follow these steps Viewing a Task from the Content Folder PpP 5 Access the Contents folder from the left side of your Workarea Select the content associated with the task Click the Tasks tab The page lists all tasks assigned to the content Select a task From the view task page you can add a comment to the task See Adding Comments to Tasks on page 353 for more information Viewing a Task from the Tasks Folder To view a task from the Tasks folder follow these steps From the Smart Desktop select the Tasks folder Click the task you want to view 3 The View Task screen is displayed From here you can perform these tasks Editing a Task on page 352 Deleting a Task on page 355 Adding Comments to Tasks on page 353 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 347 Managing Tasks See Also Task View Options on page 348 Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 350 Sorting Tasks By Column on page 351 Managing Tasks on page 335 emailing Tasks on page 352 Task View Options Beneath t
98. the grid lines that make up a table Switches editor from HTML code view to design view Switches editor from design view to HTML code view Launches the current editor into its own window Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 535 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Button None Menu View gt Document Navigator Keystroke None Document Navigator Show Paragraph Markers Button i Menu View Show gt Paragraph Markers Keystroke None Button td E Menu Format gt Style Keystroke None Font Button None Menu Format gt Font Keystroke None Size Button None Menu Format gt Size Keystroke None Bold Button B Menu Format gt Bold Keystroke Control B Style Dropdown List Similar to Select this function adds a clickable menu bar to the editor when in design mode This lets you to highlight a section of text a table or section of a table The menu is dynamic and the selections can change depending on the location of the cursor For example if the cursor Is in a table the menu has the following entries html body table tr td and content html body p content Shows or hides paragraph markers and other special markings related to formatting such as formatting for bulleted items Choose from a predefined list of styles to apply to your text Choose from a predefined list of fonts Choose from a predefined list of sizes for your font
99. the language pull down near the top of the screen 2 Choose a Start Date by clicking the calendar icon 4 3 Acalendar appears You can move to another month or year by clicking it When you get to the desired month click inside the day The selected date turns red see below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 128 Content Workflow Reports http localhost CMS400E lala lt lt Sep October 2005 Nov gt gt eens wae we a spin I i f 1 f 1 f E E EET allok nibda atok ddo i ar E EE ks EE E E E J 2 F J 4 J J P i ERS AAS RILAR EJ ILLLAE RAPLE LAEE LALLAAEEAS 4 pa e EE EE E p4 w Done Cancel 4 Click Done 5 If desired select an End Date using the same procedure NOTE If you do not select an end date the report uses today for the end date 6 To include all content proceed to the next step To include only content in a selected folder and possibly its subfolders click Content Folder then select any folder See Also Selecting Content by Folder on page 112 7 Choose whether you want the report to display in a horizontal or vertical format A horizontal format is shown in the screen sample above A vertical format is below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 129 Content Workflow Reports Report Display Include Sub Folders set Result Variable Name Value Folder Name Content Updated Count 2
100. to provide more space for working in the right frame Below is an example of the Workarea with a minimized left frame Note that you cannot see the folder display in the left frame Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 25 The Workarea and Smart Desktop View Content abc test Ba OR ee eo abe test 2I Checked Out Last User To Edit admin Last Edit Date 11 May 2004 10 02 4M None Specified None Specified 11 May 2004 10 02 AM Approval Method Do Not Force All 4oprovers Approvals ai jedit admin XML Configuration None Specified HTML Content 4ssumedtinhertted Path vabe Content Searchable ves History Comment To minimize the left frame click the white X near the top of the left frame D 192 168 0 171 CME The left frame remains minimized until you move the cursor to the left of the bar circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 26 The Workarea and Smart Desktop view Content abc test Tontent Title abe test Content ID 2 tatus Checked Gut ast User To Edit admin ast Edit Date 11 May 2004 10 02 AM start Date None Specified nd Date None Specified pate Created 11 May 2004 10 02 AM pproval Method Do Not Force All 4oprovers pprovals jedit admin ML Configuration None Specified HTML Conter Path vabe fontent Searchable Yes Using Auto Hide The Workarea screen also provides an autohide feature which quickly switches betwee
101. vai C Not Available From this screen you can perform the following e Add a task type to an existing task category e Create a new task category e Add anew task type e Add a task type description e Define task type availability See Also Task Type Availability on page 343 NOTE As auser if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained inthe Ektron CMS400 NET Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 4 Enter your information 5 Click Save lad 6 Your new Task Category and Task Type appear in the drop down boxes Task Type Availability Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 343 Managing Tasks Task types can be hidden from users by clicking the Not Available check box in the Add Task Type and Edit Task Type screens By making Task Types not available you can make the Task Type unavailable without deleting it Editing a Task Type From the Add Task screen you can edit a Task Type This will allow you to change the Task Type name Task Type description and Task Type availability To edit a task type follow these steps 1 Go to the Add Task screen as described in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 337 Choose a Task Category and the Ta
102. which are needed to copy the file to the Web server Next the Image Explorer dialog appears illustrated below Navigate through the folder structure until you find the image Then click OK to insert the image into eWebEditPro XML Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 415 Inserting Images Image Explorer Fa foldersindex simlle jpa cae Select The Picture Properties Dialog Box You can also use the Picture Properties dialog box to e adjust the picture s width height border thickness and alignment e reset the image s properties width height border thickness and alignment to their original specifications e set spacing between the picture and surrounding information on the page e enter or edit the picture s title e view technical information about your connection Adjusting a Picture The layout area of the Picture Properties dialog box lets you adjust a picture s width height border thickness and alignment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 416 Inserting Images Layout width fi Bi Height fi b fo Border Thickness Alignment Moot set ba Reset You can use the following fields to adjust the picture before inserting it into the editor To make this change Use this field The width of the picture in pixels Width Add a border around the picture Border Thickness For more information see Setting a Border on page 418 Adju
103. you e submitted for your approval NOTE Once you check out content it cannot be checked out by other users until you check it in Steps in Editing Content Accessing the Edit Content screen from a Web page To access the Edit Content screen from a Web page follow these steps Sign in 2 Browse to the content that you want to edit 3 Right click the mouse and select L Edit Continue reading at From the Edit Content window you can on page 49 Accessing the Edit Content screen from the Workarea To access the Edit Content screen from the Workarea follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the content block you want to edit as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Select the language whose content blocks you want to view 3 Click the Edit button L The editor opens with the content block inserted 5 From the Edit Content window you can Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 49 Working with Folders and Content e edit content ecreate or edit a summary e specify metadata for the content eenter or update a comment eenter or update start and end dates ereview and update Web Alert information To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature e save changes echeck in content e submit content for approval e publish content to the Web site e access the library 6 Make the necessary edits to the content See Als
104. your Webmaster has given you access to all standard toolbar menus the menu looks like this Edit VIEW As Faragraph Format Format Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Test Direction Customize 5 Press the down arrow key to select the toolbar menu that has a button that you want to use 6 A new menu appears listing all options on the selected menu The following menu displays what might appear if you select the Edit Menu Your Webmaster determines which menu options are available Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 517 Section 508 Compliance Cut Copy Faste Paste Text Replace Find Nest Print Undo Redo Check Spelling Check Spelling 4s fou Type Bookmark Hyperlink Remove Link HRA Picture Table Edit in Word 7 Press the down arrow key until the desired option is highlighted Then click the option to perform the action Section 508 Tables You can apply the following information to any table to make it 508 compliant Heading Rows Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 521 Heading Columns Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 521 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 518 Section 508 Compliance Summary Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 521 Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 521 Horizontal Caption Accessibility dialog Ac
105. 0 Setting Table Width by Pixels Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 473 Manipulating Your Table s Format To specify table width by pixels choose Pixels in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the number of pixels at the Width field Insert T able Size Rows 2 Columns 2 Layout p10 Not Specified C Percent fe Pixels Specifying Horizontal Alignment You can specify your table s horizontal alignment left right or center within the browser Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 474 Manipulating Your Table s Format center If you specify right or left justify you can wrap text around the table To do this move the cursor to the right or left of the table and begin typing Table Properties In this example the table is left justified so this text appears to the right of the table Specify the table alignment at the Horizontal Alignment field on the Layout area of the Insert Table dialog box Layout Width i nis C Not Specified f Percent i Fisel Horizontal amp lignmert center Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 475 Manipulating Your Table s Format Table Backgrounds You can specify a background color or image for your table Specifying a Table s Background Color You can assign a background color to a table to make it more pleasing to the eye Here is an example
106. 07 25 16 AM Date Created 23 Jun 2004 07 13 51 AM Description Hews page Include Subfolders Tithe ID URL Link W RedStar Airplane 5 smaller version B Servo Control Engineer 124 B Plastic Molder CMS400Sample uploadedimages redstar 14 CMS400Sample hr aspxtid 14 423 id 123 13 CMS400Sample hr aspx tid 13 yahoo O www yahoo com 7 The following information appears on the More Info section of the View Menus screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 303 Working with Menus me p Information about See Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on menu items page 293 Title assigned to the menu folder ID number assigned to the menu by Ektron CMS400 NET Note The menu ID is automatically generated when you create a menu The View Menu screen also provides the following buttons Add Menu Item Add item to menu Adding a Menu Item on page 283 Remove Menu Remove item from the menu Deleting a Menu Item ltem on page 308 Reorder Menu Adjust sequence of menu items Reordering Menu ltem Items on page 306 Edit Menu Edit existing menu Editing a Menu on page 291 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 304 Working with Menus Delete Menu Delete menu and its menu items Deleting a Menu on page 307 OPAT a Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module To access the menu via the Modules folder follow these steps 1 From the left f
107. 1 e Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET on page 5 e Editing Content on page 6 e The Lifecycle of Content on page 7 What is a Content Block Any Web site consists of several pages Each page is made up of one or more blocks of content For example the home page of the sample Web site that is installed with Ektron CMS400 NET is below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 1 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Our Company Intranet t the heart of Acme is our commitment to our customers and our dedication to finding a better way to conduct business effectively and efficiently Gur mission is to develop best of breed solutions that encompass scalability flexibility and ease of use without losing focus of being affordable In 19986 Willlam Scmefounded cme Services based on the philosophy that services should be simple and affordable Today Acme is based on the same principle Acme released its first product 4 services tool that allows users to deliver services quickly and easily Because thistool is so easy to integrate and use sales quickly grew and Acme expanded with offices in Amherst New Hampshire the a United Kingdom and Germany 4cmes services tool has become a leader in the industry and partnerships have been made with every major services vendor After you sign in notice that as you move the cursor colored borders appears around one or more areas of the page Each surrounded area is
108. 1 Revision 5 221 Using Ektron Explorer EERO SELLS Explore Ektron Explorer x Search Search by any or all of the criteria below E Content Calendar 9 For Example C Press Releases 9 Purchase_Orders lt nm I All or part of the title Containing the word or phrase r m Iama IMIM IMMM J J J Look ir TAR oo Press Releases l More advanced options Search all subfolders Match partial words All the words Any of the words C Exact phrase Selecting a Folder to Search in You can also select a folder in which to begin to search This reduces the time needed to complete the search if you are certain the content is within a folder or its subfolders NOTE The Advanced Search Options let you include or exclude a folder s subfolders from the search See Also Advanced Search Options on page 223 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 222 Using Ektron Explorer Use the Look In dropdown to select a folder to search illustrated below The drop down box lists all folders that you opened since you signed on Containing the word or phrase pTM Ta ma ma ma ma ma a ee eee ee ee n n n n n E G Search If the folder you want is not in the list click Browse and a complete CMS folder display appears Select a folder from that display Advanced Search Options Advanced search options let you e search just the current folder or t
109. 400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 309 Working with Menus By Navigating the Site 1 Sign on to Ektron CMS400 NET and select the language in which the menu currently exists Navigate to the page that has the menu you want to translate 3 Click the menu and the Edit Menu option 4 The View Menu screen appears for the selected menu 5 From the Add drop down list select the language into which you want to translate the menu Add select language er Ss A He By selectlanquage Danish Lerman otandarcd 6 The Add Menu screen appears Complete the screen for the menu in the selected language See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 279 Click the Save button The View Menu screen reappears Now the View In drop down list displays the menu s new language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 310 Working with Menus Yiew Menu Italian menu iew In talan Standard Title Language ID URL Link fore Info 9 Add items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 283 If adding content you can only insert one in the selected language 10 Later you can add more menu items edit them delete them view them etc These capabilities are described in this chapter By Accessing the Menus Report Screen From the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus Click the menu you want to translate Follow the instructions from Step 3 in
110. 400Example uploadedimages cilbanet Market Cycle Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Intranett Panorama Images CMS400Example uploadedimages Intranett Price Performance images CMS400Example uploadedImages Intranett Files This section explains how to work with library files through the following subtopics Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 195 Library Folder e Copying Files to the Library on page 196 e Viewing Files on page 198 e Editing a File on page 200 e Overwriting Files on page 201 e Library Link Searching on page 203 e Adding a Library File to Content on page 204 For a definition of the term files see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 188 Copying Files to the Library Files must be copied to the Ektron CMS400 NET library before users can insert them into content To copy a file to the library follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea browse the library folder and select a folder to which you want to copy a file NOTE When you copy a file to a folder only users with permissions to that folder can insert the file into content 2 A list of files in that folder appears 3 Click the Add Library button FH 4 The Add File screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 196 Library Folder Add Library Item to Folder Contenti files Title Filename Description b Banm 320 Ade Bsa Ye wA 5 Enter the
111. 7 9 Products Reguest 1033 26 A 21 Jul 2004 12 21 PM Applicatioi 24 Support Form HS Syndication Within the folder you create the form and then content within it To work with the form later return to the Forms folder and select it You cannot see or update the form from the corresponding content folder However your Webmaster uses the corresponding content folder to assign permissions and an approval chain See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Working with HTML Forms gt Form Permissions Accessing the Forms Folder To access the Forms folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the Workarea 2 Click the Forms button in the left frame Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 139 Working with HTML Forms Ea Content BY Fome Modules Addr 3 Navigate to the folder whose forms you want to work with or in which you want to create a new form Name IMPORTANT The folder s template must use a formblock server control or function See Also Form Folders and Content on page 138 4 The View Forms of Folder screen appears Note that its folder structure matches the Content folder The screen has the following toolbar buttons Click one to begin that action Add form Creating a New Form on page 141 Add folder Create new subfolder beneath Adding Subfolders on page 63 current one This folder s template must use a Formblock server control or
112. 71 Date Created When the content was created Approval Method Whether all approvers must sign off on content before it is published managed by your system administrator Approvals The users in the approval chain for this content See Also Approving Declining Content on page 86 XML Configuration The XML Configuration applied to the content This is typically managed by your system administrator See Also Managing XML on page 718 The folder path to the content s folder A slash represents the Content folder Content Searchable Yes appears if the content will be found when someone searches your Web site Expanding the Content Area lt is possible to expand the content area of the screen vertically This gives you more space to work on content You can expand the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 44 Working with Folders and Content content portion of the Workarea by clicking the up arrow ai The arrow s screen location is shown below Content in Folder Content CMS Developer English U 3 tent Metadata Schedule M lapp Style Heading 1 r 3 12 pt A a EHE 7 U BREBRBBR MA SP oa Fe Meee a7 T X g nbsp amp M Ej H BE gt Once the content area is expanded the top row of buttons and title are not visible A Sola cia SE eee er nee PET PARA IE MEERA RSET PRE Ment fo a ar e Sener rere EEI arte ECONO ELD MSO ese a Y l
113. 8 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 iv OTe FED sarnase raa 363 Accessing Online Hel p cccscscccessescssseeseeneeeeeseeseeneeseeseeses 363 Accessing Online Manuals cccccsssecsseseeseeseeseeneeseeneeses 365 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML csceeeeeeeeees 368 Using eWebEditPro XML ccccessssseeeeeeeesssssssseeeeeeeseessseeeeeeeeenees 369 Organization of this Documentation ccssceeseeesseeeseees 369 Creating a Simple Web Page cccsssscseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeenees 370 Your Finished Web Page c ssssccssseessesseseeeneeseenseseeneesensees 370 Creating the Sample Web Page cccssesseeeeeeceeeseeeeenees 371 ere ors lat BUTON aas 374 Stel cient i e Te gt mererer tree seers ran taraerte nc aPanen fete re iar air enna eee Amey 374 Applying Formatting Attributes to Text ssceseeseeeeees 375 Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists 0000 375 Customizing Your Toolbar svivscsiccsivincasinunsccussinevnmnaasentenaaws 385 Removing Or Adding Menus cccccsssseeeseesseeeseenseeeeenneeeens 386 Removing or Adding Menu Items cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 386 Resloring ile e 95 lt eaneeeme see sreer sn tencle sep aloe aa 389 Rearranging the Menus on a TooIbat cccsssecessesseeenenneesens 389 Creating a New Menu ccccccssessseessessseeeseeeeseeesseeenseesen
114. 82 moving to server 423 scanning 453 specifying color depth 456 indent toolbar option 381 insert library item toolbar button 35 insert table toolbar button 461 inserting cells 484 HTML 512 instant email see email instant Internet addresses spell checking 405 italic toolbar option 380 J jumps see bookmarks and hyperlinks justify toolbar option 381 L landing page after login customizing for user 361 language user editing 360 library accessing 189 add items button 34 asset adding as menu item 287 copying files to 195 definition 188 file extensions 192 files editing 200 inserting into content 204 overwriting 201 viewing 198 folder properties 191 forms adding to content 210 viewing 210 hyperlinks adding 208 adding to content 208 editing 208 viewing 208 images adding to content 209 editing titles 209 extensions 192 overwriting 209 uploading 208 viewing 209 quicklinks adding to content 210 viewing 210 search results include images 62 195 text only 62 195 searching 192 license keys viewing 381 lifecycle content block 7 line WebImageFX command 442 link check button 36 links broken finding 53 ListSummary compared with collection and menu 272 lock table or image in position 382 log in 9 log out 11 button floating toolbar 5 Macintosh support 529 menu items 531 toolbar buttons 531 using editor 529 managed files 241 creating 241 document management feature 227 editing 245 i
115. 9 Cancel Cancels action you are performing without saving the information Check in Saves and checks in content you are working on See Also Checked In Content on page 525 Check out Checks out content to edit prevents others from simultaneously working on it Checked Out Content on page 527 Collection Accesses the collection area for content lets you create edit and delete collections See Also Working with Collections on page 256 Declines an approval request submitted to you i Delete Content Deletes multiple content items at once Delete Folder Deletes current content folder Do Not Apply XSLT Removes XSLT applied to XML content viewed in the content history area Edits content or specific criteria in the Workarea Insert Library Item Inserts selected library item into content See Also Library Folder on page 190 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 35 Working with Folders and Content Link Check Identifies content with a hyperlink to the current content You would typically use this feature to remove the links before deleting content If you do not remove the links they are inoperative after the content is deleted Overwrite Replaces an image or file with a newer version See Also Overwriting Files on page 203 Preview Previews item that was or will be added Publish Save and publish the content Remove Removes items from folders and lists
116. Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 258 Click the Delete button 7 A confirmation message appears 5 Click OK to proceed Working with Collections in a Multi Language system NOTE In a multi language Ektron CMS400 NET system you can create a language specific edition of each collection For example prior to the 4 7 Release the RC International sample site s products page had a collection in the default application language English unless you change it From 4 7 on you can create an edition of a collection in every enabled language When a visitor to your site selects a language then navigates to a page with a collection Ektron CMS400 NET displays the collection in the selected language if available If not Ektron CMS400 NET displays nothing Note the contrast between the collections and content if a collection is not available in the selected language nothing appears But if content is not available in the selected language content in the default language appears When creating a collection for a foreign language decide if you want to create e a foreign edition of an existing collection or e anew collection in a foreign language For example if you want to provide several versions of a single page that change depending on the language selected by the user Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 270 Working with Collections see Creating
117. Approve Second Approver After the content is approved the next approver in the approval chain receives an email saying that the content is ready for approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 92 Approving Declining Content amp Request for content approval 2 amp el amp K B Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses Ne ee eee a a ne Eee Fron Webmaster yourcompany com Dake Friday May 03 2002 4 19 PM To EditorInChieh our domain com Subject Request for content approval The content Red Sox Win World Seres has been submitted tor your approval by Sports Writer To locate the content the folder path in your workarea 1s Sports The following lnk will take you to the submutted content block on the Web site htto 192 168 0 156 CMS200Samplefndex asp 7id 17 Please Note You must login and select the preview icon to view the changes The content was submitted for approval on 03 May 2002 4 16 19 PM Approvals SportsEditor EditorIn Chief Comment EditorInChief logs in to Ektron CMS400 NET and accesses his Workarea The Workarea has an Approval folder with the content awaiting his approval EditorInChief navigates through the Approval folder until he finds the content Red Sox win World Series From this window EditorInChief can view information about the content including title go live date user who created
118. Archive Options on page 71 Click the Edit button Click the Schedule tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 71 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 5 Remove the End Date or change it to a future date 6 Submit the content for publishing When the content is published it will no longer be archived Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 72 Adding a Content Summary Adding a Content Summary A summary provides a short description of content to supplement the title when displaying a list of content on a Web page When you create or edit content you can create a summary Then your Web site developer can create Web pages that contain just the summaries to attract readers to the full story A good example is a news Web site A page on that site could list the titles of the top stories followed by a summary of each illustrated below TOP STORIES Ektron Named a Rising Star 08 15 2003 August 15 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA Ekern e Ie elidi sididOweieore ibid ikelo Come Siac management and authoring has been named a Rising Sele das part of che prestigious New England Technology Fast 50 Program Ektron Launches International Distribution Program 08 08 2003 August 8 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA Ektron Ine an 1NNOV tOr In namic Web content authoring and management with over 350 000 users today announced the Lavine or eeo neer nae onal ais
119. Basic colors EE 6 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 490 Working with Table Cells 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Spanning Rows or Columns You can create a table cell that stretches across more than one row or column In the following table notice how the row that contains Sports Teams spans three columns Sports Teams Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Black Hawks You can also create a column that spans several rows as illustrated below Notice that Boston spans three rows Colleges ee Boston Boston College Northeastern University Boston University Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 491 Working with Table Cells Colleges C Spanning More than One Row or Column To have a table cell span more than one row or column follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that will soan rows or columns 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table from the menu 4 Click Cell Properties from the menu 5 The Cell Properties dialog box appears In the Rows Spanned or Columns Spanned field enter the number of rows or columns that you want this cell to span Span Rowe Spanned Columns Spanned 6 Click OK Effect of Spanning a Cell When you set a
120. CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Working with Folders and Content Tab Summary Edit Summary Edit content s summary Adding a Content Summary on page 74 Metadata Edit Metadata Edit content s metadata Adding or Editing Metadata on page 78 Comment View Comment View comments on changes made when editing content This comment also appears on the View Content and Content History screens Add edit tasks Add or edit tasks for this content Managing Tasks on page 331 Add or edit Web Alerts for this Ektron CMS400 NET content Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature Edit Content Open content for editing Editing Content on page 49 ire View History View older versions of content Viewing and Restoring restore older version Previous Content on page 103 View Staged Displays staged content Staged Content on page 530 aa Compares current and earlier Comparing Versions of versions of content Content on page 96 Delete content Adding Content on page 46 FS Move Copy Move or copy content to another This button is only available to Content folder administrators To learn more about it see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Web Alerts Add edit Web Alerts oe hy View Difference io a Check for Identify all content with Checking for Broken content linked to Quicklinks to this content Quicklinks on page 53 this content E
121. Control C Button Fe Menu Edit gt Paste Keystroke Control V Button None Menu Edit gt Paste Keystroke None Button None Menu Edit gt Select Keystroke None Details the amount of words used in the editor Launches a dialog box that allows you to Find Find Next or Replace an occurrence of the string entered into Find field Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Copy selected text and graphics into temporary memory Leave selected data where it is If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste text in a different format For example you can copy text from a browser and paste it as Rich Text instead of Hypertext Similar to the Document Navigator this function lets you highlight a section of text a table or section of a table The menu is dynamic and the selections can change depending on the location of the cursor For example if the cursor is in a table the menu has the following entries html body table tr td and content 532 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Select All Button None Selects everything in the editor Menu Edit gt Select All Keystroke Control A Undo Rev
122. Date Tuesday November 15 2005 5 05 PM Ea Get Result Phrase Use Count Ektron Dreamweaver Acme Providence Healthcare WSIS editor Pee won Selection Criteria You can narrow down the search by selecting any combination of these criteria e language the language of the search page either Workarea or site search The user performing the search can choose a language before inserting the search text If he does not explicitly choose a language the search uses the default one This report can show results from all languages or any one that you select e a minimum number of occurrences of the word or phrase to return For example you only want words or phrases entered into the Search Text field at least 10 times during the last month e whether to include words or phrases entered into the site search the search page that site visitors use Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 133 Content Workflow Reports e whether to include words or phrases entered into the Workarea search accessed from the View Contents of Folder screen this search page is used by authorized CMS users to find content e date range Display of Search Results The search results show the number of times each word or phrase that satisfies the selection criteria appears They are arranged in this order e words or phrases with the most occurrences appear first e if several words or phrases have the same number of occurrence
123. December 05 2004 9 45 PM 11 1 2005 1 29 23 Approving Declining Content From the approvals report you can approve or decline content that was submitted to you The steps below explain how to do so Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 118 Content Workflow Reports Approve Decline One Content ltem 1 Access your Approvals report in the Workarea see Approvals Reports on page 118 Click the content you want to approve or decline The View Content Awaiting Approval page is displayed 4 Perform an action using the following table as a reference Ry Publish Accept changes to content and publish it to site Note If there is a subsequent approver in the content s approval chain this button is replaced by a Submit button If you click Publish but the content item has an incomplete task assigned to another user the content cannot be published Instead the following error message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer x This content has been submitted Buk waiting For completion of associated tasks A The publishing process will not proceed until the task has been completed The user to whom the task is assigned must complete it before you can publish the content Reject changes and keep current version of content live on Web site Check out content and make changes to it if desired View Toggle between published and submitted versions of content This can help Published you compare differences St
124. Difference Feature 101 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content 102 Accessing Content HIStory ccccscseescsssseseeesseeeseenseesseeees 102 The Content History WindOW cccsssseeeessseeeseeenseeseeeseees 104 Restoring a Previous VersiON ccssscssssessssesesesesseesesseeeseeeenes 105 Comparing Historical Versions ccccsssssessssseeeseneeeseeees 106 REMOVING Applied XSLT siectstsscccevewtesspsecencccestcecieiecawessterntinciss 106 Content Workflow Report cc sseccssseecseseeeseeseenees 108 Accessing the Reports Folder ccssssecsssseesseseeseensenesees 108 Common Report TOPICS cccceseseeeeeeseeeecesneeeceesseeseenseesseeees 110 Approvals g1 0 9 Cope eeee eens sere eenn per inp ent ec ell Hee En gt seense nr ess eeeresrpeere 118 Checked In Report esses cecsssececcesececsanmscacersdccssnimesacensmeccuueancacies 120 Checked Out Reporil iii sccascaraucacesiecerlaiescectiiatesareienehadialuerdiadant 120 New Content Report cccccssscecsssseesceesseeeceeseesecesseesseeneeesees 121 Submitted THE DON iiccsesccnisessncsiesccsspnesnerasassaeseresassmsnerstectivatesinees 122 Content Pending Start Date Repofrt c cccsssseeeeeseeeeees 123 Refresh Reminder Report ccccssscssssesssseesseeseeseeeseeeaneneeees 124 Expired Content Report sstsiisisvenicistscecdsensesaraciintdatvicinenianeabaaian 125 Content to Expire Report
125. E The Add Content option lets you only add new content to a menu You cannot add another type of menu item using this button 5 A screen displays the name of the current folder and its subfolders To create the new content in the current folder click Next To create it in subfolder click it 6 The Add Content screen opens allowing you to enter information Enter all information in the Add Content screen and click the Publish button See Also Adding Content on page 46 7 The content is added to the menu Editing a Menu You can edit a menu via e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page This section describes each option Editing a Menu via its Content Folder To edit a menu from a content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 301 Click the Edit button L The Edit Menu screen is displayed 4 As necessary change the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 279 5 Click the Save button il Editing a Menu via Menus Module To edit a menu via the Menus Module follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 291 Working with Menus 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 305 2 Click the Edit button L The Edit Menu screen is displayed 4 As nece
126. ET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 283 Working with Menus View Menu Products e at LF U To View In English WS Y 4d RC Planes B GO ORC Lily O LIRC Redstar 0 L save 3 0 he Trinity Exhaust Pipe E Internal Web page DRC cheetah PF i LRC Sportster O I s Pave Da lore Info 6 Click the Add Item button Fr 7 Use the table below to select a type of menu item and follow the steps to add that menu item Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 286 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 287 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 288 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 288 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module To add a menu item via the menus module follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 284 Working with Menus 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Click the menu that you want to add a menu item to 3 Inthe View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu 4 Click the Add Item button GH 5 The Add Menu screen displays a list of items that you can add to the menu Use to the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add it Menu item type For more infor
127. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 32 Working with Folders and Content View Contents of Folder Content Content cone Me 3 Human Resources en Title Language ID Status Date Modified J Marketing Contact Ektron 1 15 O 26 May 2004 11 J Products Greeting 1 24 O 04 Dec 2003 10 5 Ma RC Cars Home Page Content 1 1 I 04 Dec 2003 10 2 HA BC Planes Introducing the RC Redstar 1 23 O0 04 Dec 2003 10 2 my first content block i 28 I OF Oct 2004 04 3 3 support l Private Content 1 z A 03 Mar 2004 03 1 Site Support Page 1 g A 2r SUg 2002 U2 ae Trinity In Line Pipe 1 22 I O4 Dec 2003 11 1 In this chapter you learn about adding editing publishing and deleting content through the following subtopics Permissions and Approvals are explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual e Workarea Toolbar Buttons on page 34 e Viewing a Folder on page 37 e Viewing Content on page 40 e Expanding the Content Area on page 44 e Adding Content on page 46 e Editing Content on page 49 e Adding Content on page 46 e Searching the Workarea on page 54 e Adding Subfolders on page 62 e Deleting Folders on page 65 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 33 Working with Folders and Content Workarea Toolbar Buttons The top of many Workarea screens feature a toolbar that contains buttons for performing actions This section explains the butto
128. End Scheduling content lets you control when content becomes visible on the Web site Similarly you can remove content on a predetermined date and time When used together a start and end date can relieve you of much work by managing how long content is viewable on your Web site You can also set options for what happens to content after reaching its end date How Does It Work When you create or modify content you can select a go live date and time If you do and the content makes it through the approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET publishes the content to the live site at that time For example your company is having a sale of the century ina month and everything is ready except the announcement You decide to update your Web site to let the public know about the sale With this feature you create the Web content now and set it to go live a week before the sale This topic is explained through the following subtopics e Setting a Start Date on page 66 e Setting an End Date on Content on page 69 e Setting Archive Options on page 70 setting a Start Date To set a start date follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 66 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 1 Access the editor by adding new content or editing existing Content lf adding new content enter a title and the content 3 Click the Schedule tab Edit Content tn Folder Content Title cms Develope
129. Ep H from a drop down list To view the list click the black down Remove all style information applied to selected text You apply styles using the Style dropdown list For example Before lt P class note gt This is initial content lt P gt lt P gt This is initial content lt P gt Display a list of styles Users can select from the list to apply a style to selected Note that the list can change depending on the formatting of the selected line Your Webmaster determines which styles are available Change the heading size Your Webmaster determines which heading sizes are available Change the font style Your Webmaster determines which fonts are available Note If more than one font appears in a selection the browser on the reader s PC tries to display text using the first font If the browser cannot find that font it tries to use the second etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Toolbar Buttons For more information see 379 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Change the font size Your Webmaster determines which font sizes are available lanzo Font Size h he f lor E Eont Color a Change the font color h h k d color of the text Background Color Change the background color of the tex Note To remove background color from selected text click the Normal button A B Make t
130. For the third option the selected menu appears on the View Menu screen From the View Menus screen you can perform the following actions on a menu Create a new menu Edit menu information URL and template link Translate the menu into another language Delete the menu Add or remove items Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 276 Working with Menus e Change the sequence of menu items e Edit menu items e For submenus Managing Menus add remove items change sequence of menu items edit menu information edit information about menu items Ektron CMS400 NET gives you the flexibility to add edit view and delete a menu The following sections explains how to do that e Adding a New Menu on page 277 e Adding a Menu Item on page 283 e Adding New Content to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 290 e Editing a Menu on page 291 e Editing a Menu Item on page 292 e Editing Types of Menu Items on page 296 e Viewing a Menu on page 301 e Reordering Menu Items on page 306 e Deleting a Menu on page 307 e Deleting a Menu Item on page 308 e Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 309 See Also Working with Menus on page 274 Adding a New Menu You can add a new menu by navigating to the folder that contains its content or by choosing Modules gt Menus from the left frame of the Workarea If you choose Modules gt
131. LESE Da a i a Lm M a n a a i mro N gt ick us x BE fl F j Search j Favorites 2 Back r k J p pS pees T i an a e Go Link amp Address C Documents and Settings bbalt De lt plorer ame Acme Services Inc E Folders Name me TTT A Desktop A absence repor BARSA a my Documents me projects A AddOnRegistr 9 Content My Music T Calendar Mu Pietiires Ben cee Form_Example Corporate hy PSPFies i CNSADO nah L aa p E My videos Ht defects fixed fess Fieleases z Ea P ra Visual Studio Pre EktronExplore urchate_UTders Latest News lig 4 My Computer EY ewebeditpracl Poa pe S Local Disk C El ewebeditprox Dynamic_Content pjeGerfel Ektron Now Offers acsetcataloc explorer1 GIF C FAO am Multiplatform Support T Bb Notepad 2 3 assetlibrary pad 2 _ Ektron now has support E a a TR i Comtacts 5 E E dell replication gif In CMS400 for ASP z CentunyMedicalS ervices p E 2 Documents E upgrade txt PHP ColdFusion and 5 WE Upgrading Ekt A ER j O IntranetB asic JSP platforms E Administ Upgrading Ekti 2 mytest E All Users Enhanced Dreamweaver E bbolt 7 Release the mouse button A file upload message appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 224 Using the Document Management Functionality WARNING The functi
132. Library Folder on page 188 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 21 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Modules see Working with Collections on page 254 Working with Menus on page 274 Working with Calendars on page 312 and Private Content amp Memberships section of the Managing Users amp User Groups chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual Settings folder which includes Updating Your User Profile on page 358 and Accessing Online Help on page 363 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET s top level folders appear in the lower left corner of the Smart Desktop Use them to access all other folders To open any top level folder click it When you do it appears in the frame above Typically you would a click top level folder to see its subfolders then click a subfolder to see its content The following graphic illustrates the location of Ektron CMS400 NET s major features from the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 22 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS Workarea Site Map Smart Desktop 6 Tasks E Reports content reports content folders form folders library folders Modules Modules 4 Collections Menus Settings 4 Calendars 4 Users 1S ae i i Membersnips User Groups P Help H Configuration From the Smart Desktop you can also
133. MENT AND UNDERSTAND THAT BY CONTINUING THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE BY LOADING OR RUNNING THE SOFTWARE OR BY PLACING OR COPYING THE SOFTWARE ONTO YOUR COMPUTER HARD DRIVE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT S TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT EXCEPT FOR WRITTEN SEPARATE AGREEMENTS BETWEEN EKTRON AND YOU THIS AGREEMENT IS A COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES OF THE PARTIES Copyright 1999 2005 Ektron Inc All rights reserved LA10031 Revision 1 5 Trademarks All terms in this manual that are Known to be trademarks have been capitalized Ektron Inc cannot attest to the accuracy of this information Use of a term in this manual does not affect the validity of any trademark The following trademarks might appear in Ektron manuals Active Directory ActiveX Authenticode BackOffice ClearType Developer Studio FrontPage Intellisense JScript Microsoft MS DOS SharePoint Visual C Visual C Visual InterDev Visual J Visual J Visual Studio Visual Web Developer TM Win32 Win32s Windows Windows NT Windows Server TM Windows Server System TM Netscape Netscape Navigator Mozilla TM Firefox TM What s New in the 5 1 Release What s New in the 5 1 Release e The Workarea search now includes assets and library items See Searching the Workarea on page 54 e Anew workflow report has been added See Site Update Activity Re
134. MG 5RC graphics header gqif gt lt TDe lt header graphic cheeijmte je FiletCheader oa included to change company name gt lt TR gt gh qual lt TABLE gt id will vietable border 0 width 778 cellspacing 0 cellpadding 0 cellspacing 0 gt lt top navigation gt lt tr gt lt td align left gt amp nbsp lt a class nav href index asp gt lt b gt Home lt b gt lt a gt amp nbs l nbsp lt a class nav href products asp gt Products lt a gt nbsp amp nbsp lt a On this Web page notice the keywords are included in the meta tag and the title is in HTML tags These appear according to how the administrator sets up the metadata definitions Entering or Editing Metadata To enter or edit content s metadata follow these steps WARNING You may only edit metadata of content that is published checked in or checked out by you 1 Access the Edit Content screen for the content whose metadata you want to enter or edit as described in Editing Content on page 49 2 Click the Metadata tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 82 Adding or Editing Metadata Title cms Developer Englist Content Summary Meta Data Schedule Bi Apple Style Normal 10 pt A a u a P h na Aa Ah O D R a a AG a ch 3 The Edit Metadata screen opens with the current metadata displayed In order to add metadata to content an admini
135. MS400 NET Web site the administrator sets up a personal profile for him It contains information such as password and email address You can update some personal profile information when needed This section explains how to modify your personal profile Viewing Your Profile Before changing your personal profile you must view it To do so follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 20 From the lower left frame click Settings From the top left frame click User Profile gt Settings 3 User Profile 24 Help 4 Your user profile appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 358 Updating Your User Profile Username jedit First Name John Last Name Edit User Language Anp Default E Mail Address jedit test com System Notifications Receiving of E Mail Disabled Work Page Size Width 790p Height s80p Display button text in the title bar Landing Page after login Refresh the login page Set smart desktop as the start location in the workarea This User currently belongs to these User Groups Everyone Task permissions Create Task Redirect Task User Properties o Automobiles Subscriptions Notification will send in language English U 5 5 Click the Edit button in the top left corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 359 Updating Your User Profile 6 The Edit User In
136. Macintosh Editor on page 529 Using the Integrated Macintosh Editor The Integrated Macintosh Editor IME plays the same role ona Macintosh that eWebEditPro plays on a PC that of a content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 529 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients editor While both editors have similar functionality some functions are accessed differently with the IME Ektron CMS400 NET clients only support the IME when used on an Apple Macintosh running the Safari browser lf you use another browser such as Internet Explorer Firefox or Netscape Navigator a plain text box appears where the editor should be and you can add content as plain text or html code Below is an image of the Integrated Macintosh Editor in the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea OOO CM5400 Workarea AR z Ai or l 3 ea l User Ls ne coe Pe m anana e ca aitoas worKkarea Monday October 03 200 Edit Content in Folder Content Title SafariContent l English U 5 Content Schedule a Edit View Insert Format Tools Table dees r Normal E 7 U here s some new content created by Safari it ill ii mi m air B Design Code Menu Items and Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the menu Items and toolbar buttons in the Integrated Macintosh Editor IME The menus are located above the rows of toolbars button across the top of the editor window illustrated below Ek
137. Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 218 Using Ektron Explorer 28 L CM5300 43 User Manual final use guide graphics File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Toolbars PA E nr w Status Bar i Explorer Bar Search Ctr E i 3 Favorites Ctrl I arge Icons P Media E History Ctrl H List Ektron Explorer a an My Conta w Folders H ly sig Thumbnails a ee H E EOE 4rrange Icons r a H E bA ine Up Icons E Cor H E my Choose Columns search content Folde searchexample 1 gif 3 The Ektron Explorer replaces Windows Explorer As you select a folder or conduct a search in the left frame the related content appears in the right frame Once Ektron Explorer is enabled a new toolbar button appears for quick access to Explorer Display of Content The right side of the screen displays all related content The following graphic illustrates the information available on the right side Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 219 Using Ektron Explorer jit view Favorites Tools Help E G at G Search jFavorites FS contact us Thanks for your information we will call you shortly Last edited by Administrator Application on 2005 03 01 11 55 36 eld m e eke e m e mk ee ee ba a ee ye pee O Calendar EE em 9 Form Example gt Press_Releases 9 Purchase Orders O Books 9 Dynamic Content_ ia CAN Changing the Thumbnail Size
138. NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 74 Adding a Content Summary 6 When done click the appropriate button Creating a Summary for Existing Content Navigate to the folder that contains the content Click the content The View Content screen appears e ey a Click the Summary tab to enter or edit summary information for the content The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in the configuration setup screen 5 When done click the Save button 1 The View Content page reappears The status of the content changes to checked out to you NOTE When you enter or edit existing content s summary its status changes to checked out After you create the summary click the Check In button to check the content in From that point you need to submit or publish it Editing a Summary NOTE You can only edit the summary of content that is published checked in or checked out by you To edit the a content s summary follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose summary you want to edit as described in Viewing Content on page 40 Click the Summary tab 3 The Edit Summary window opens Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 75 Adding a Content Summary Edit Content in Folder Content Title JCMS Developer English 5 9 Summary Meta Data Schedule fe Apply Style Norm
139. NTS e The left panel displays the table of contents It also provides buttons for accessing the index and full text search The right panel continues to display help topics Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 364 Online Help Se Creates an email to send to Ektron with feedback about the documentation An Internet connection is required Connects to Ektron CMS400 NET support page on our Web site An Internet connection is required Connects to the Ektron CMS400 NET Learning Center also on our Web site An Internet connection is required Prints current topic Accessing Online Manuals To access the help folder follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 20 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 365 Online Help Smart Desktop for John Edit gt Smart Desktop we Tasks Content Awaiting Approval 3 SH Reports Approvals Checked In Content le Checked OCURE L Content Currently Checked Out 3 New Content Repor Submitted Content Content Pending St Tasks 0 Expired Content Fep 2 From the lower left frame click Settings 3 From the top left frame click Help Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 366 Online Help l x 5 Settings 3 User Profile SE Help 4 The help screen appears in the right frame Ektron CMS400
140. Next To make sure you locate every occurrence of a term place the cursor at the top of the content before beginning the search If you begin the search from somewhere other than the top of the page use the Direction field to search from the current location to the top or bottom of the file Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 399 Finding and Replacing Text Find And Replace Fnowhe ff S Replace With o Match whole word only Replace Match case Replace All Direction C Up 2 gown Cancel To search from the Click this option in the cursor location to the Direction field Considering the Case of a Search Term By default the search ignores the case upper or lower of a search term In other words if you enter Bob in the Find What field the search finds bob Bob BOB etc lf you want the search to be case sensitive use the Match case check box on the Find window If you enter Bob in the Find What field and place a check in the Match case box the search only Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 400 Finding and Replacing Text stops at Bob not bob or BOB Find And Replace waw SSCS Replace With P Match whole word only Replace Al Direction Up Down Cancel Replace PEER Whole Word Match By default the search finds any occurrence of the text that you type into the Find what field For example if you enter the the search finds the wor
141. Settings When you do the lower section of the screen appears as shown below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 278 Working with Menus Add Menu Title English U 5 Advance Settings These fields are not required Image Link fCMS400Example ti CS OW FG l Use image instead of a title URL Link CMS400Example E Hyperlink this menu item to this link Template Link ICMS400Example ti CS CO Override tems with quicklinks at this menu level with this template Description 8 Using the following table complete the fields on the Add Menu screen Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen pe eae The name given to the menu by the creator It appears on the Web page to indicate the kind of information on the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 279 Working with Menus LNs Image Link You can have an image appear next to or instead of the menu title For example Document Management Solution Web Authoring Tools Web Image Editor Store 4 Download Center To do this follow these steps Note Before beginning these steps the image must reside in the library if it does not add it before proceeding For more information see Copying Files to the Library on page 196 2 3 4 Click the image icon 84 The library window opens Navigate to the folder that contains the image you want to use Click the Inser
142. Tasks folder follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop as explained in Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 20 The Smart Desktop folders appear in the top left frame D Smart Desktop BE Tasks H Reports Click the Tasks folder The following subfolders appear Assigned To Me tasks assigned to you Assigned By Me tasks you assigned to someone else Created By Me tasks you created Assigned To User search for tasks assigned to a user Not Started tasks whose state is set to not started Active tasks whose state is set to Active Awaiting Data tasks whose state is set to Awaiting Data On Hold tasks whose state is set to On Hold Pending tasks whose state is set to Pending Reopened tasks whose state is set to Reopened Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 336 Managing Tasks e Complete tasks whose state is set to Reopened You can click any folder to view only tasks in that category Also the View Tasks screen appears in the right frame listing all tasks assigned to you or assigned by you sini ie View Tasks Assigned By and To John Edit 3 Tasks Show Task T gt Assigned To Me The CID State Priority Due Date Assia Assigned e Prep to Move Downstairs Not Started Low 4 Mar 2005 E je Edit Greeting Content Block 24 Not Started Normal 7 Mar 2005 E je Not Started High 11 Mar 2005 3 Not Started Active Awaiting Data pe On Hold F
143. The Workarea and Smart Desktop EI This site might require the Following Activex control DMS400 From Ektron Inc Click here to install Ektron DMS400 Automatic Download and Installation When the installation complete successfully please close this window a Click here to install the following Actives control DMS400 from Ektron lnc If a small red appears try downloading the client installation program and running it For additional assistance visit Ektron s support page Close 4 If that text appears click it The following menu appears What s che Risk DMS400 omatic ind Installation Information Bar Help 5 Click Install ActiveX Control 6 The following screen appears Click Install Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 18 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Internet Explorer Security Warning Do you want to install this software Name OS400 Publisher Ektron Inc More options Install Don t Install While Files From the Internet can be useful this File type can potentially harm YOUR computer Only install software From publishers you trust what s the risk 7 The following screen appears Close it when you see Ektron Asset Control in the top left corner of the screen circled in red below Ektron DMS400 Automatic Download and Installation When the installation complete successfully please close this window e Ektro
144. The image can be on your computer or a local area network Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 443 Editing Images Load Image Look ir a eWeblmageE dit i fe Pe History D ae p PN My Documents File name Files of type JPEG Files pa jpeg Open as read only To change the type of file that appears in the window click the down arrow circled above to the right of the Files of type field Your system administrator determines which types of files you can edit Oval Standard Toolbar Button D Description Draws an oval To use this command click the oval command drag the line and release the mouse To change the oval s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Editing Images Attributes X Line Attributes Color Attributes Line Size E I Highlight Cancel Paste as New Image Standard Toolbar Button Description After you copy or cut an image or an area of an image use paste as new image to insert it into a new file Before creating a new file WeblmageFX asks if you want to save changes to current file Pointer Selection Standard Toolbar Button WS Description Click an annotation to select it After you select an annotation you can perform functions on it such as delete it
145. a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists on page 271 On the other hand if you are creating a collection to appear only on a foreign language page and no other edition of the collection will appear on your site see Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist on page 271 You can only add content in the language of a collection So create the content first then create the collection that links to them Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists a Be w P Click the content folder in which your collection exists The folder s contents are displayed Click the View Collections button E The View Collections screen is displayed Select the collection that you want to translate From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection Using the Add button ci select the content to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content you want to add You can only add content in the selected language Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist 1 2 Navigate to the folder in which you will create the collection Click the View Collections button E The View Collections screen is displayed Click the Add button cp and enter basic information about the collection This screen is described in Creating a Collection on page 260 The View Collections in Folder screen appe
146. a hyperlink to www extron com When users see Ektron Web Site in a different color they can click the text to jump to the site Although most jumps go to the top of another Web page you can also jump to a bookmark within a Web page This section explains e Creating a Hyperlink on page 505 e Testing a Hyperlink on page 508 e Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 509 e Editing a Hyperlink on page 510 e Removing a Hyperlink on page 510 e Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink on page 510 Creating a Hyperlink When creating a hyperlink you must specify a e source the text or image the user clicks to move to the destination e destination the Web page to which the display moves when the user clicks the source Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 505 Using Hyperlinks To continue with the above example Ektron Web Site is the source and the Web page available at www extron com IS the destination To create a hyperlink click the Hyperlink button iB When you do the Hyperlink dialog box appears From there you can select from a list of Web pages also known as Quicklinks Or if the page you are jumping to is not on the list enter the URL address of the destination Web page Each choice is described below Using a Quicklink Your Web master can add to the Hyperlink dialog box any number of Quicklinks that is Web addresses that you can link
147. ackground Image field and press lt Backspace gt 4 Click OK setting Table Borders You can specify a border color or size for your table Assigning Border Color A table border is the line that separates the table from the rest of your Web page By default table borders are gray You can change the color of table borders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 479 Manipulating Your Table s Format table border Waris checked cell border lf you want a table s border to disappear set it to the same color as the page s background color This technique is often used to format text on a Web page Assigning a Cell Border Color Each cell also has a border that separates it from the other cells and the table border By default a cell s border color matches the table border However you can individually change a cell border color see Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 486 To assign a color to your table s border click the Border Color field on the Insert Table dialog box Border Color Border Size When you click that field a color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the table s border Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 480 Manipulating Your Table s Format Basic colors EE ERED De
148. aged Go back to previous screen Approving Multiple Content Items Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 119 Content Workflow Reports See Performing an Action on Several Content Items on page 114 The selected content is either submitted to the next publisher published immediately or deleted depending on the contents approval chain Checked In Report The Checked In Content report displays all the content currently in a checked in status The report displays the following information Title of content sD ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Date Date and time content was last edited Modified Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Submitting Multiple Content Items After selecting content use the submit toolbar option IE to submit it for approval or publication depending on your position in the approval chain Checked Out Report The Checked Out Content report displays all content currently in a checked out status The report displays the following information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 120 Content Workflow Reports Column Description Title Title of content ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Date Date and time content was last edited Modified Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET W
149. ains until the start date is reached At that point the content is deleted Active Content If content has a green border it is live on the Web site Title Login eens Published L gin il of CME 200 is controlled trom this workarea Tees wee Se ee ewe leba edi eleen ees te ie ce Cle eee ce ee we When content is active you can perform the following actions on it depending on your permissions The content s status remains active until it is checked out and changes are made to it Button Description For more information see cy Edit Check out the content to Editing Content on change it page 49 Ey Edit Summary Edit the brief summary used to Adding a Content describe the content Summary on page 73 Ej Edit Metadata Change the content s metadata Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 541 Appendix A Content Statuses Description For more information see Delete Submit a request to delete the Adding Content on content If you are the last or page 46 only approver the content is immediately deleted See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 89 Go to previous window Checked In Content lf content has a green border it could mean that the content is checked in A checked in content item is one to which changes were made after which it was checked in instead of being submitted or published When conten
150. al 2 10 pt A oy Content Bru A Click the Edit button The summary opens within the editor Make the necessary changes Click the Save button E 4 5 6 T The summary is saved and the View Content page is displayed with a status of checked out NOTE When you edit an existing content summary it goes into a checked out state After creating the summary check the content back in From that point you must submit it or publish it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 76 Adding or Editing Metadata Adding or Editing Metadata You can add two kinds of metadata to Ektron CMS400 NET content e Metadata that can appear on your Web site s search page below the standard search fields to help site visitors find content on your Web site illustrated below Search Text All the words Cc Any of the words Exact Phrase Match Partial words City of Origin This kind of metadata also appears on the Search screen used to find content within the Workarea For more information see Entering Custom Metadata on page 78 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 77 Adding or Editing Metadata e Metadata that resides in the source code of a Web page Examples include the title and meta tags This data makes it easier for search engines to find your Web page illustrated below Welcome to RC International Microsoft Internet Explorer
151. alf the size of the original cell Row before split Ae Row after split Ce To split a table cell into two cells follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to split Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 496 Working with Table Cells 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Split Cell from the menu Menus Cut Copy Paste Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Edit HTML neet Taule neet iaw neer Eoun Inesen Eel Delete Figs Delete alin Deleteltells Menge Welle Sith Eel T able Properties Cell Properties ow View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture 4 Two cells now appear where only one appeared before Merging Two Cells You can merge two cells into one If you merge two cells the new cell contains all of the information from both The new cell s width equals the sum of the two cells that were merged Cells Before Merge Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 497 Word Wrap Working with Table Cells Cell After Merge To merge two or more cells follow these steps 1 Select the cells that you want to merge 2 Click the Insert Table button 3 3 Click Merge Cells from the menu Word Wrap is a text formatting feature of tables It causes text to move down to the next line when the width of the characters on a line equals the column width For example if you set column width to 50 with word wrap turned on a table looks lik
152. ample www ektron com To link to content on your Web site click the library button fi This type of link is known as a Quicklink The Quicklinks dialog appears and you can navigate to the content The last published version of linked content appears If content has never been published nothing appears If you select a hyperlink the title of the selected content replaces any text in the Event Title field You can edit the new title if desired Launch link ina Check this box if you want the Web page or Quicklink specified in the new browser Hyperlink field to appear in a new browser window when someone clicks it If you do not check this box the new Web page replaces the current one when the link is clicked evel Pe Note This field only appears if your system administrator set up one or more event types for this event See Also Understanding Event Types on page 327 To apply an event type to this event click an Event Type from the right column Then click the Right Arrow B to move the event type to the Selected column Repeat for each event type you want to assign to the event 6 Click Save 1 Understanding Event Types Your system administrator can set up types of calendar events For a personal or workgroup calendar examples might be staff meetings employment interviews conference calls For an educational institution examples might be academic deadlines sporting events and tuition due dates Ektro
153. and attributes bold italic etc To use the Text command follow these steps Click the Text button T Move the cursor to where you want to place the text 3 Click the mouse button and drag a rectangle in which to insert the text NOTE Make sure the rectangle is large enough to accommodate your text The rectangle disappears after you enter text 4 Type the text 5 Click outside the rectangle to close it 6 To change the text or its font size style color etc place the cursor over the text and right click the mouse The text attributes dialog appears Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 452 Editing Images Font Attributes Color Attributes Text Attributes Font Style OB atang Bold h wks Mincha OPM ingLill HS imSun 5jze el Ol le a Sample AaBbYyZz T Underline Strikeout The following table lists functions you can perform with this dialog strikeout for example sample Font Attributes Strikethrough font color Color Attributes Primary Color if text wraps when it reaches the Text Attributes Wrap end of a line Twain Acquire Standard Toolbar Button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 453 Editing Images Description Perform a single page scan from a previously selected source See Also Twain Source on page 454 Importing Scanned Images WeblImageFX lets you acquire images from a scanner or di
154. ar 7 CMS300Sample products asp id 7 New Content Block 17 CMS300Sample index asp id 17 Contact Ektron 15 CMS300Sample index asp id 15 Here is an example of links when using a template named index asp In this case all pages have the same information surrounding the content Title ID URL Link Home Page Content 1 CMS300Sample index asp id 1 Support Page 3 CMS300Sample index asp7id 8 Plastic Molder 123 13 CMS300Sample index asp id 13 RC Cheetah 5 CMS300Sample index asp id 5 RC Redstar 7 CMS300Sample index asp id 7 1 New Content Block CMS300Sample index asp id 17 Contact Ektron 15 CMS300Sample index asp7id 15 To toggle between a default template and Quicklinks follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 263 Working with Collections 1 Access the Edit Collection screen for the collection you want to edit 2 Modify the Template field 3 Click the Save E button Assigning Content to the Collection After a collection is created your next step is to assign content to it To do so follow these steps NOTE When viewing a Collection on the Web site the last published version of content appears If the content has never been published nothing appears 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 256 2 Access the View Collection Scre
155. ar on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears Toolbar Customization View As Paragraph Format Format Special Characters C Form Elements Table Position Objects C Test Direction 5 Click the menu that you want to edit 6 Click the Commands tab A new screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 387 Customizing Your Toolbar Toolbar Customization Ea All Commands Bullets Bulleted List B Button gA Cell Properties Center Align Center we Check Spelling hi i aee Check Spelling 42 fou ove ete I Checkbox Move Down Selected Toolbar E dit Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box The left half of the Commands screen lists the buttons in the sequence in which they appear on the menu The right half of the screen lists available buttons that do not currently appear on the menu To add a button to the toolbar drag it from the right side of the screen to the location on the left side where you want it to appear You can also click a button then click lt Add This action places the button at the bottom of the list To remove a button from the toolbar drag it from the left side of the screen to the right You can also click a button then click Remove gt The Move Up and Move Down buttons let you to move any button up or down one slot within the list of buttons
156. ars Click the collection you just created From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 271 Working with Collections 6 Using the Add button ca select the content to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content you want to add You can only add content in the selected language Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Features A menu a collection and the ListSummary function are similar in that they let you add a list of links to a Web page The following table compares these features to help you understand which one would best accommodate your needs for a particular page NOTE To implement these features the assistance of a developer is required Display title of a content in a folder and possibly subfolders Display title of selected content in a folder and possibly subfolders Display external hyperlinks X amp library assets Display content summary X X optional Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 272 Working with Collections List Summary Display additional content X information comment last modified date start date end date user who last edited it ID number path relative to your site s root Can be multi leveled that is you can have submenus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 273 Working with Menus Working
157. ase the mouse button Changing the Menu s Orientation To change the menu s orientation follow these steps 1 Drag the menu from the toolbar 2 Move the cursor to the bottom of the menu until it becomes a double headed arrow illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 391 Customizing Your Toolbar a gt 3 Drag the cursor to the lower left As you do the menu s orientation changes from horizontal to vertical illustrated below 25 3ae f lt 2 T m mi A a kJ Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 392 The Context Sensitive Menu This section explains the functions available on the menu that appears when you right click the mouse within the eWebEditPro XML editor You can also access this menu by pressing the application key Eh Because this menu can change depending on what you are doing it is called a context sensitive menu Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML wv View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tag NOTE A different context sensitive menu is available when your cursor is within a table That menu is described in The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 467 The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 393 The Context Sensiti
158. ast or only approver the content is immediately deleted a BS View Staged View Staged button displays Staged Content on page 547 eg feb Published content that hasn t been Go to previous window Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 543 Appendix A Content Statuses Checked Out Content If content has a red border it was checked out by a user other than you If you checked it out the border is green While in this status other users are prevented from editing the content Ektron encourages you to contact us with y feedback about Ektron s Web content auth solutions The content remains checked out until it is checked in by the user who checked it out or your system administrator Each option you may perform on checked out content is described below Button Name Description Check In Check in content View Staged Click the View Staged button to view the content that has not Published yet been published Click the View Published button to view the content that is live on the Web site See Also Staged Content on page 547 Back Go to previous window a eneee Submitted Content A yellow border shows that a user has submitted the content into the approval chain The border remains yellow until the content is published or declined While the content is in the approval chain no user can check it out Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 544
159. at time Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 408 Editing in Microsoft Word Editing XML Documents If your organization has implemented eWebEditPro XML you cannot edit XML documents using Microsoft Word This is because Word does not support XML editing If a full XML document is loaded the Word button E is disabled If a Word document includes some custom XML tags the following dialog appears warning you about the problem Edit in Word WARNING This content contains tags that Microsoft Word may not recognize Microsoth Word may corupt the content mtroduce invalid tags or may not display it at all Do you want to continue You can proceed and edit using Word or decide not to edit using Word Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 409 Inserting Images To insert a picture into the editor place the cursor where you want the image to appear and click the Insert Picture button ls When you click the button one of the two Picture Properties dialog boxes illustrated below appears depending on how your Webmaster has set up your system The dialog boxes are very similar with the only difference being that the Select Server File button only appears on the second dialog box The Select Server File button appears if your upload mechanism is set to FTP It does not appear if the mechanism is HTTP For more information see the eWebEditPro XML Administrator Manual section Ma
160. ata summaries and other information To view content in Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps Viewing Content from a Web Page To view content from a Web page follow these steps Sign in 2 Browse to the content whose history you want to view 3 Click the Properties button E Continue reading from The View Content screen appears on page 41 Viewing Content from the Workarea 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the content as explained in Viewing a Folder on page 37 2 If your system supports more than one language you can select an edition of the content in a particular language via the language dropdown list illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 40 Working with Folders and Content Trinity In Line Pipe 1 manifold are for rear exhaust engines and 3 Click the content 4 The View Content screen appears wa English U S 5 i T Century Medical Services encourages yc you to meee US with ma e ane ETT about our products and services Worldwide Headquarters 5 Northern Blvd Bldg 6 Amherst NH 03031 USA Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 info ektron com After you select the content you have the following options NOTE Your options may vary according to your permissions and the status of the content Tab Properties Content View the content s properties Properties on page 43 Properties 41 Ektron
161. bottom of the page Updating Default Template for Multiple Quicklinks NOTE This action can only be performed on quicklinks When content is moved in Ektron CMS400 NET its quicklink does not get changed After it is moved you need to update the default template called in the contents quicklink To update the default template for one or more quicklinks follow these steps 1 inthe library access the quicklinks folder containing quicklinks you want to update 2 Click the Update Quicklinks button 3 The Update URL Link Template Quicklinks screen is displayed Check the quicklinks you want to update NOTE Check the box in the table header to select or deselect all 5 Inthe To text field enter the name of the template you want to apply to the selected quicklinks 6 Click the Update Quicklinks button to update the changes A confirmation message is displayed 7 Click OK to continue The selected quicklinks are updated to use the specified template Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 211 Using Ektron Explorer Using Ektron Explorer The Ektron Explorer lets you navigate through and view CMS content without signing in and using the Workarea You can also use a search screen to find and view CMS content So even if you have no knowledge of Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron Explorer provides a simple recognizable way to find and view content Depending on how your system administrator has set up
162. cacedacacdasacncnidnccdanctenvcctaneceats 252 Approving Documents sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 252 Adding Documents to Collections and Menus 252 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 ili Document Reports pemeeeeeeenesiee tier ornate ley ennesentel enero nie ene enerr cee nenners 252 Working with Collections ccccesscceseceneeeeseceeeeenees 254 Finding Collections victatiiscatcissiinniinnteceriateniatenieminamnsbmmaietins 255 Viewing a Collection wvsscasiccnniienccscaneseeonsancesstessnteusieddeusexeteadsarens 258 Creating a Collection wii sicscicccocncacseusesacectaccstacentaresatanaduaredanns 260 Editing Content in a Collection cccsccceessseseeeeeeeseeeeeenneesees 267 Reordering Collections LiSt ccccsssseessssseeesessseeeseeneeesees 268 Editing Collection Information sccscssseesseesseeseeeseeeees 269 Deleting a Collection ivinvssiviscassscincsececnncenennencsesnievenceduevexsnesesenaes 270 Working with Collections in a Multi Language System 270 Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Fea TOPO S oare E eteeee nae ecemeneseeeeeeanse 272 Working with Menus sessestnccsecssciatcneceeesntectucdeinewsserctontneses 274 The Structure of Menus and Menu Items ccccccessseseeees 275 Access to the Menus Feature ccsccccsesseeseeseeneeseeeeeeeenennees 276 Managing FOI Sv eccsccasakeasakearacc
163. cceccsssseeescssseeeseesseeseenseeeseoees 125 Site Update Activity Repolt cscseeessssseessssseeesseeseessoeees 127 Search Phrase Report ccsssseeecessseesecesseeeeessneeseenseesseeess 132 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 ii Working With HTML FOrmsS ccccseesseeeteeneeeeeeeseeeeeennes 135 Overview Of Form Processing s sssscccsssseeseeesseeseeeseenseeees 137 The Structure of Form Data ccccccesessseeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeenees 137 Accessing the Forms Folder cccssssecsesseeeenseeeeeseeseenees 139 Creating a New FOrim cc sssccccssssececeesseeseeeneeeseesseeeseenseeseoees 141 Creating a Form s Conte nt cccccsssseecessnseeceesseeeseenneeseoees 144 Form V AIAN ON sieni aa 150 ENN a e o E cia gems dep E A 151 Implementing a Form on a Web Page cccsssseeeeseeeeeeneeeees 170 Assigning a Task to a Form s sasssassnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 170 Viewing Form REPOrts ccccesecseseeeesseeesseeseeeenseeeeseeeaneeeeneens 173 Viewing Form INfOrmatiOn ccccccssesesseseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeensens 177 Editing a FOF sisisi 183 Deleting a FOrM sasssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 185 Form Module Toolbar siseisicdeseinauasnoscateiauioisaeniavdsssdiotavineatnenivanas 185 EIDE APY FONET ao i 188 Terms Used in this Chapter cccccssseeescssseeeceseseeseeeseees 188
164. cell to span rows or columns the editor does not remove the cells that are in the way Instead it moves those cells across or down to the next available position For example the following table has two rows and two columns Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 492 Working with Table Cells If you set cell A to span two rows note that cell C moves across to make room for cell A This action pushes cell D to the next column Aligning Text Within a Cell Within a cell you can specify how your text aligns horizontally and vertically Setting Horizontal Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the horizontal alignment of a cell You have set the alignment to left center or right or e left e center e right e justify the text is justified down both left and right edges Many books use this alignment style This alignment is not supported by all browsers Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 493 Working with Table Cells This example illustrates these choices text right justified center justified ext left justified This text is both justify left and right justitied To set horizontal justification of a table cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu R WWD S The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down a
165. cessibility Dialog on Alignment page 521 Vertical Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on Alignment page 521 Abbreviation Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 523 Categories Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 523 WARNING The Section 508 Table Properties dialog only works if Internet Explorer version 6 0 or higher is installed Once that is installed any browser can be used Netscape FireFox IE etc WARNING Even if you change no values on the screen you must open the Accessibility dialog whenever you modify a table for example add a new row The table s properties required for Section 508 are generated when you click OK to close the dialog box To create a 508 compliant table follow these steps 1 Create a new table or edit an existing one as explained in Introduction to Tables on page 457 2 Select the table by moving the cursor to a table border until you see a four headed arrow illustrated below When a table is selected small squares surround it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 519 Section 508 Compliance Employee Id Department 1546 1549 Human Resources 1550 sales 1551 Adminstration Click the Tables button E3 Click Table Properties The Table Properties dialog appears oo M Click the Accessibility button NoTE Your
166. cly viewable it only appears on the Workarea search screen Entering Title and Keywords After you create or update content it is typically published to the World Wide Web WWW Programs that search the Web such as Google look at a page s title and keywords to determine if they should return your Web page with their results To improve search results Ektron CMS400 NET provides two fields within Metadata by default NOTE Your system administrator may enable or disable these fields for each folder e Title appears on the search results screen to further define your Web page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 80 Adding or Editing Metadata File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae Oak ig GY A seh Favores Guede OM ROHS Address j htto 127 0 0 1 ons3 0RCsample index asp id 18 RG mnvernatvional Home Products RUNES E _Er t Hle Edit Format View Help Hoses When YOU Cri jee aqq i can add metac lt htm1 gt lt head gt appear on the right 2002 Ektron Inc CMS sample site ormation in the sample site is fictional gt lt TitlesAdding Metadata to a New Content Block Title gt 5 ae Te m maea anomie efnt content metadata gt opyright 2002 Ektron lt link rel stylesheet href default css type text css gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY topmargin O leftmargin 0 marginheight 0 marginwidth 0 rightmargin 0 bott
167. cted area of an image Deletes selected area of an image Delete on page 438 View Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see reset zoom ratio Displays image at full size Reset Zoom Ratio on page 448 zoom in Increases an image s magnification Zoom In on page 455 zoom out Decreases an image s magnification Zoom Out on page 456 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 429 Editing Images Image Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see image info Displays information about an image pen dimensions Modifies an image s width and 7 height color depth Changes the number of colors available to an image e eee Sharpens edges within an image Sharpen on page 451 brightness Changes an image s brightness Brightness on page 432 Image Info on page 441 Dimensions on page 438 Color Depth on page 435 Blur on page 431 contrast Changes the difference between Contrast on page 436 light and dark areas of an image dh horizontal flip Reverses an image horizontally left Horizontal Flip on to right page 441 tz vertical flip Flips an image vertically top to Vertical Flip on m bottom page 455 c5 rotate Turns an image a specified number Rotate on page 448 of degrees Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 430 E
168. cuments 409 uploading image from 408 multi language menus 309 N number toolbar option 380 numbers in words spell checking 405 O objects absolute positioning 382 Office 2000 inserting content from 514 Office documents creating 229 editing properties 232 importing one 234 importing several 236 Office documents document manage ment feature 227 open WeblmageFX command 443 oval WeblmageFX command 444 overwrite button 36 P padding cell 499 password changing 360 paste toolbar and menu option 376 paste as new image WeblmageFX command 445 paste text toolbar and menu option 376 pending start date content 546 pictures inserting see image upload properties image upload 411 pixels 417 pointer selection WeblmageFX command 445 polygon WeblmageFX command 446 position objects menu 382 prerequisites 9 preview button 36 floating toolbar 5 feature 11 print editor content 382 profile users updating 358 viewing 358 properties button floating toolbar 5 content block 43 publish button 36 content to web site 87 published content block viewing 37 Q quicklinks 506 adding to content 210 broken finding 53 definition 189 using for a collection 262 viewing 210 R rectangle WeblmageFX command 447 red content border color meaning 540 redisplay toolbars 389 redo WeblmageFX command 447 registered trademark character inserting 379 remove button 36 remove XSLT from XML content block 105 reorder b
169. d or updated within the selected date range e Total Each column is summed at the bottom except Percentage of Stale Content which provides an average of the percentage of all folders Graphing the Report Data After viewing the report results you can display that data as a graph illustrated below The graph s orientation is vertical or horizontal depending on your response to the Report Display field To graph the results click the graph toolbar button WH Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 131 Content Workflow Reports Content Reports Site Update Activity Report In Folder Content jew English U S All Types ater ie eros Start Date Monday September 05 2005 3 40 pm Ea End Date Wednesday November 16 2005 3 40 PM Select Content Folder Report Display include Sub Folders Get Result Stale Content Report E Updated Content fa Stale Content g sapo yuapuog Content 0 10 20 30 40 450 60 70 80 930 100 Percent Stale Content gt search Phrase Report This report displays all terms that were entered into the Search Text Field within a selected range of dates You can use it to discover the kind of information site visitors are searching for Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 132 Content Workflow Reports Search Phrase Report Minimum Count Include Site Include VWrorkarea Start Date Wednesday October 05 2005 5 05 pm Bd End
170. d selecte i a EE Or NTOEEY i i i To cc J OR to addresses in field email address Cohan et Note that the To and CC fields can accept fields whose validation type is email address or email address list On the other hand the From field can only accept fields whose validation type is email address that is a single email address To set this up follow these steps 1 Add a form field whose Validation type is Email address or Email address list The field prompts the user completing the form to enter his email address Label the field something like Enter your email address TIP If the field allows more than one address add on screen instructions to separate each address with a semicolon Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 181 Working with HTML Forms Plain Text Field Descriptive Name email address Field Name email_address Tool Tip Text emai address Default value Validation Please submit your emal address submit Survey Validation Email address list Error Message E mail address list Go to the Edit Form screen gt Mail Properties section 3 Move to the field labeled From At the dropdown list following OR to addresses in field select the field you created in Step 1 Now when a user completes the form the value he enters in the field created in Step 1 is used for the email s From address Retrieving Form Data Into the S
171. d the as well as those letters embedded in other words such as others and theater lf you want the search to find only whole word occurrences of the text you type into the Find what field click the Match whole words only box in the Find dialog box Find And Replace wwe Eo ooo Replace With Match whole word only Bece Match case Replace All Direction C Up Down Cancel Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 401 Checking Spelling The eWebEditPro XML editor can check your spelling as you type or whenever you want to check it The rest of this section explains e Disabling Script Blocking on page 402 e Checking Spelling as You Type on page 402 e Checking Spelling Upon Demand on page 403 e Spell Checking Selected Text on page 405 e Setting Spell Check Options on page 405 Disabling Script Blocking If Norton Antivirus 2001 is installed on your computer you need to disable script blocking in order to use the spell checker If you do not disable script blocking an error message will appear whenever you check spelling To do this follow these steps 1 Launch Norton Antivirus 2001 2 From the first window click Options 3 On the next window click Script Blocking 4 On the script blocking window uncheck Enable Script Blocking 5 Press OK Checking Spelling as You Type You can have the editor check spelling as you type To turn on the spell check as you type
172. d the Software may not be assigned or in any way transferred without the prior written consent of Ektron This Agreement and its performance and all claims arising from the relationship between the parties contemplated herein shall be governed by construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New Hampshire without regard to conflict of laws principles thereof The parties agree that any action brought in connection with this Agreement shall be maintained only in a court of competent subject matter jurisdiction located in the State of New Hampshire or in any court to which appeal therefrom may be taken The parties hereby consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction of such courts in the State of New Hampshire for all such purposes The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifically excluded from governing this License If any provision of this License is to be held unenforceable such holding will not affect the validity of the other provisions hereof Failure of a party to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not constitute or be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right to enforce such provision If you fail to comply with any term of this License YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED This License represents the entire understanding between the parties with respect to its subject matter YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT THAT YOU UNDERSTAND THIS AGREE
173. dds columns or rows to that cell not the whole table Choose multiple adjoining cells and merge them into one cell 534 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Button None Menu Table gt Cell Properties Keystroke None Cell Properties Button None Menu Table gt Row Properties Keystroke None Row Properties Column Properties Button None Menu Table gt Column Properties Keystroke None Button None Menu Table gt Table Properties Keystroke None Table Properties Show Hide Grid Lines Button H Menu Table gt Hide Grid lines Keystroke None Design View eal Button Design Menu View gt Design View Keystroke None Code View panacea al Button Code Menu View gt HTML View Keystroke None Window View Sion Oo Menu View gt Window View Keystroke None Launches a dialog box that provides information about the cell properties In this dialog box you can further define an individual cell Launches a dialog box that provides information about the row in which the cursor is located In this dialog box you can further define the row Launches a dialog box that provides information about the column in which the cursor is located In this dialog box you can further define the column Launches a dialog box that provides information about the table in which the cursor is located In this dialog box you can further define the table Shows or hides
174. ders Subfolders are available if the Include subfolders field is checked for the collection Click a subfolder to view its content To return to the parent folder click the folder with the up arrow tj NOTE If you select content from a subfolder click the add button to add the selected content to the collection Navigating between subfolders deselects content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 265 Working with Collections 9 Click the Add button FP See Also Creating a Collection on page 260 Working with Collections on page 254 Creating New Content for a Collection You can create new content while adding content links to a collection To add content follow these steps 1 Access the View Collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 256 2 Access the View Collection Screen for a collection as described in Viewing a Collection on page 258 3 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support select the language of the collection Click the Add button cp The Add Items to Collection screen appears If your collection includes subfolders and you want to add the content to one of them navigate to that subfolder Otherwise proceed to the next step Click the Add Content button 8 The Add Content screen appears If you are us
175. dialog box to change the window in which the destination page appears Hyperlink Information 0 Tee Http Y i Cat Link me SSS Bookmark o Tert Same Window self Parent Window _ parent Browser Window Quick Link select The possible values that you can enter into the Target Frame field are explained below If you want the destination page to appear Click this in the Target Frame field In a new browser window on top of the current New Window _blank browser In the same position within the browser window Same Window _self The new window replaces the current one Note this is the default If your page contains frames in the frame that Parent Window _parent contains the frame with the hyperlink If your page contains frames in the full display Browser Window _top area replacing the frames If your page contains frames in the frame with the Enter the name of the frame specified name Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 504 Using Hyperlinks Use hyperlinks to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another Web page The page can be within your network that is on an intranet or anywhere on the internet NOTE If you want to create jumps within a file see Using Bookmarks on page 501 For example if your Web page includes a jump to the Ektron Web site you would enter the text to indicate the jump for example Ektron Web Site then create
176. directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 283 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 284 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 285 NOTE You can only add content that resides in the menu s content folder or its subfolders 2 Click the circle next to Content Block 3 Click the Next button 4 The Add New item screen appears listing all content in the folder and its subfolders in which you created the menu 5 Click any folder to display its content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 286 oo 4 Working with Menus Check all content you want to add to the menu Click the Add Item button GH The View Menu screen reappears showing the new content Click the Edit icon py next to each new content item to access the Edit Menu Item screen This screen lets you assign additional information to the menu item such as the target window See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 2 9 Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item To add a library asset as a menu item via a content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 oa e Sb Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 283 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 284 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 285 Click the radio button next to Library Asset option Click the Next button The librar
177. diting Images Annotation Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see pointer selection Click an annotation to select it Pointer Selection on page 445 E choose color Sets the color for an annotation Choose Color on before you insert it page 433 AA choose font Sets the color of text before you Choose Font on insert it page 434 ae freehand Draws a line in any shape that you Freehand on want page 440 Draws a straight line Line on page 442 polygon Draws a polygon a closed figure Polygon on page 446 surrounded by straight lines rectangle Draws a rectangle Rectangle on page 447 Blur Standard Toolbar Button amp Description Blurs or softens an image You can select a level of blur from O through 4 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 431 Editing Images If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box mes Brightness Standard Toolbar Button Description Increases or decreases an image s brightness You can select a brightness level from 32 brightest through 32 darkest If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area NOTE You cannot adjust brightness if the image s bit depth is 8 or fewer See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 456 Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 432 Editing Image
178. do not exit Ektron CMS400 NET Installing the Document Management Functionality If the version of Ektron CMS400 NET that you are using includes the optional Document Management functionality the first time you Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 16 The Workarea and Smart Desktop access the Workarea the following screen appears It prompts you to install the Document Management software onto your computer Ektron DMS400 Automatic Download and Installation The page you are trying to view contains Ektron DMS400 It will appear within your browser It allows you to manage asset on web pages as easily as using that application Before you can use Ektron DMS400 it must be downloaded into your browser When you click the Install Now button at the bottom of this page Ektron DMS400 will be automatically downloaded and installed This process may take several minutes depending on the speed of your network connection Once downloaded Ektron DMS400 will not need to download again unless upgrading to a newer version You must have authorization to install programs on your computer Follow these steps to install the Document Management software Read the screen above 2 Atthe bottom of the screen click Install Now 3 The following screen appears The line at the top of the screen circled in red may appear depending on your browser security Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 17
179. e e reordering a collection The Tasks folder displays all tasks that are either assigned to you or that you assigned to another user or user group You can also assign tasks to yourself A task may or may not be related to a specific piece of content If it is you Can access content then attach a task to it This kind of task is managed just like the other tasks but you can also view and update it via the attached content For more information see Viewing a Task on page 347 This chapter explains how to work with tasks through the following topics e Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 336 e Creating a Task from the Web Site on page 346 e Creating a Task via the Content Folder on page 346 NOTE Tasks can also be created automatically when forms are submitted See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 170 e Viewing a Task on page 347 e Editing a Task on page 352 e Adding Comments to Tasks on page 353 e Deleting a Task on page 355 e Viewing a Task s History on page 356 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 335 Managing Tasks Task Module Toolbar on page 357 Creating a Task via the Task Folder This topic consists of the following subtopics Accessing the Tasks Folder on page 336 Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 337 Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 342 Accessing the Tasks Folder To access the
180. e 5 1 Revision 5 111 Content Workflow Reports All T Select the type of the content you want to HEE see on the report ETML E Office Documents Managed Files Selecting Content by Folder After viewing a report you can select a folder and only view the content in that folder that satisfies the other report criteria For example the Checked in Content Report can show only content whose status is checked in and which resides in the Contacts folder Select Folder Fe Please select sub folders by navigating the folders belo Selected Folder m Books 5 Calendar 5 CenturyMedicalServices en Contacts fen Dynamic Content In Content is __ Only content in the selected folder appears The report does not include content from subfolders of the selected folder To select content by a folder follow these steps 1 From the Smart Desktop select a report 2 Click the Select a Folder button lt 7 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 112 Content Workflow Reports 3 The top level folders appear lf the folder you want is on the list click the corresponding checkbox lf the folder you want is a subfolder click the parent folder s name A new screen appears showing the selected folder s subfolders Click the corresponding checkbox Click the Save button E to finalize your folder selection The screen displays all content items in the selected folder that satisfy all report crite
181. e 5 1 Revision 5 371 Creating a Simple Web Page Hyperfink gt Hyperlink Information Type http Link http Bookmark Text content Target Frame Cancel il Quick Link select link Mi 5 In the Link field after http enter www ektron com 6 Click OK Notice that the word hyperlink now appears in a different color When you save this Web page and a user views it if the user clicks hyperlink a new Web page will display Ektron s home page NOTE If your computer has an internet connection you can double click the hyperlink to test it Applying a Bullet to a Line of Text Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line Type You can begin a line with bullets j 2 3 Click the bullet button 4 Notice that the line is indented and now begins with a bullet You can begn a lne with bullets Changing the Size of Text 1 Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line 2 Type Finally you can change the font to a large size Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 372 Creating a Simple Web Page 3 Select the words large size 4 Click the down arrow to the right of the font size list When you do the list of available fonts appears 5 Click 5 18 pt 6 Notice that large size is now much larger than the other text Congratulations You have just created your first Web page with eWebEditPro XML You have learn
182. e Also A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet on page 191 Content Check this box if the content should be found when Searchable someone searches your Web site After you respond to the above fields the following options are available Buttons on the Add Content Screen a e Al Submit Submit the content into the approval chain This action also returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor See Also Approving Declining Content on page 86 A Publish Publish the content to the Web site Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button See Also Approving Declining Content on page 86 This action also returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor Eyl Check In Save and check in the document This action returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor It does not submit the content into the approval chain Rather it allows you and other users to continue changing it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 47 Working with Folders and Content fein oem fm Save Save the content without leaving the editor It is a good idea to save your work frequently Close the editor without saving changes Tabs on the Add Content Screen Content Add edit content Metadata Edit Metadata o Add Star
183. e Bin gm Extend Menu Feature doc 29 Microsoft Word Doci H absence reporting oO nn suggestions doc SO KE Microsoft Word Doci E animation sw comparison ga My Pictures Ink 1KB Shortcut H E CMS topics gm SC chapter revisions dor Z5K6 Microsoft Word Doci ERE ewebeditpro gm Special Features doc 24KB Microsoft Word Doci ERE framemaker correspondence gm steve changes to 300 setup m 33KB Microsoft Word Doci H help test gm Suggestion For Improving Task 44 KB Microsoft Word Doci a image edit Feature 8 In the left frame navigate to the folder that contains the files you want import 9 Inthe right frame click the checkbox next to each file you want to import You can only import files in the selected folder at this time Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 237 Using the Document Management Functionality 10 In the Title field you can enter an optional title to apply to all imported documents See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 238 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 12 Click the Check in Ef or Submit for Publishing button 3 See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 232 and Adding Content on page 46 13 The selected files are imported into the Document Management functionality Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once If you import files one at a time you
184. e Content folder Select the document s folder 2 3 From the View Content screen click the document 4 The View Content screen for the document appears 5 Click the Delete button 17 Like any type of content a document must go through the approval chain before it is removed Approving Documents Documents are placed into the approval chain just like other types of content For more information see Approving Declining Content on page 85 Adding Documents to Collections and Menus You can add a document to a collection or a menu just as you would any other type of content For more information see Working with Collections on page 254 and Working with Menus on page 274 Document Reports Ektron CMS400 NET provides several reports that track documents by status ae status Approvals Requiring your approval Requiring your approval approval Approvals Reports on page 118 Reports on Approvals Reports on page 118 118 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 252 Using the Document Management Functionality Displays documents in this For more information see status Checked In Content Checked in Checked In Report on page 120 Checked Out Content Checked out Checked Out Report on page 120 New Content New that is created and saved New Content Report on page 121 but never published Submitted Content Submitted for publication Submitted Report o
185. e about the comparison see Comparing Versions of Content on page 96 Removing Applied XSLT You can only remove an applied XSLT when viewing historical versions of XML content If you remove the applied XSLT you can view the content without the irrelevant XML tags The following table compares the views Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 106 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content With XSLT Product Name RC Redstar Description The RG Redstar is a radio controlled gas powered low wing aircraft This new plane is for beginners intermediates that are looking for a easy plane to learn with orto have fun with The Redstar is easy to fly and easy to maintain Specifications Alrfoil Low Wing Overall Length 57 IM wingspan YLin weight 7 0 lbs Engine Size 60 70 ce Fuel Tank Size 12 oz Engine Run Time 15 min full tank Refill Time 1 secs Fuel Type Standard White highly refined gasoline Color Standard Without XSLT Content RC Redstar The RC Redstar is a radio controlled gas powered low wing aircraft This new plane is fc beginners intermediates that are looking for a easy plane to learn with or to have fun wi Pedstar is easy to fly and easy to maintain Low Wing 57 in lin 7 8 lbs 60 70 cc 1 15 min full tanki 17 ser Standard White highly refined gasoline Standard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 107 Content Workflow Reports Content Wo
186. e content s Schedule screen Action on End Date Archive and remove from site fexpire C Archive and remain on site C Add to the CMS Refresh Report Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 70 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Each option is explained below Archive Options Can site visitors view content upon expiration Option Archive and remove from site expire Archive and remain on Site Yes The content will not appear on a page that uses the ListSummary function but will appear wherever the ArchiveListSummary function is used Add to CMS Refresh Report Can users view and edit content within Ektron CMS400 NET upon expiration Yes within its folder by clicking the archive button E Note If this option is assigned to content it only moves into the archived area of its folder after a site visitor accesses the host Web page Yes within its folder by clicking the archive button El Note If this option is assigned to content it only moves into the archived area of its folder after a site visitor accesses the host Web page Yes in the active area of its folder and on the Refresh Report See Also Refresh Reminder Report on page 124 Restoring Content from Archived to Active State To restore content from archived state to active follow these steps Navigate to its folder 2 If necessary click the Archive button to view it See
187. e default template used to display the content To learn more about a collection and perform tasks on it proceed o Viewing a Collection on page 258 Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder To access the Collections screen that displays all collections in all content folders follow these steps 1 From the top level folders in the lower left frame of your Workarea click Modules Click the Collections folder 3 The Collection Report screen appears Collections Report Title ID Description Path Products 1 Products navigation Products This is an example of using the Main Jobs listing 2 collection object for creating teasers in Human Resources a page Support Packages 3 Support 4 The screen has four columns described below Title given to collection by user who created or last edited it ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET Developers use this number to reference the collection in ecmCollection custom function Description given to collection by user who created or last edited it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 257 Working with Collections Folder location of the collection You can click any collection to view information about it and perform tasks on it See Viewing a Collection on page 258 You can also add a new collection See Creating a Collection on page 260 Viewing a Collection To view a collection follow these steps 1 Se
188. e mentioned above or a dynamic path such as 400Sample index aspx id 25 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 281 Working with Menus Se Template Link Note This field applies to content only It has no effect on other types of menu items such as images If you want to apply a template to this menu enter the template here If you do all content on this menu use this template when selected from the menu If you do not enter a template here the content on this menu uses the template specified in their Quicklink Overriding the Template Link You can override the menu template for any content item on this menu and instead use the template specified in its Quicklink To do so follow these steps 1 Add all items to the menu See Adding a Menu ltem on page 283 Go to the View Menus option Click More Info Click the menu item you want to change of a oe Ie At the Link field change the value from Menu Template to Quicklink Link OuickLink Menu Template Important If you created menus prior to upgrading to this version of Ektron CMS400 NET those menu items are assigned as Quicklinks You cannot change them to template links simply by entering a template link here Instead you must go to each menu item and change the Link field value from QuickLink to Menu Template as illustrated above Add a more detailed description for the menu 6 Click the Save button H W
189. e screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 146 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 157 Working with HTML Forms Password Mame Field2 Tool Tips Field J Default value Validation re Novadaicn SS Error Message OO Fields on the Password Dialog SSS Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters M amp lt gt into this field Tool Tips Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it value here Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 158 Working with HTML Forms a Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The for mat of the response is not checked Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit Site visitor s entry must be at least 8 characters and include one digit If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s Message response to this field does not satisfy
190. e table button E3 then click Insert Table from the menu When you do the Insert Table dialog box appears Insert T able Eo 0 eo Cancel il Borders 4 75 Use Default Color C Not Specified f Percent Pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding Horizontal Alignment Cell Spacing Custom Background Background Color ff Unassigned Background Image From File You can also access this dialog box after you insert it You would do this if you wanted to edit any of the information entered in the dialog To access this dialog after insertion follow these steps 1 Click the table 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table Properties from the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 458 Introduction to Tables When creating a table you can specify the e number of rows and columns e width e horizontal alignment on the page e background color or background picture e border size and color For more information about managing tables see Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 468 For more information about managing individual cells within a table see Working with Table Cells on page 483 Deleting a Table To delete a table follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the table until the cursor becomes a four headed arrow C 2 Click the mouse button The table becomes selected small squares appear around it Gi c
191. e this If you turn Word Wrap off for the same table you get this result If Word Wrap is turned off text stays on one line until the user entering table text presses lt Enter gt That keystroke causes text to move down to the next line Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 498 Working with Table Cells By default all cells have the Word Wrap feature turned on To turn Word Wrap on or off for a cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu g e ee oa The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click or off the Word Wrap checkbox and click OK Cell Properties Span Rowe Spanned Columns Spanned Layout Width W Word Wrap Setting Cell Padding and Spacing Cell padding is the space between a cell s data and its border 1 the pixel Cell spacing is the space between a cell and surrounding cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 499 Working with Table Cells e entire Assigning Cell Padding To assign cell padding to your table click the Cell Padding field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number of pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding 5 e z Cell Spacing Assigning Cell Spacing To assign cell spacing to your table click the Cell Spacing field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number
192. e this command click the freehand command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 440 Editing Images Attnbutes E4 Line Attributes Color Attributes Line Size E I Highlight Cancel Horizontal Flip Standard Toolbar Button dk Description Reverses an image horizontally left to right Click this command again to reverse the image horizontally right to left Image before horizontal flip Image after horizontal flip Image Info Standard Toolbar Button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 441 Editing Images Description Displays information about an image e image name e height and width in pixels e bit depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 456 e file format Line Standard Toolbar Button Description Draw a Straight line To change a line s size or color right click it after drawing it To use this command click the line command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 442 Editing Images Open Standard Toolbar Button Description Select an image for editing
193. e within your Web site The following sections explains how to use the content search Selecting a Folder to Begin the Search To search your entire site start with the top level Content folder If you want to limit the search to any folder and its subfolders select it then select the search criteria All folders under the starting folder are included in the search Accessing the Search Content Page To access the search content page follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder at which you want to begin the search 2 Click the Search button l 3 The Search Content Folder screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 54 Working with Folders and Content Search Content Folder Content M Forms Assets Include Archived match Partial Words Date Created between None EJ ER and None Ee Date Modified between None and None E Status Any w Size of Document between and Number of Slides PowerPoint between and The Search Screen The search screen helps you find Ektron CMS400 NET content by specifying the following criteria e the kind of content you want to search for example HTML content e asearch word or words e how the search words must match the content in order for a document to be found by the search e whether the search words are matched against the content item s title e whether the search words are matched against the content s comments
194. ean Source option removes unnecessary HTML tags ensures that all tags begin and end properly and maximizes the page for efficiency As a result the page should be error free and load more quickly in a browser Also the appearance of clean HTML is more consistent when viewed in different browsers To clean your HTML follow these steps 1 Right click the mouse 2 Click Clean Source from the menu 3 eWebEditPro XML cleans your Web page s HTML content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 513 Working with HTML Inserting Content from MS Office 2000 If you paste text into eWebEditPro XML from a Microsoft Office 2000 application such as Microsoft Word the following window appears Clean HTML Code For best results click Yes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 514 section 508 Compliance This section explains how eWebEditPro XML complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act a law enacted by the United States government that requires Federal agencies to make their electronic and information technology accessible to people with disabilities Specifically this section explains the following topics e Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML on page 515 e Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 516 e Section 508 Tables on page 518 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML Using Internet Explorer If the eWebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields on a
195. ears in the table at the top of the window From this window you can add another comment and update an existing one See the next section for more details Viewing a Comment After a comment is inserted into content it can be viewed by any user who can edit the content To view a comment follow these steps 1 Edit the content that contains the comment 2 Within the content double click the comment icon Ty ee O ZEEE Ses Y E Ww e RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RE ra las become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing 3 The Comments window opens Adding Another Comment To comment on an existing comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Comment window for the comment as described in Viewing a Comment on page 527 N Insert the comment Click the Insert button 4 The comment is saved and added to the top row of the comment table 5 Click the Close button od Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 527 Inserting Comments within Content Updating a Comment You can change a comment if needed To update a comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Comments window for the comment that needs to be updated 2 Click the Date Time link of the comment you want to edit Date Time Added By Comments now here s a comment on that cor Application T here s my comment Administrator Y 2004 09 54 AM Comm
196. eas of an image You can select a contrast level from 10 through 10 If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box im Contrast Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 436 Copy Editing Images Standard Toolbar Button Description Create New Copies a selected area of an image After you copy an image you can paste it using the paste command See Also Paste as New Image on page 445 To select an area of an image use the Select command See Also Select on page 451 If you do not select an area the entire image is copied Standard Toolbar Button Description Crop D Lets you create a new image If you are editing an image when you press this command you are asked if you want to save changes to it first By default a new image s bit depth is 24 but you can change it if desired using the color depth command See Also Color Depth on page 435 Standard Toolbar Button Description t Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 437 Editing Images Keeps selected area of an image removes everything outside that area To use the Crop command follow these steps 1 Select an area of an image that you want to keep 2 Press the Crop button t 3 Everything outside the selected area is removed Delete Standard Toolbar Button rad Description Removes a selected area of an image You must select an area be
197. eb site After selecting content check it in using the Checkin button E New Content Report The New Content report displays content in a new state that is it was created and saved but never published The new content report contains the following information Title of content i ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Date Date and time content was last edited Modified Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 121 Content Workflow Reports Submitted Report The Submitted Content report displays all content in a submitted state The report contains the following information Column Description Title of content i ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Date Date and time content was last edited Modified Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Viewing Position in Approval Chain While viewing the Submitted Content report you can view the content s position is its approval chain You can use this information to contact the individuals in the chain and ask them to complete their approval To do so follow these steps From the Submitted Content Report click the content s title The View Content page is displayed Click the Properties tab ae eS The content s position in the approval
198. eb page if the image itself cannot display for any reason The Options Button When you click the Options button on the File Properties dialog box the options dialog box appears The box displays information about your connection to the Web server Cancel For information about these settings see Uploading Images in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 422 Inserting Images Moving an Image to the Server If you insert an image from your computer into eWebEditPro XML content that image must be moved to the server when you save the content The image can only appear on Web pages that display it after you move it to the server When you save content that incudes an image you inserted the following dialog appears Files Wanting for Upload Files for Upload ES Upload Now Upload Later ea E All inserted files appear in the dialog which also estimates how long it will take to move the files to your server If you do not want to wait that long to upload the files click Upload Later If you do this the images will not appear on the published Web content until you move them to the server Mone W wnet 13 KB Estimated Upload Time foo 00 05 Tithe You can also enter a Title for the image near the bottom of the screen If you do this text appears when the user reading the Web pages moves the cursor over the image D
199. ection a link to the content click this to view and edit the content ID number quicklink Collections Toolbar The following table describes the collection toolbar buttons Description More Information Add Add new collection or add items to a Creating a Collection collection on page 260 Remove Remove items from a collection Removing Content from the Collection on page 268 Reorder Reorder items in a collection Reordering Collections List on page 268 Edit Edit collection information Editing Collection Information on page 269 Delete Delete a collection Deleting a Collection on page 2 0 Return to previous screen Creating a Collection Creating a collection involves two steps os e Adding a Collection on page 261 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 260 Working with Collections e Assigning Content to the Collection on page 264 The following sections explain each step Note This section explains creating a collection in a site that does not support multiple languages If you want to create collections in several languages see Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 270 See Also Working with Collections on page 254 Adding a Collection To add a new collection follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder in which you want to create the collection 2 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language suppo
200. ed how to apply bold italic and underlining create a hyperlink add a bullet to a line and change the size of the text This sample used only a few of the many features available The following sections explain the rest of the details about using the product Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 373 Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the buttons and drop down lists on the toolbar The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below AS ER MA Sooo e Aes aam eB e Apply Style Normal Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt r A a HE Z U mi Wt Wl WW Il i te nbsp 6 TM 5 The buttons let you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables All buttons may not appear Your Webmaster determines which buttons appear on your toolbar Also you can customize your toolbar so that it contains only the buttons you use See Customizing Your Toolbar on page 385 This section explains e Selecting Text on page 374 e Applying Formatting Attributes to Text on page 375 e Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 375 selecting Text You select text before performing an action on it such as copying it e To select all information on a page press Ctrl A e To select a portion of the information on a page you have two choices Hold down the
201. edure below is quicker if you are deleting several or all items at once 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 305 Click the Remove button 1 The Delete Menu Item screen opens 4 Click the checkbox next to the menu item you want to delete You can click Select All to choose all menu items delete Click Clear All to unselect all menu items 5 Click the Delete button 7 Working with Menus in a Multi Language System NOTE For background information about supporting multiple languages on your Web site see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content You can create an edition of any menu in every supported language When a site visitor selects a language navigates to a page that has a menu and clicks the menu link Ektron CMS400 NET displays the menu in the selected language if it is available If a menu in that language is not available nothing appears Before creating or translating a menu its a good idea to create or translate all content that will be on the menu In this way you can link this content to the new menu However after creating a menu you can add new items to it Translating a Menu To translate a menu into any supported language follow these steps You can navigate to the menu via the Web site or from the Workarea Each procedure is described below Ektron CMS
202. eenes 389 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar cccsceesssesseeeeseeeseeeseees 391 Changing the Menu s Orientation ccccssesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 391 The Context Sensitive Menu ccccssssessssseeseenseeseeees 393 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features 396 Copying from Other Applications ccccsssessssseseeseeees 397 Finding and Replacing Text ccccsssceseeseseeseeeeneeeeseeaneneens 398 oie 070 Ml gt 4 eenenen eee nee Ren er ene ss eee etree eee ee ene ce re eee me ene es eee inner ee 398 Finding and Replacing Text cssssccssssecseseesseneeeenseoeneeenens 398 Additional Options on the Dialog BOX ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 399 Checking SONG s sisien anae 402 Disabling Script Blocking cccccceeseeessesseeseeenneeseoeneeeees 402 Checking Spelling as You Type ssassssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 402 Checking Spelling Upon Demand l s sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 403 Setting Spell Check Options cccccsssssesssesseeeseenseesseeees 405 Editing in MicroSoft Word ccsccccesseesssseeeeseeeeseeeeseessenees 407 Uploading an Image in a Microsoft Word Document 408 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 V Editing XML DOGUINIGIIG sticccscessctecscecettncs testelsiceleteeieiereeceteees 409 Inserting ME Be ones caer cinneatanca ng aedananseieeuiaseahesavacnanasasnnanmsenines 410 Usi
203. eet on page 177 Add Task Add a task Managing Tasks on page 86 7 a a a 2 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 186 Button or Tab View Reports i View Content or Form Properties Properties View language Add Add select select language language Description View submitted form data can select range of dates Access view properties for the content If you can view forms in more than one language select a language from the drop down list Lets you copy current form into new block and translate it to selected language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Working with HTML Forms More Information Viewing Form Reports on page 173 Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 178 Translating Content o page 923 n 187 Library Folder Library Folder The library folder stores images files quicklinks and hyperlinks that can be inserted into editor content Before you can insert them into content you must copy them from your computer to a larger file server computer that everyone editing your site can access This chapter explains how to copy such files and insert them into Web content through the following topics Terms Used in this Chapter on page 188 Accessing The Library on page 189 Library Folder Properties on page 191 Searching the Library on page 192 Files on page 195 Hyperlin
204. eft to occupy the vacant space In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked on Delete Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 485 Working with Table Cells Before setting a Cell s Border Color NOTE A cell border is the line that separates it from other cells By default the color of a cell s border matches the color of the table border However you can change the color of any cell border individually When viewed in Netscape Navigator cell borders are gray regardless of any change you make on the Cell Properties dialog box This example illustrates the effect of different cell border colors within a table E Sets the color of the table bec Sets the thickness of the tab late tha ceacines saree thes If you want a cell s border to disappear set it to the same color as the table s background color To change the color of a cell s border follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse 2 Click Table from the menu 3 Click Cell Properties from the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 486 Working with Table Cells 4 Click the Border Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the cell border See Also Using the Color Box on page 490 Basic colors EE EHEHEH
205. ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 510 Working with HTML eWebEditPro XML creates pages for display on the World Wide Web or an intranet These pages use HTML hypertext markup language to format text and images for display in a browser You do not need to know HTML to use eWebEditPro XML However if you know HTML you can view insert or edit your Web page s HTML code e Viewing and Editing HTML on page 511 e Inserting Source on page 512 e Cleaning Source Code on page 513 e Inserting Content from MS Office 2000 on page 514 Viewing and Editing HTML When you choose to view your page as HTML the editor cleans the content using a method determined by your Webmaster For more information see Cleaning HTML in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide To view your page s HTML follow these steps 1 Click the View as HTML button e or right click the mouse and click View as HTML from the menu SBIECE AII Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML ow View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Cb re Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 511 Working with HTML 2 The HTML code appears While viewing the code you can edit it using editor functions such as Cut Copy Paste and Replace To select all content press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt You can also set default values for the style size and color in which the HTML appears To do thi
206. elected table or image at its current screen position Nothing can move a locked object To move the object unlock it by clicking this button again Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 382 Toolbar Buttons Ty If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image in front of Move to Front the others nee If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image behind the Move to Back eters If text overlays an image move the image in front of the text If anim rl move the text in front of the image Below Text an image overlays text V g Text Direction Options fa Bd The text direction menu options Z allow bi directional editing of text which is useful for Arabic Farsi and Hebrew The client computer must also support the language The text buttons determine the editing direction while the edit buttons determine the side of the editor that displays the scroll bar For right to left languages such as Arabic Farsi and Hebrew the text editing would be right to left and the scroll bar would be on the left side For western European languages the text editing would be left to right and the scroll bar would be on the right side Button Function Text left to right Left Right Text ext is entered left to right ight to left Right Left Text Text is entered right to left The vertical scroll bar appears on the right side of the window J Le
207. eleting a Picture If you want to delete a picture follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 423 Inserting Images 1 Move the cursor over the picture 2 Click the mouse to select the picture 3 Click the Cut button 4 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 424 Editing Images WebImageFX lets you select an image from the content edit that image and then insert the updated image into the content Editing consists of several functions available on the toolbar such as e brightening e rotating e changing the color depth e inserting text This section explains WeblmageFX Important WeblmageFxX is an external add on product available from Ektron Using WeblmageFX Choosing the Image lf you double click an image it appears within WeblmageFX You can also right click the mouse and choose Image Editor from the menu that appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 425 Editing Images WebImageFX looks similar to eWebEditPro XML but has different menu and toolbar buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 426 Editing Images If the Image Edit button GP appears on your toolbar you can click it to open WeblmageFX If no image is selected when you press the button or click the menu command a blank editor appears and you can use the File gt Open command to choose an image Once the image is in WeblmageFX you can
208. ell Spacing Table Dialog Boxes and Menus Lets you specify The number of rows and columns in the table Table width The table s alignment across the Web page The background color of the table A background image for the table Whether or not to use the default color gray for table borders If you do not use the default the color of the table border The size of the table border The space in pixels between the cell text and a cells border The space in pixels between a cell and Surrounding cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 For more information see Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 468 Specifying Table Width on page 470 Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 493 Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 4 6 Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 4 7 Assigning Border Color on page 479 Assigning Border Size on page 481 Assigning Cell Padding on page 500 Assigning Cell Spacing on page 500 464 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Cell Properties Dialog Box The Cell Properties dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a cell s appearance Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Cancel Borders M Use Default Color f Mot Specified Border Color C Percent i word wrap C Pixels Horizontal Alignm
209. emailing Reports on page 115 Editing a lask You can change task information such as e Title e Assigned to e Language e Content e Priority e Task Category e Task Type e Status State e Due Date e Start Date e Description To edit a task perform the following steps 1 Access the view task page for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 347 Click the Edit button Ly The Edit Task screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 352 Managing Tasks 4 Edit the task 5 Click the Update button E to save the changes Adding Comments to Tasks You can add comments to an assigned task if you want to provide additional information about its status For example if you update a task s status from n progress to Waiting on Someone Else you can use a comment to describe the status change such as left voice mail with John with questions about his changes to the home page Comments appear at the bottom of the View Tasks screen illustrated below IRI bb IERIE ee RII a RR Re Ee EE eRe I Task Title Make sure to review your approval list Assigned To a admin Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Not Started Due Date 11 Jun 2004 Start Date 10 Jun 2004 Description Remember to view your approval list every day and approve any content blocks on the list Comments Date Time Added By Be sure to check this list every day for
210. en as described in Viewing a Collection on page 258 3 Click the collection to which you want to assign content View Collections in Folder Content Title ID Date Modified New Collection 21 amp i7 2005 10 25 28 AM 4 The View Collection screen appears 5 Accept or change the language View Collection New Collection German Standard French Standard 6 Click the Add button Fr 7 The Add Items to Collection screen appears displaying Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 264 Working with Collections e all subfolders within the selected folder Subfolders are available if the Include subfolders field is checked for the collection e content in the selected folder that is not part of the collection Note that the file types selection remembers your most recent choice and may filter which files appear You can change that selection if desired Add items to Collection New Collection fan Ty P E S a t eee Le hom ee ESET Renae EEA Wow cunts EA Riser wre Gyan incense Apo fice Documents Wlanaged Files io Books 5 Calendar E Language B CenturyMedicalServices 5 Contacts D Dynamic Content In Content O Fag D Form Example O IntranetBasic D Press Releases 5 Purchase Orders B AddOnRegistrationProcess doc 381 1033 8 Check boxes next to content to add to the collection You can only add content from the selected folder or possibly its subfol
211. ence feature highlights changes that were made to selected content Below is an example of the View Content Difference screen showing two versions of content The changes are indicated by e redlining deleted content e highlighting in yellow added content F CMS Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer almalla x Welcome to RC internNational Re oo ee is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve RO rac Re ational has become one of the leading manutactures of RC racing and flying vehicles sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RO commmuruty We wall c improve our attordable products and hope you will become an RC international member Within the View Content Difference feature you can perform several tasks as well as view different versions of the content separately or compared When Can I Compare Content The View Content Difference feature is only available when e you are viewing an historical version of content e a staged version of the content is available See Also Staged Content on page 530 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 95 Comparing Versions of Content The following table explains when you can use the feature and which versions are compared Content Status Compares current published version with Published Historical version stored in the content history area Checked In Most recently checked in version Sub
212. ent Vertical 4lignment Custom Background Background Color Background Image From File The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 465 Field s Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Word Wrap Horizontal Alignment Vertical Alignment Background Color Background Image Use Default Color Border Color Table Dialog Boxes and Menus Lets you specify If the cell spans two or more rows If the cell spans two or more columns The minimum cell width Whether text moves down to the next line when it reaches the specified width of a cell The alignment of data across a cell The alignment of data up and down within a cell The cell s background color if you want it to be different from the table s background color A background image for the cell Apply the table border color to this cell border Apply a color other than the table border color to this cell border Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 For more information see Spanning Rows or Columns on page 491 Spanning Rows or Columns on page 491 Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 483 Word Wrap on page 498 Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 493 Setting Vertical Alignment on page 495 Specifying a Cell s Background Color o
213. ent e comments entered by user to describe nature of changes made To view any version click its title When you do the Content History window appears for the selected content The Content Version Number Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a unique number to each saved version of a content block The number is increased by one tenth if the content is checked in but not published If the content is published the next whole number is assigned Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 104 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content For example if the current version is 1 0 and you check in that content the new version is numbered 1 1 If the next user who edits that content publishes it the new version number is 2 0 lf the content is purged the numbering scheme restarts with the content that remains in the database The Detail History Window After viewing the View Content History window you can click any version to see the detail for it The detailed History window has two sides e The left side redisplays the information in the content history window See Also gt The Content History Window on page 104 e The right side displays the selected version of the content After viewing a version of content you can perform these actions on tt Restore Restore historical version of Restoring a Previous content Version on page 105 View Difference Compare historical version to Comparing Historical current version Ver
214. ents Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt A Jl E 7 U B m amp 3 The comment editor opens with the selected comment in it 4 Update the comment 5 Click the Update button to save the changes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 528 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients IMPORTANT An additional editor license is required when using the Macintosh as a client and editing content For information on adding the license see the Setup Manual section Macintosh Editor License You can use an Apple Macintosh computer to create and edit Ektron CMS400 content To get the most functionality from Ektron CMS400 NET on the Macintosh use the Safari browser When using a Macintosh to edit content log on to your site as if you were using a PC 1 Open a Safari browser 2 Navigate to your site s login page 3 Click the Login button If you have access to the Workarea the Workarea button appears and you can start editing While there are a few limitations when using the Macintosh with Safari to edit content almost all functionality is the same as using a PC The following functionality is different when using a Macintosh e creating and editing HTML forms is not supported e creating and editing XML Forms aka the Data Designer is not supported e working with Document Management content is not available See Also Using the Integrated
215. er English U 5 4 Content Summary Meta Data Schedule amp Apply Style Normal 20 pi A porun ABC ki Cd A 060 AvE8 h moea A453 BRB BBRBHA4 SP A 2 nbsp TH i A Native NET Content Management Solution Improve developer productivity and _ i experience with drag and drop CMS ektron 4 components fortemplate development NA S A at CMS400 NET s visual development Site Preview While logged into Ektron CMS400 NET you can preview the Web site as it would appear to visitors or view it in regular view Button Description Appearance Preview Content appears as last edited The advantage of this mode is Mode that you can see a Web page as it will appear when published to your site Continue editing until you are satisfied with its appearance In Preview mode click the Preview button to switch to regular mode Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 11 Logging In and Out Button Description Appearance Regular View The most recently published version of content appears In this mode colored borders surround content when you move the cursor over it In regular view click the Preview button to switch to preview mode Toggling Site Preview To toggle site preview on and off follow these steps 1 Navigate to a page that includes the login logout button 2 Logout Workarea ww Preview 2 Click the Preview butto
216. ered for each field appears below the header Contact Information Delete IB Date Subject Full Address City State ip E Submitted Name C 33 11 11 2005 Contact Bob 75 Main Springfield New York 14587 E 2 02 10 PM Form Balton St F C 34 11 11 2005 Contact Jim 5 Amherst Me wy O3031 2 02 55 PM Form Smithfield Northern Hampshire C Boulevard List of Submitted Values The List of Submitted Values format provides the same information as the Table of Values but is formatted vertically rather than horizontally See Also Table of Values on page 174 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 174 Working with HTML Forms Delete ID Date Submitted Field Value C 33 11 11 2005 2 02 10 PM Subject contact Form Full Name Bob Bolton Address 75 Main St City Springfield State Mew York Zip 14587 Business Phone 800 458 7854 Home Phone Email Address C 34 11 11 2005 2 02 55 PM Subject contact Form Full Name Jim Smithfield Address 5 Northern Boulevard City Amherst State Mew Hampshire Zip 03031 Business Phone 603 594 0249 Home Phone Email 4ddress Survey Results Survey Results total for choice and select type fields the number of times each choice was selected Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 175 Working with HTML Forms Field value Count Candy Candy 3 musketeers 2 Hershey s 4 snickers 1 Cofee Coffee Chocolate Almond oa Colombian 100
217. ers e Ektron Products Partners in Learning Program 3 When you click the bookmark its full address appears in your browser s address bar This bookmark s address looks like this http www ektron com single cfm doc_id 35 Benefits2 4 Click the address bar The address is selected Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt to copy the address into the Windows clipboard Go to eWebEditPro XML 6 Select the text or image from which you want to jump to the bookmark 7 Click the Hyperlink button The hyperlink dialog box appears 8 Move the cursor to the Link field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 509 Using Hyperlinks 9 Press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt to paste the address you copied in Step 4 into the Link field 10 Click OK Editing a Hyperlink If you need to change a hyperlink s destination Web page or target frame follow these steps 1 Click the Hyperlink button The hyperlink dialog box appears Edit the Link or Target Frame field as needed Press OK Removing a Hyperlink lf you want to remove the hyperlink from text or an image select the text or image and press the Remove Hyperlink button Bs Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink lf you enter a URL or an email address into eWebEditPro XML it automatically becomes a hyperlink To prevent this enter an extra space in the URL or address For example instead of entering sales ektron com enter sales lt blank gt
218. erse the most recent action as if it Button never occurred You can undo up to 50 Menu Edit gt Undo actions E Keystroke Control Z Redo Reverse the undo action You can redo Button 7 as many actions as you have undone Menu Edit gt Redo Keystroke Control Y Insert Hyperlink Launches the Insert Hyperlink dialog box Button Adds hyperlink to text in the editor Menu Insert gt Insert Hyperlink Keystroke Control K Bookmark Button None Launches the Insert Bookmark dialog Menu Insert gt Bookmark box Adds a bookmark to the content Keystroke None Remove Hyperlink Button None Removes the hyperlink from text in the Menu Insert gt Remove Hyperlink editor Keystroke None Files Images Hyperlinks Launches the Library dialog box which Button E allows you to add library items to the Menu Insert gt Files Images Hyperlinks content Keystroke None Insert Symbol a Launches a special characters and Button symbols dialog box Choose a character Menu Insert gt Insert Symbol or symbol and click Insert Keystroke None Insert Horizontal Inserts a Horizontal line below the line Rule Button where the cursor is located Menu Insert gt Insert Horizontal Rule Keystroke None Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 533 Insert Table Add Row or Columns Insert Cell Delete Row Delete Column Delete Cell Split Cell Merge Cell
219. ertevtvisserarmennrdnennrennidaretannanonns 528 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients 529 Using the Integrated Macintosh EGlItor csseseeseeees 529 Appendix A Content StatuSes cccsseccsesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 540 Active Gs Lc eres ee eee ae ee ee eee ae ee ee a 541 Checked In COntent 2cccceeceececeeceeceeeeceeceseeseeceseeseeceseuseeseseuens 542 Checked Out Content wise ciscinscsccceiesded ccteavedaancenssetsawcesasnceaneeesuecns 544 Submitted CONtent ccceececceceeceececeeceeceseeseeceseeseecesenseeeeeenees 544 Marked for Deletion COntent ccccccecceceeceececeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeees 546 Pending Start Date Content cccsssseeseesseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeesees 546 Saged io go sissi 547 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 vii Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 viii Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Using Ektron CMS400 NET to manage Web content is easy once you know the basics of setting up and maintaining your site This documentation explains how to maintain an Ektron CMS400 NET site from a user s point of view By reading this documentation you will gain an understanding of how Ektron CMS400 NET works This section introduces basic concepts that you should understand when beginning to work with Ektron CMS400 NET through the following subtopics e What is a Content Block on page
220. es Content Search Data Content File links to topics in POF s txt View read only Asset 5 If you want to view the file before editing it click the View read only Asset button If you do the file opens for display purposes only 6 To edit the file click the Edit button 7 7 The following screen appears Edit Content Title topic links Englisl Content Metadata Schedule select file to be uploaded File CADOCUME 1 BBOLT 1 EKTLOC Save To Local Edit in App 8 To open the managed file in the host application click Edit in App Then make your changes save it in the host application and click either the Check in E or Submit for Publishing button amp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 246 Using the Document Management Functionality lf you want to save this version of the file to your computer click Save to Local If you do a window appears Navigate to the desired folder then click the Save button If you want to select another file on your computer or network and save it under this name in Ektron CMS400 NET click Browse If you do a window appears Navigate to the desired folder then click the Open button The new file is saved under the old Ektron CMS400 NET name 9 Edit the managed file as well as its summary metadata schedule tasks or comments See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 73 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page
221. es folder provides a central Collections folder which displays all collections on one screen regardless of their content folder For more information see Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page 257 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 255 Working with Collections Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder To access collections for a content folder follow these steps 1 Click the content folder that contains the collection O 292 268 6272 ACME aF Content ao Human Resour ET ee Marketing 2 The folder s content appears in the right frame 3 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support features select the language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 270 Click the Collections button The View Collections screen appears View Collections in Folder Human Resources Title ID Date Modified URL Link Main Jobs listing 2 04 Nov 2002 03 36 PM CMS300Sample hr asp The screen displays each collection created for the folder The following table explains each column The title assigned to the collection by the creator The ID assigned to the collection by Ektron CMS400 NET This number is used to store and retrieve the data to from the database Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 256 Working with Collections Date When the collection was last edited Modified URL Th
222. ess the Workarea as described in Site Preview on page 12 2 Click Content from the left lower side of the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 37 Working with Folders and Content 3 All content in the content folder and the selected language appear on the right side of the screen Subfolders appear in the upper left frame 4 To work with any folder or its content click the folder When you do its content appears in the right frame NOTE You can only view folders for which your system administrator has granted permission 5 If your system supports more than one language you can select content for a particular language or all languages using the language dropdown list illustrated below View Contents of Folder Content Tite Language ID Dan ai Contact Ektron S a a a oo AN Greeting 1 O35 PM Home Page Content 1 CLO Sh Each folder lists the following information about its content Description The name of the content 38 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Working with Folders and Content p a Language The language of the content The number assigned to the content by Ektron CMS400 NET Itis used to retrieve the content from a database Status The status of the content See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 523 Date The most recent date the content was added edited or Modified published Last Editor The la
223. essicarcrmnesincmnens een eenereees 277 Working with Calendars c sccesseeeseeeeseeeeeseneeeeees 312 Understanding Calendars c cccessseeesenseeeeneeeeenseseenseenes 314 Accessing the View Calendar Screen csssssseesseeseees 315 VIEWING a Calendar siciwssinsivcncaccrrsnccusnsicusnverenstaseaerscceasscnseccnnaecsis 320 Tips on Viewing a Calendar ccccccssseeescesseeeseeeneeseeeeeees 322 Adding a Calendar Event ccccsssseescessseeesesseeseeeseeeseneneees 324 Viewing a Calendar Event cccccssscecsssseesceeneeesseesseeseeenees 329 Editing Calendar Everts vaiciisccisecdisunscisssatscassstscesansdceneentaeincainn 331 Deleting Calendar EVeNts sccsssseeessssseesseesseeeeeenneesees 333 Managing TAS ie Si sssrini nia 335 Creating a Task via the Task Folder ccccsssssseeesseessseeesenes 336 Creating a Task from the Web Site cccsssesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee 346 Creating a Task via the Content Folder ssssccsssseeeesees 346 UN kU hace T A E E 347 Editing a TaS acted raed on anie 352 Adding Comments to TaSKS cccssssseessesssessenseesseeneeenseeaes 353 Deleng a TaS Kasini E 355 Viewing a Task s History ccccesecssesseeeseeeeseeenseeeeseeeeneeoeneees 356 Task Module Toolbar sisecccsnisesensscensesiesnsscteseecensnsdentennctexsecenscenes 357 Updating Your User Profile ccesseceseseesecnseseneees 35
224. essing The Library 1 To access the library click the Workarea button Cworkarea or icon 2 Click the Library folder in the lower left corner of the Workarea a Content 3 The Library folder appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 189 Library Folder Library Folder Content images Tithe ID Date Modified Filename ALM 624 4 14 2005 10 15 18 AM CMS400ExampleuploadedImages aim 2i gi r ANM ONDE DEMAND CMS400 Logo 14 1 3 2005 3 58 19 PM CMS400Example uploadediImages cms400 5 CMS400 net Fast50 522 36 2005 1 39 32 PM CMS400Example uploadedimages fast5d agit Gilbane 625 4 14 2005 10 31 00 AM CMS400Ex ample uploadedimages Gilbanet1 GILBANE RFPORT 4 The sub folders appear in the left frame Files in the root folder library appear in the right frame Library Folder Contenti files You can use the dropdown list circled above to change the type of library files that appear To work with any library file click it When you do the View Library screen appears providing additional information about the item From here you can e edit its title file name or description e overwrite it e find content linked to it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 190 Library Folder e delete it For more information see Viewing Files on page 198 Toolbar buttons are also available on the library screen The following table explain
225. ets Finally you can change the text to a large JKA Notice that this page has the following elements e he second sentence includes bold italic and underlined text e The third sentence includes a hyperlink text that will jump to another Web page when the user clicks on it e The fourth sentence begins with a bullet e The last sentence has some very large 18 point text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 370 Creating a Simple Web Page Creating the Sample Web Page To create this page follow these steps Enter the First Two Sentences 1 Open eWebEditPro XML Your Webmaster installs eWebEditPro XML on your computer and determines which fonts and sizes are available Your system may not match the example below Type the first two sentences This is some sample content You can make text bold italic and underlined with the push of a button Double click the word bold to select it Then click the Bold button to apply bold to the word Double click the word italic Then click the Italic button to apply italic to the word Double click the word underlined Then click the underline button 2 to underline the word Creating a Hyperlink 1 2 3 4 The hyperlink dialog box appears Type You can also easily add hyperlinks Double click the word hyperlinks so that it becomes selected Click the Hyperlink button iB Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Releas
226. etting Started gt Recognizing Content gt Returning to the Classic User Interface Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET Organizations typically want a Web site that is updated frequently with the latest information They also want to decentralize the updating process so that non technical users from any department can make changes Further organizations want oversight over those changes to ensure the accuracy of the information that the content adheres to corporate guidelines etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 5 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET manages the lifecycle of content from creation through approval and publication It helps your organization set up a process for overseeing changes to a Web site indicate content s status within that lifecycle and inform the next approver that it is their turn to review the content Editing Content Finding Content Much of your work involves editing existing content or creating new content Ektron CMS400 NET provides three methods for finding content to be updated You can use whichever method is easiest e Navigate through your Web site to the content you want to edit e Find the content through the Workarea which resembles Windows Explorer and lets you find content by navigating through a folder tree See A so gt The Workarea and Smart Desktop on page 15 e Use the Search button 4 which appears on many screens
227. evision 5 455 Editing Images Increases an image s magnification You can press this command several times to continue to increase magnification See Also Zoom Out on page 456 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 448 Zoom Out ey Standard Toolbar Button Decrease an image s magnification You can press this command several times to continue to decrease magnification See Also Zoom In on page 455 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 448 specifying Color Depth To specify an image s color depth that is the number of colors available to an image specify a bit depth The color depth is derived from the bit depth Here are the bit depth values Bit depth Color depth 2 colors 256 colors 16M colors Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 456 Introduction to Tables Sometimes the information on your Web page looks better when displayed on a table Here is an example Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Cubs Black Hawks This section explains e Creating a Table on page 458 e Deleting a Table on page 459 e Inserting a Table within a Table on page 460 See Also Table Dialog Boxes and Menus on page 461 Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 468 Working with Table Cells on page 483 and Section 508 Tables on page 518 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 457 Introduction to Tables Creating a Table To create a table click th
228. evision 5 525 Inserting Comments within Content Other users can add comments to your comments This feature is know as Content Collaboration Similar to other word processing programs comments can be added updated and tracked to audit changes being made This section explains the content collaboration feature WARNING Do not confuse these comments which are inserted within the content with history comments which are inserted outside the content and used to indicate what changed during an editing session Adding Comments to Content To add a comment to content follow these steps 1 Create new content or edit existing content See Also Adding Content on page 46 2 Inthe editor place the cursor where you want to insert the comment On the editor toolbar click the Insert Comment button The Ektron CMS Comment window opens Insert a comment Use the toolbar to format the text if desired Click the Insert button The comment is saved Click the Close button The comment window closes and a comment icon is placed where the comment was added to the content wo Ca fe E E ole oe ES H m k E Icome to RC internation 2 AC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC ra qas become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing O o oe p o w ill tH Hl hll il Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 526 Inserting Comments within Content Each comment app
229. ew content difference 95 button floating toolbar 5 screen first use 101 view date toolbar button 36 view difference toolbar button 37 view history button floating toolbar 5 toolbar button 37 view published toolbar button 37 view staged toolbar button 37 viewing HTML 511 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 vi W WeblmageFX assigning new name to image 427 choosing image 425 commands blur 431 brightness 432 choose color 433 choose font 434 contrast 436 copy 437 create new 437 crop 437 delete 438 dimensions 438 exit 439 exit without save 440 freehand 440 horizontal flip 441 image info 441 line 442 open 443 oval 444 paste as new image 445 pointer selection 445 polygon 446 rectangle 447 redo 447 rotate 448 save 449 save as 450 select 451 sharpen 451 text 452 twain acquire 453 twain source 454 undo 454 vertical flip 455 zoom in 455 zoom out 456 introduction 425 menu commands 427 saving image 427 specifying color depth 456 toolbar buttons 427 whole word match 401 width table setting by percentage 471 setting by pixels 473 width work page customizing for user 361 word wrap 498 Word Microsoft editing in 407 editing XML documents 409 inserting from 514 uploading image from 408 work offline option 239 work offline document management feature 234 239 work page size customizing for user 360 workarea accessing 15 button floating toolbar 5 definition 15 toolbar bu
230. fferent path then press Next Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 215 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer InstallShield Wizard CHS Site Location http localhost ChS 400E sample hetals hea 3 You are prompted to select a setup type Choose Complete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 216 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Select the setup type to install Please select a setup type All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space Select which program features you want installed Recommended for advanced users InstallShield Back Cancel 4 The installation copies the needed files to the specified folder and displays a final screen Click Finish Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 217 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer InstallShield Wizard e pee InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successtully installed Ektron Explorer Click Finish to esit the wizard Back Eancel Displaying Ektron Explorer After you install Ektron Explorer you can use it from both Windows Explorer and Internet Explorer To use it follow these steps 1 Open Windows Explorer or Internet Explorer 2 From the menu across the top of the screen select View gt Explorer Bar gt Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User
231. fine Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Assigning Border Size You can also adjust the size of a table border Size is measured in pixels one pixel 15 pixel table border table border To assign a border size to your table enter a number of pixels into the Border Size field on the Insert Table dialog box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 481 Manipulating Your Table s Format Border Color EEren Border Size If you set a table s border size to zero 0 but wish to view the table s boundary lines while you are editing it select the table and click the border button E Boundary lines will appear while you are editing but disappear when a user views the page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 482 Working with Table Cells NOTE Along with functions for managing tables described in Introduction to Tables on page 457 and Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 468 eWebEditPro XML also lets you perform actions on individual cells within a table You can perform the following actions on individual table cells e Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 483 e Inserting a Cell on page 484 e Deleting a Cell on page 485 e Settin
232. for Deletion Content Content that is marked for deletion has been requested to be removed from the Web site by a user When content is marked for deletion it goes through the approval chain like content that is submitted for publishing When the content completes the approval chain it is deleted from the Web site See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 89 The table below describes the toolbar buttons eee re e T Delete Approve the deletion request Note If you are the last user in the approval chain the content is deleted when you click this Decline Refuse the deletion request This sends the content back into a checked in status Back Go to previous window a m ee Pending Start Date Content Content that is pending a Go Live date has been approved but its scheduled go live date and time have not occurred yet You cannot perform any action on content with a pending start date Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 546 Appendix A Content Statuses Staged Content A staged version of content is one that is not published It can be content that is checked in or content that is approved with a pending a start date Staging lets you make changes to content while keeping it from the Web site until you are ready to publish it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 547 Index 508 compliance 515 A about eWebEditPro box 381 absolute positioning of object
233. fore you delete it The deleted area is not saved for later pasting In contrast if you use the Cut command you can later paste the cut area Dimensions Standard Toolbar Button Description Lest you change an image s width and or height which are defined in pixels Maintaining Aspect Ratio Use this check box to change an image s size while maintaining its aspect ratio Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 438 Editing Images SYY E egi I EES M Maintain Aspect Ratio l Irr mh 1 I ri el Onn Aspect ratio is the ratio of an image s width to height For example if a graphic has an aspect ratio of 2 1 its width is twice as large as its height If you check the Maintain Aspect Ratio box just specify a new width the height is calculated automatically Dialog Box w Dimensions OF x Dimensions Mer Width Nem Height P Maintain Aspect Ratio Current width 216 Current Height pe men _ Exit Standard Toolbar Button pt Description Save the change in the WeblmageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML where the updated image appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 439 Editing Images Exit without Save Standard Toolbar Button hle Description Ignore changes made to the image in WeblmageFX Return to eWebEditPro XML Freehand Standard Toolbar Button A Description Lets you draw a line in any shape that you want similar to using a pen on paper To us
234. form calendar related activities To access the View Calendar screen follow these steps 1 Access the Modules folder from the lower left corner of the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 315 Working with Calendars 2 Click the Calendars folder m Modules a Collections HO Calendars 5 MemberShips 3 The Calendar Modules screen appears It lists all calendars in Ektron CMS400 NET Calendar modules Title ID Description Path Re International listing of events for RE International news y Calendar events Note Only system administrators can create a new calendar 4 Click a calendar 5 The View Calendar screen appears showing information about the calendar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 316 Working with Calendars View Calendar Intranet Company Calendar 31 View In J English U 3 Add In elect a Lange Title Intranet Company Calendar ID 3 Description Location Label Location Start Time Label Start End Time Label End Table Properties Display Weekends Forward Only 5 Show only events that tall after the viewing day Event Types Event Type Label Bob s Event Type Event Types Available Event Types Required Instructions Ctrl Click to Show Event Type Show All Label Show All Long Description None Folder Name Content Folder Path Y The following table explains the fields on the View Calenda
235. formation resides Select the information to be copied Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Go to eWebEditPro XML Press lt Cirl gt lt V gt to paste the selected information oR OD Note that you can only copy content not background information that generates content So for example you can copy the values in a spreadsheet but not the formulas used to generate those values Also copying dynamic fields from Microsoft WORD would retrieve the current value of the fields but not the variables that generate those values Its a good idea to experiment with copying from different sources to test the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 397 Finding and Replacing Text To find and optionally replace text on your Web page click the Replace button When you do the Find and Replace dialog box appears Find And Replace FiodWhet ff Replace With o P Match whole word only Replace Match case Replace All Direction C Up Down Cancel You can use this dialog box to simply find text or to find text and replace it with other text Each option is explained below NOTE You can also use this dialog to delete text that appears repeatedly To do so follow the directions in Finding and Replacing Text on page 398 and enter nothing in the Replace With field Finding Text 1 Inthe Find What field type the text that you want to find in the content 2 Set dialog box options see Addi
236. formation screen appears The following table explains fields you can edit ic Us Password If desired enter a new password into this field If you change your password you do not need to log out then log back in However the next time you log in you must use the new password Confirm Pwd Confirm your new password by retyping it into this field User Language Select a language in which to view Ektron CMS400 NET Click the black down arrow on the right circled below to see a list of choices E Mail Address Ap i Default ibiti English SY ne W Disable E M Email Address Enter a new valid email address Notification email is sent to this address unless the Disable E mail Notification field is checked To understand how email notification operates within the content workflow see Example of an Approval Chain on page 89 Also this address identifies the user sending Instant email See Also Sending Instant Email on page 28 Disable Email Check this box if you do not want to receive notification Notification email Work Page Size Your system administrator may let you change the work page values If he does the following fields are editable Otherwise you can only view the fields Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 360 Updating Your User Profile a If desired change the width of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The width in pixels must be between 400 and 2400 This f
237. from the Workarea To access the history from the Workarea follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Content page for the content whose history you want to view 2 Click the View History button Ta Accessing the Content History from a Web page To access the history for content from a Web page follow these steps Sign in 2 Browse to the content whose history you want to view 3 Click the View History button E 4 The Content History window opens Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 103 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content The Content History Window _ Content DAS T ias Yiew Content History Yersion Published Date ee Last User To Edit Comment Title 21 of lofAOOS 12 16 22 PM Intranet Administrator Application 2 0 of 15 2005 12 16 22 PM Intranet Administrator Application i i arla 005 14 14 32 PM Intranet Administrator Application 1 0 015 2005 12 14 32 PM Intranet Administrator Application The View Content History window lists every version of the content available in Ektron CMS400 NET The window displays the following information for each version e version number See Also The Content Version Number on page 104 e agreen circle appears next to any version that was published On dates without a green circle the content was checked in but not published e date and time when a version was checked in or published e title of content e last user who edited cont
238. ft Right Edit Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 383 Toolbar Buttons The vertical scroll bar appears on the left side of the window Right Left Edit Form Elements Toolbar See Inserting Form Fields on page 147 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 384 Customizing Your Toolbar The eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more menus Each menu has one or more buttons You can recognize the beginning of a menu by the double vertical bars circled in the illustration BERAR g ooye AAA aal mip als IE Apply Style gt Normal gt Times New Roman 3 12 pt A aa BR i This sample toolbar has four menus Your Webmaster determines e which menus are available to you e which buttons appear on each menu and the sequence in which they appear initially e whether or not you are authorized to customize your toolbar If you are not authorized your edits are not saved when you leave the eWebEditPro XML screen If you are authorized to customize your toolbar there are several ways to do so e Removing Or Adding Menus on page 386 e Removing or Adding Menu Items on page 386 e Restoring Toolbars on page 389 e Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar on page 389 e Creating a New Menu on page 389 e Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar on page 391 e Changing the Menu s Orientation on page 391 Each procedure is explained below Ektron CMS400
239. g a Cell s Border Color on page 486 e Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 487 e Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 489 e Spanning Rows or Columns on page 491 e Aligning Text Within a Cell on page 493 e Splitting a Cell on page 496 e Merging Two Cells on page 497 e Word Wrap on page 498 e Setting Cell Padding and Spacing on page 499 HTML does not allow you to adjust the width of a cell s border You can also select several cells or a row of cells and change them as described above However you cannot select and change a column of cells Specifying the Width of a Cell As described in Specifying Table Width on page 470 there are several ways to set the width of a table Within a table you can also specify the width of an individual cell Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 483 Working with Table Cells When you set a cell width there is no guarantee that the cell will occupy that width when displayed in a browser This is because the cell is part of a column and changes to other cells in the column can affect the cell whose width you set Setting cell width only guarantees that the cell will not be ess than the width you specify lf you want to ensure that a cell s size does not change set all cells in a column to that width To specify a cell s width follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell whose width you want to set Rig
240. g box appears Toolbar Customization View As Paragraph Format Format Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Text Direction 5 Click New A new menu appears on the left side of the window above the existing menus The default name of the new menu is Custom 0 Custom 0 7 To rename the menu place the cursor in the field that displays the new menu and enter the new name Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 390 Customizing Your Toolbar NOTE If you click outside the toolbar name field you cannot later change the menu s name 8 To have the menu appear on your toolbar click in the small box to the left of the menu name 9 Click the Commands tab 10 Add buttons to the menu following the procedure described in Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box on page 388 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar You can move a menu from the toolbar to anywhere else on the screen even if eWebEditPro XML does not occupy the entire screen You can also change the orientation of a menu that is not on the toolbar from a horizontal to vertical To move a menu follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the a DE E gA beginning of the menu Click the mouse Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere on the screen 4 After you place the menu where you want it rele
241. gin managing Web site content NOTE This documentation uses the Ektron CMS400 NET sample Web site to demonstrate the product Logging into the Sample Web Site To access the Ektron CMS400 NET sample site follow these steps 1 In your Web browser navigate to the URL of your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Your system administrator provides this Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 9 Logging In and Out 2 Click the Login button on the screen Login 3 The Login dialog box appears 4 Ektron CMS Login Microsoft o Enter your username and password User 4 Enter your username and password If you are using one of Ektron s sample sites you can use any of three standard users that demonstrate Ektron s flexible user permissions model The table below lists the username and password needed to log in as each user type as well as the permissions assigned to each user Standard user jedit jedit Basic for example add edit content manage library files etc Membership user Read only permission to private content 5 Click the Login button 6 The Web page appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 10 Logging In and Out You can navigate around your Web site as you could before signing in But now the content is surrounded by a colored box when you move the cursor over it illustrated below Edit Content in Folder Content Title cms Develop
242. gital camera that supports the Twain standard You select the source using Twain Source and do a quick acquire from that source using Twain Acquire Limitations e You can only acquire one page ata time e Few digital cameras support twain Usually digital cameras resemble a hard drive or use proprietary software to extract images Ektron does not support an interface to proprietary software e Not all scanners support the twain standard Twain Source Standard Toolbar Button aie Description Lest you select a source for acquiring an image such as a scanner or digital camera See Also Twain Acquire on page 453 Undo Standard Toolbar Button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 454 Editing Images Description Reverses the most recent commands within the current editing session You can undo several commands at once by pressing the undo command repeatedly The first time you press the command the most recently completed command is undone The next time the second most recently completed command is undone etc See Also Redo on page 447 Vertical Flip Standard Toolbar Button tw Description Flips an image vertically top to bottom Click this command again to reverse the image vertically bottom to top A Image before vertical flip Image after vertical flip Zoom In Standard Toolbar Button R Description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 R
243. gits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn Social Security US required Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn A response is required Postal Code Canada ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric Postal Code Canada ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric A required response is required Social Insurance Number A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn Canada Social Insurance Number A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn A response is Canada Required required Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 156 Working with HTML Forms Option Characteristics of Valid Response Telephone number US and A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn Canada The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers Telephone number US and A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn Canada required The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers A response is required Inserting a Password Field Use a password field when you want the user to enter a password A password is like a text field but the user s entry appears as dots instead of characters This prevents an onlooker from seeing the password A user s password entry cannot exceed 18 characters To insert a password field follow these steps 1 Place a plain text field lab onto th
244. grammar with spelling aa Show readability statistics oo o settings ee Recheck Document Specifically you can set the spell check feature to check or ignore e words in UPPERCASE for example XYLOGIC e words with numbers for example mp3 e Internet and file addresses for example http www ektron com As an example if you check the box to the left of Ignore Words in UPPERCASE eWebEditPro XML s spell check does not consider words in all uppercase characters You also use the custom dictionary section of the screen to identify custom dictionaries for the spell check to reference The spell check feature does not use the other fields on this screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 406 Editing in Microsoft Word NOTE Edit in ord lf your computer has Microsoft Word 2000 or greater you can edit content within Word You may prefer to do this because of familiarity with Word s user interface and to use additional functionality available in Word Some Word formatting may not be compatible with HTML and as a result not be transferred to eWebEditPro XML To edit with Word follow these steps 1 Open eWebEditPro XML Press the Word toolbar button ih The following dialog may appear warning you that some Word formatting may not be transferred back to eWebEditPro XML Press Yes if you still want to edit in Word when retuming the document to the editor 2 You are
245. h Id P Ctrl I Make the text italic Italic Strikethrough Apply strikethrough to selected text For an example Here4s semetodt ne a Make selected text appear smaller and fal Subscript a below text line Remove all formatting from selected text Make selected text appear smaller and above text line Begin the line on which the cursor rests with a number If the line above this line IS not numbered assign this line 1 Number numbered assign a number one more than the line above Begin the line on which the cursor rests or all selected lines with a bullet Bullet Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 380 Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Toolbar Buttons For more information see Increase or decrease the current line s distance from the left margin Align paragraph so that it is arranged e evenly on the left side uneven on the right e in the center of each line evenly on the right side uneven on the left evenly on right and left side Display a dialog box that shows your version of eWebEditPro XML and your license keys Gat Open File Open local file and copy it into CMS content While you can open any file type Ektron CMS400 NET s editor only works with htm and xml files When you open a file into a content block the new file replaces any content currently in the block About eWebEditPro XML Save CMS con
246. hat folder plus all of its subfolders e include words that partially match the search string for example if you enter the word the the search returns theater e find content that includes all words you enter any of the words or just the exact phrase The options are explained in Specifying Match Criteria on page 58 Inserting External Files into Ektron CMS400 NET If you installed the Document Management functionality with Ektron CMS400 NET you can add files using the drag and drop technique common in Windows You can quickly and easily insert allowed file types into Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Using the Document Management Functionality on page 225 and Importing Files via Drag and Drop on page 247 The user performing the drag and drop must have permission to add files to the selected folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 223 Using Ektron Explorer To drag and drop external files into Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps Open Ektron Explorer Resize it to half of the screen 3 Open Windows Explorer and resize it to the other half of the screen 4 From Windows Explorer navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to insert into Ektron CMS400 NET 5 From Windows Explorer select the files you want to copy to Ektron CMS400 NET 6 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the files to the desired Ektron Explorer folder in the left frame Ba E e L d l a Y PeT
247. hat you want to customize Change the value of the List field to Custom All of the predefined choices appear in the Item List box To e add new items use the Item Value and Text fields gt m P S e delete an existing list item select it and click Remove e rearrange the list use the Move Up and Move Down buttons e edita list item select it and press the Change button Inserting a Calendar Field To insert a field that lets a site visitor select a date use a Calendar Field To do that follow these steps 1 Place a Calendar field Fg onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 146 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 168 Working with HTML Forms Calendar Field Name Tool Tips Default value E Validation Validation Error Message SSS Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters 1 amp t lt gt 2 into this field Tool Tips Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this value field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices a
248. he Forms Folder on page 139 2 Click the Delete Form button F 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed Click OK Form Module Toolbar Several toolbar buttons and tabs help you work with forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 185 Working with HTML Forms To learn about toolbar buttons available when creating or editing a form see Inserting Form Fields on page 147 Button or Description More Information Tab Cy Edit Content Edit the form s content which Editing a Form s contains the form fields Content on page 184 View Staged Click View Staged button to view Published Content content that has not yet been published Click View Published button to view content that is live on the Web site Se View History View and possibly restore older Content History on versions of a content block page 594 View Difference Compare two versions of content Comparing Versions of Content on page 96 Edit Form Properties Edit Form properties not available Viewing and Editing a via the Edit Content button Form s Properties on page 178 Delete Form Delete a form Deleting a Form on page 185 Check Links Check for other content that contains Link Checking on a link to this form page 595 S e View task information Add Form Add a new form Creating a New Form on page 141 ial Export Report Download form data to a Microsoft Exporting Form Reports Excel spreadsh
249. he main task module folder several view screens display all tasks filtered by specified categories After viewing tasks in any category most screens let you perform an action on the tasks the actions are included in the table below For example you can change a tasks state to another state To select all tasks ona screen click the check box in the header row illustrated below Fi Title CID State Prion Prep to Move Downstairs On Hold Low Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen Tasks All tasks assigned to you that are in one Click on task to view it of the following states Add a task e not started active Sort tasks by Task Type awaiting data Sort tasks by column on hold reopened pending Assigned To Me All open tasks assigned to you Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Assigned By Me All open tasks you assigned to yourself or Glick on task to view it others e Sort tasks by Task Type e Sort tasks by column Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 348 Managing Tasks ic Displays these tasks Created by Me All open tasks you created Assigned to User All open tasks assigned to a user you select Not Started All whose state is Not Started All whose state is Active Awaiting Data All whose state is Awaiting Data Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Action you can perform from view screen C
250. hecked out content 120 content pending start date 123 content to expire 125 expired content 125 new content 121 refresh reminder 124 submitted content 122 restoring previous version 102 scheduling 66 searching for within site 54 start date setting 66 statuses 540 approved 540 submitted definition 544 summary see summary to expire report 125 workflow reports see reports content area expanding 44 content block see also content add button 34 adding 46 creating 46 definition 1 deleting 51 several at once 35 editing 49 overview 6 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 finding 6 lifecycle 7 properties 43 translating 50 viewing 40 contrast WeblmageFX command 436 copy information from other applications 397 toolbar and menu option 376 WebImageFX command 437 copyright character inserting 378 create new WebIlmageFX command 437 creating document document manage ment feature 241 Office document document man agement functionality 229 crop WeblmageFX command 437 customizing toolbar 385 cut toolbar and menu option 376 D decline content from approval report 118 from publishing 88 one content block 86 several content blocks 88 delete button floating toolbar 5 content toolbar button 35 folder toolbar button 35 toolbar button 35 WebImageFX command 438 deleting cell 485 folders 65 table 459 Detect All field eWebDiff 99 difference content view toolbar button 5 dimensions WeblmageFX co
251. hile adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes Choose a status for the task Your choices are Not Started In Progress Completed Waiting on Someone else Deferred If the task is not linked to content you can assign it to any state However if you later link the task to content via the Content link above the state switches to Not Started The state appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by state Start Date Using the calendar button choose a start date for the task The start date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 339 Managing Tasks eS Due Date Using the calendar button choose the date by which the task needs to be completed The due date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by due date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Contro
252. hile others are squares If the box is a circle you can only choose one option If it is a square you can choose as many as you want The search then displays all library items that meet the search criteria on the search results screen See Displaying Search Results on page 194 Displaying Search Results Search results appear in this order e images e files e hyperlinks e quicklinks e form links Result Display Options At the top of the library search screen a pull down list lets you choose the how to display the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 194 Library Folder Search Library Folder Mixed Tea F Ceaarch ntinns View Description option If the item is an image display the Title Teaser image in the left column If not I ANM ON DEMAND ALIM on Demand Conference and Exhibition logo display its title EN To the right Eas AO net Ektron CMS400 Net logo large size display the item s ae Description Note Mixed search results require the Internet Explorer browser version 6 or greater Display item s title in the left column Title Type Folder Name To the right ATM images CMS400Example uploadedimages alim 2 g display the file CMS400 Logo images CMS400Example uploadedImages cms400 type and folder Code3 images CMS400Example fuploadediImages Intranett name CRSM images CMS400Example uploadedimages Intranett Gilbane Images CMS
253. hitespace characters are treated as a single separation sequence That is multiple whitespace characters are ignored Detect All Blank whitespace characters are treated as any other character Other Options Ignore Case Determines whether comparison is case sensitive For example if you check this box the strings Bob and BOB are not highlighted because their only difference is the case of the characters Ignore Format Determines whether comparison ignores Attributes changes in text formatting attributes HTML Visual Analysis only After updating setup information click OK to save changes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 99 Comparing Versions of Content Content Area The content area displays the content comparison cms Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer Welcome to RC international Re s ie is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve EC racing In three Re ational has become one of the leading manufactures of EC racing and flying vehicles Cur dedicatio sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RO community We will continue strivit improve our attordable products and hope you wil become an RC international member The following table describes the change indicators Plain black text Trinitys new pipe and Unchanged Yellow highlighted text Our dedication tothe Added View Tabs When viewing content in the V
254. how El 4 Update the fields using the table described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 324 as a reference 5 Click the Save button I Editing Recurring Events After a recurring series of events is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location hyperlink and event type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 332 Working with Calendars NOTE You cannot edit event dates or times To change those delete and re enter the series of events To edit a recurring series of events follow the steps in Editing a Single Event on page 331 The only difference is the Update all recurring events associated with this event box To apply the edits to only the instance of the event that you selected uncheck the box To apply the changes to all instances check the box Deleting Calendar Events The section explains how to delete a single event or a recurring series of events NOTE You can only delete a calendar event if you have add edit or delete permission for the content folder to which the calendar is assigned Deleting a Single Occurrence Calendar Event You can easily delete calendar events that are no longer needed or do not belong to the calendar they were added to To delete a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 324
255. ht click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu Te Sy z The Cell Properties dialog box appears Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Layout f Not Specified f Percent fa herd airan C Pisels 6 In the layout section of the dialog box enter the cell width at the Width field You can enter the width in pixels or percentage These choices are explained in Specifying Table Width on page 470 7 Click OK Inserting a Cell To insert a cell follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 484 Working with Table Cells 1 Move the cursor to the right of where you want the new cell to appear 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Cell from the menu The new cell appears to the left of the cell in which the cursor resides when you click Insert Cell The cursor cell and all cells to its right shift right to make room for the new cell In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked Insert Cell Before o pee e Co E E Deleting a Cell To delete one or more cells follow these steps Move the cursor to the first cell you want to delete 2 To delete only that cell proceed to the next step To delete several contiguous cells select them Contiguous cells can cross rows 3 Right click the mouse 4 Click Delete Cells from the menu Any cells to the right of the deleted cells shift l
256. ield accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 If desired you can change the height of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The height in pixels must be between 300 and 1800 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 Display button text in Check this box if you want any button s caption text to the title bar appear in the screen title s bar whenever a user moves the mouse over the button Note the word Update describing the button in the illustration below If you do not check this box the screen s title remains in the title bar when the user moves the mouse over the button as illustrated below Edit User jedit Landing Page after If you want one page in your Web site to appear after login sign in enter the URL to that page You might select a page that leads to a group of pages that you maintain If you don t know the URL navigate to the page go to the browser address bar and select the text following the directory in which Ektron CMS400 NET resides For example if the browser address bar says http www ektron com customers aspx id 945 you would enter customers aspx id 945 here Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 361 Updating Your User Profile ed Pesernton Set smart desktop as If you want the Smart Desktop to appear as soon as you the s
257. iew Content Difference feature there are three view modes explained below Compares published version of content to staged version Published Displays currently published version Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 100 Comparing Versions of Content Displays the staged version of content See Also Staged Content on page 530 To switch between views click the corresponding View tab First Use of the View Content Difference Feature The first time the View Content Difference screen is used on a client machine a simple installation program is performed Click YES when the following screen appears Security Warning Do you want to install and run Ektron ew ebDit signed on 1 9 2004 2 40 PM and distributed by Ektron Ine Publisher authenticity vented by VenSign Class 3 Code Signing 2001 CA Caution Ektron Inc asserts that this content is safe You should only installyview this content if you trust Ektron Ine to make that assertion More Info When the installation program completes close and reopen the View Content Difference feature Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 101 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Past versions of published content are available unless your system administrator purged them Your ability to view a content item s history is determined by your user privileges After vie
258. iewing a Collection on page 258 Click the Reorder button 4 The Reorder Collection screen appears Reorder Collection Support Packages First Cnternal Support Policies RC International Support support Request Form 4 gt 5 Click the content whose order you want to change 6 Click the up or down arrow to move the content in either direction 7 Repeat steps five and six until you set the desired order 8 Click the Update button i Editing Collection Information To edit information about a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 256 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 258 3 Click the collection whose information you want to change Change any of the field values For documentation of the fields see Complete the screen using the following table on page 262 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 269 Working with Collections Deleting a Collection When you no longer want a collection you can delete it To delete a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 256 2
259. ight border thickness and or alignment and later want to restore all of those settings to their original values click the Reset button absmiddle Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 420 Inserting Images Layout Width 20 Height 20 Border Thickness Alignment Mot set Reset ii Note that you cannot selectively restore some settings the Reset button automatically restores all of them Adding Space around the Picture On the Picture Properties dialog box you can use the Spacing fields Horizontal and Vertical to add space around the picture You enter a number of pixels to determine spacing value Spacing Horizontal 0 Vertical T Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 421 Inserting Images The following graphic illustrates the effect of adding spacing to a picture This image has no vertical or horizontal space BS BS This image has 20 pels of vertical space no horizontal space This mage has 20 pzels of horizontal space no vertical space BS ES This image has 20 pzels of vertical space and 20 prels of horizontal space Editing the Picture s Title The title that you entered in the Insert Media Item dialog box defaults into the Title field of the Media Selection dialog box You can edit the title in this field if desired NOTE The title is also the alt text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the W
260. in the Workarea Reorder Changes the sequence of links in a collection See Also Working with Collections on page 256 Restore Restores previously published content See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 103 Save Saves content that was modified Search Searches content and library folder screens See Also Searching the Library on page 194 Show Calendar Displays the calendar in the Workarea Submit Saves and submits content to next approver in the approval chain Update Changes are saved and content is updated View Date View all calendar events for a selected day Hebel l I Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 36 Working with Folders and Content mome Peseneton View Difference Opens the View Content Difference feature See Also Comparing Versions of Content on page 96 View History View history of selected content See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 103 View Published Displays currently published version of content View Staged Displays staged content See Also Staged Content on page 530 Selects the language of the content being displayed English US Select language Select the type of files to work with All Types kai yp All Types HTML Content Office Documents Managed Files Select file type Viewing a Folder To view any folder under the content folder follow these steps 1 Acc
261. ing Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support the content s language appears next to the title The language is derived from the collection s language and cannot be changed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 266 Working with Collections Edit Content in Folder Press Releases Title CASER Us amp Apply Style Normal 2010 pt A Oa TUA i 52 BBB E44 ory Aeara E A 2 nbsp TM lB Be amp Ektron Announces Winner of All Stars Customer Competition Ji tare eaenmertiticn eantitias Fhe ean inmost sano attests inosine tations 9 Create the content ae AEC W ll T pi We 1a TT al MT W Ill ll NOTE Refer to Adding Content on page 46 for additional information about creating new content 10 Click a workflow option in the Add Content screen 11 The Add Content screen closes and the new content link appears in the list of links available to the collection 12 Check off the content you created and other content D Syndication M Contact Ektron 1 Login Information 2 in New Content Block 1 13 Click the Add button FP to add the content to the collection Editing Content in a Collection After a collection is created you can add or remove links to and from it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 267 Working with Collections Adding Content to the Collection For information ab
262. ing dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 161 Working with HTML Forms Choices Field Name Tool Tips Field J List Custom Allow selection Ae A f Onl one f Vertical List C More than one C Horizontal List A selection is required List Box ltem List Item Value Text change Check item to be selected by default Mave up Mave Divi crcl Fields on the Choices Dialog i Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 162 Working with HTML Forms Field Description Tool Tips Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field List Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item and Item List fields to do this Note If after seeing the following predefined choices you want to customize the choices available to site visitors return to this field replace the value with Custom then define the ranges you want in the Item field Age Ranges Use the predefined choices for age ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Numeric Ranges Use the predefined choices for numeric ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Gender Use the predefined choices for gender You can see the values on the screen
263. ion 5 307 Working with Menus 3 Click the delete icon to the right of the submenu Surrounded in red below View Menu my new menu Gp S2elfUS Enos Us ade Ssubmenu for my new menu amp B T add a submenu to the submenu B B T JIMy new submenu amp a ml hore Info Deleting a Menu Item Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can remove a menu item from a menu via e its content folder e its menu folder Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder You can delete any menu item by clicking the accompanying Delete icon mj on the View menu screen Alternatively you can follow these steps The procedure below is quicker if you are deleting several or all items at once 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 301 Click the menu you want to delete The View Menu screen for that menu is displayed Click the Remove button 1 The Delete Menu Item screen opens o 2 E wW rP Click the check box next to the menu item you want to delete You can click Select All to choose all menu items Click Clear All to unselect all menu items 7 Click the Delete button 1 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 308 Working with Menus Removing a Menu Item via Menus Module You can delete any menu item by clicking the accompanying Delete icon on the View menu screen Alternatively you can follow these steps The proc
264. ion as the file being replaced Before You Overwrite an Image When overwriting an image the new image uses the same size dimensions and file extension as the older image Be sure that the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 201 Library Folder two images have the same file extension and size or make the adjustments at each occurrence of the image Before You Overwrite a File Remember all links that point to the overwritten file now point to the new file Overwriting Library Assets To overwrite a library file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View File screen for the file you want to overwrite as described in Viewing Files on page 198 2 Click the Overwrite button The Overwrite File screen appears Overwrite Library Item in Folder Content files Title Filename Ektron Partners and Customers CMS400ExamplefuploadedFiles ektron partners customers ro Please select a replacement file Current library item Preview Ektron Partners and Customers Description t Ba eo cs 3 12 pt A W BZA Ye 4 Click the Browse button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 202 Library Folder A window lets you navigate to the new file Click the file then click the Open button You return to the Overwrite File screen with the path to the new file in the Filename field Filename CMS300Sample uploadedFiles Punctuation Introducing Lis C Tech Fubs de
265. ision 5 213 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer x pp plore Search Search by any or all of the criteria below E Content Calendar 9 For Example C Press Releases 9 Purchase_Orders lt nm I All or part of the title Containing the word or phrase r m Iama IMIM IMMM J J J Look ir TAR oo Press Releases l Hore advanced options Search all subfolders Match partial words All the words Any of the words C Exact phrase For more information see Searching for CMS Content on page 221 Installing Ektron Explorer Your system administrator provides a file for installing Ektron Explorer When you have the file click it and follow these steps to install it NOTE During the installation you are asked to identify the folder that stores your Ektron CMS400 NET If you don t know ask your system administrator for this information before beginning 1 A welcome screen appears Click Next Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 214 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer InstallShield Wizard _ xj Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Ektron Explorer The InstallShield Wizard will install Ektron Explorer on your computer To continue click Next Cancel 2 You are prompted to enter the location of Ektron CMS400 NET on your computer The default folder appears Press Next if that is correct or enter a di
266. ist below the Days field After selecting a number of days click the view icon j to see all content that will expire within that time frame site Update Activity Report The Site Activity Report provides a snapshot of the freshness of the content on your Web site Specifically it lists e how many content items were created or updated within a date range you select broken down by folder e how many content items were not created or updated during that time e the percentage of stale content percentage of content items that were not created or updated during that time Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 127 Content Workflow Reports A sample report appears below Content Reports Site Update Activity Report In Folder Content jew English U S All Types w inanan Start Date Wednesday August 10 2005 3 20 PM End Date Tuesday November 22 2005 3 20 PM Ee Select Content Folder Report Display Include Sub Folders set Result Foldername Updated Count Non Updated Count Percent of Stale C Content B 5 46 4627 Calendar 0 0 0 Form Example T 1 100 Press Releases 0 5 100 Purchase Orders O 2 100 Books 0 5 100 Dynamic Content In Content 0 0 0 Selecting Information to Appear on the Report To choose which content items will appear on the report follow these steps 1 By default only content in the default language will appear on the report To change the language use
267. it etc He then clicks the content he wants to approve This window is similar to the previous approver s but includes a Publish button at the top of the screen The EditorInChief has a Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 93 Approving Declining Content publish button instead of a submit button because he is the last approver in the approval chain When he approves the content it is published to the Web site Like the Sports editor the EditorInChief has the following options De a Publish the content 1 Sends an email to the creator notifying him her Decline that content was declined 2 Removes content from the approval chain Invokes the editor The approver changes the content After reviewing the content the EditorInChief decides it is great and publishes it At this point the content becomes live on the Web site and the approval chain is complete The user who created the content receives an email notifying him that it was published amp Content changes have been made Fron Webmaster your company com Dake Friday May 03 2002 4 22 PM To Sports Writengiyourcompany com Subject Content changes have been made The changes to the content Red Sox Win World Senes have been approved The content changes went live immediately Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 94 Comparing Versions of Content Comparing Versions of Content The View Content Differ
268. ith the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 283 Adding a Menu via the Menus Module 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus 2 Click the Add Menu button cp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 282 Working with Menus 3 The Add Menu screen appears Add Menu N fel all hh ae Pee Pe Title English fU 5 4 Advance Settings 4 To complete the fields on the Add Menu screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 279 With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 283 Adding a Menu Item Similar to being able to add edit view or delete a menu Ektron CMS400 NET also allows you to add edit view and delete a menu item to a menu See Also The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 275 Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder To add a menu item via a content folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder that contains the menu to which you want to add items Click the View Menus icon Click the menu that you want to add items to In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu See Also Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 309 5 The Add Menu screen opens displaying a list of items that can be added to the menu The following illustration explains the icons on the screen Ektron CMS400 N
269. iting Expired Content You may edit any content on the Expired Content report To do so follow these steps Click the content you want to view The View Content page is displayed Using the toolbar at the top of the page perform any action available Content to Expire Report The Content to Expire report lists all content whose end date will occur between today and a number of days that you specify For example if today is January 1 and you select 10 days the report lists all content whose end date is January 1 through January 10 After viewing the report you can click any content and proceed to the View Content screen for it From there you can edit information about it including its end date if desired Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 125 Content Workflow Reports Each item on the list contains the following information Column Description Title of content ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content End Date Date and time the content expired Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Selecting the Report s Date Range To select the report s date range you have two options Enter a number in the Days field Then click the View Reports button a Content Reports Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 126 Content Workflow Reports Select a number from the dropdown l
270. iv modifications to the Software by any person or entity other than Company In the event of a breach of warranty Customer s sole and exclusive remedy is repair of all or any portion of the Software If such remedy fails of its essential purpose Customer s sole remedy and Ektron s maximum liability shall be a refund of the paid purchase price for the defective Products only This limited warranty is only valid if Ektron receives written notice of breach of warranty within thirty days after the warranty period expires 5 Limitation of Warranties and Liability THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE SOLD AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES AS TO THE PERFORMANCE MERCHANTIBILITY DESIGN OR OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE NO WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS OFFERED EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 4 ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS AND IMPLIED ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED NEITHER COMPANY NOR ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR GOODWILL LOSS OF DATA OR USE OF DATA INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS NOR FOR ANY OTHER INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND UNDER OR ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT HOWEVER CAUSED WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY BREACH OR REPUDIATION OF CONTRACT TORT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF COMPANY OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS 6 Miscellaneous This License Agreement the License granted hereunder an
271. ks on page 208 Images on page 208 Quicklinks and Forms on page 210 Terms Used in this Chapter An image is any graphic file which can include illustrations and photos Common image file extensions are gif jpg tiff etc A file is type of computer file that can be launched from a browser such as Internet Explorer Examples include a Microsoft Word document and a PDF file A hyperlink is a commonly used or hard to remember Web address also known as a URL After you add hyperlinks to the library users can easily apply them to editor content So for example if the editor content is Contact Ektron the user can select the text click the library button select hyperlinks to find the Ektron hyperlink and apply that hyperlink to the text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 188 Library Folder Library Folder Content hyperlinks m La e ei hyperlinks Tithe ID Date modified Ektron Inc 23 O5 5ep 2002 05 46 PM Once the page is published a person reading it can click the text to jump to the Web address www ektron com e A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet Whenever content is created a quicklink is created for it e A formis a quicklink to HTML form content Whenever content is created a form link is automatically created for it Acc
272. ks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button a Save and check in content This button does not submit the E Check In content into the approval process but rather lets other users change it mj Save the content without submitting it into the approval process Save If a user clicks save and then closes the editor other users cannot edit the content This buttons appears if you are the next approver in the approval list Click it to decline the changes made to the content Note If content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task x Close the editor without saving changes Cancel Next click the Save and Submit or Publish button Eh The form only appears on your Web site after it is published After that the form may need to go through the approval process When that is complete add it to the site by assigning it to a page template See Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 170 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 149 Working with HTML Forms Form Validation You can apply validation rules while creating or editing the following field types e text e password e textarea e calendar Validation rules ensure that the form information entered by
273. ktron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 42 Working with Folders and Content Button or Description For more information see Tab val Add Task Attach a task to content Task Module Toolbar on page 354 Properties View and modify settings The Managing XML chapter of XML Configuration the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual Content Searchable Check this box if the content should be found when someone searches your Web site View View If you can view content in more language than one language select a language from the drop down list Add Add Lets you copy current content Translating Content to Another select select into a new item and translate it Language on page 50 language language to selected language Ei Properties The content properties screen contains information about the content Content Title The title assigned to the content Content ID The ID number assigned to the content The ID number is used to retrieve content from a database Content language The content s language Status The current status of the content See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 523 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 43 Working with Folders and Content See Last User to Edit The last user to edit this content Action on End Date What happens to the content when its end date and time are reached See Also Setting Archive Options on page
274. l Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Description Add additional information to describe the task The description appears on the View Task screen circled below View Task Task Tithe testing self assignment Assigned To f jedit Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Completed Due Date 23 Jun 2004 Start Date 11 Jun 2004 Description testing self assignment Comments Date Time added By Comments 5 Click the Save button fe 6 If email notification is enabled an email is sent to the user user group to which the task was assigned Selecting Content for the Task Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 340 Managing Tasks When you click Select Content from the Add Task screen the Select Content screen appears It shows only content in the selected language Select Content Please select content by navigating the folders below Path 4 m Human Resources D Marketing B Products 5B Support m Syndication C Contact Ektron Greeting C Home Page Content C Introducing the RC Redstar C new content You should only select a content folder for which you have permissions To select a piece of content to assign to the task follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content Click any folder to open it 2 Click the circle to the left of the content w Support B Syndication contact Ektron
275. lace to which the cursor jumps when the user clicks the source To continue with the above example a meeting date is the source and the meeting minutes are the bookmark To create a bookmark follow these steps 1 Select the bookmark text or image Click the Bookmark button Mig The Bookmark dialog box appears Enter the name of the bookmark The bookmark can include the following non alphabetic characters amp 946 Bookmark Bookmark name October_2000_minutes 4 Click Add 5 The editor screen returns The bookmark does not appear on the page Select the source text or image Click the Hyperlink button jg The Hyperlink dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field and click the bookmark you created in Step 3 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 502 Using Bookmarks mo z selectii OO OoOO O select link this pagel October 2000_rminutes this pagel Top 9 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 504 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 10 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 503 Using Bookmarks Changing the Destination Window While defining hypertext you can use the Target Frame field on the Hyperlink
276. le if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Move Up Move Down Remove Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox Check here if the first item on the list is not a valid value but instead text that prompts the user to respond to the field An example of such text for a list of states would be Select a state If you check this box and the user selects the first value on the list most likely by default an error message appears when he tries to save the screen Customizing a Standard List Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 167 Working with HTML Forms You can customize any list of predefined choices For example you can change the calendar years so they begin in 1995 and run through 2020 To do this follow these steps Choose the standard list t
277. lect a collection using the procedure described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 256 or Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page 257 2 The View Collection screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 258 Working with Collections View Collection Products English Us Title B RC Sportster B RC Cheetah B Rc Lilly B RC Redstar More info Title Products ID 1 Template fCMS300Sample products asp Last User To Edit Application Administrator Last Edit Date 2 9 lct 2002 09 36 PM Date Created 2 9 lct 2002 09 34 PM Description Products navigation Include Subfolders Title ID Language ID URL Link B_ RC Sportster 4 1033 CMS300Sample products asp vid 4 ERC Cheetah 5 1033 CMS300Sample fproducts asp7id 5 Rc Lilly 6 1033 CMS300Sample products asp7id 6 B_ RC Redstar 7 1033 CMS300Sample products asp id The screen displays each item in the collection To learn more about a collection click More Info When you do the lower section of the screen displays the following information about the collection title description ID number template Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 259 Working with Collections e last user who edited it e last date when it was edited e date it was created e whether or not the content folder s subfolders can be included e for each content item in the coll
278. left margin 537 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Increase Indent i Increase the current line s indent Button distance from the left margin Menu Format gt Increase Indent Keystroke None List Properties Button None Launches a dialog box that allows you to view and edit the properties of an Menu Format gt List Properties ordered or unordered list Keystroke None Highlight Color Adds a color Highlight to text Button Sb Menu Format gt Highlight Color Keystroke None Color Choose the color of the text Button Menu Format gt Color Keystroke None Superscript Button None Make text appear in Superscript Menu Format gt Superscript Keystroke None Subscript Button None Make text appear in subscript Menu Format gt Subscript Keystroke None Strikethrough Button None Make text appear with a Strikethrough Menu Format gt Strikethrough Keystroke None Remove Formatting Button None Removes the formatting of text and Menu Format gt Strikethrough returns it to the default color and style Keystroke Control Space Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 538 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Format Painter lt f Paint the formatting of selected text to a Button new piece of text Menu Format gt Format Painter Highlight the text that has the formatting you want to copy Next click the Format Keystroke Control C Pain
279. left mouse button and drag the cursor across the data you want to select Hold down the Shift key and the right arrow key until the desired data is selected Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 374 Toolbar Buttons e To select a single word place the cursor on the word and double click the mouse Selected text has different background and foreground colors as illustrated below Horizontal Sets the horizontal position of the entire Alignment able Border Color Sets the color of the table borders unless foe Tafani Ciofaric checked Applying Formatting Attributes to Text Several buttons apply formatting attributes to text such as bold and italics There are two ways to apply these attributes e Enter the text Then select the text and press the toolbar button The button is now in a pressed in condition and the text has the formatting attribute e Press the toolbar button Then begin typing the text As you type the formatting is applied To stop applying the formatting press the button again This action changes the button to a pressed out condition and terminates the formatting Table of Tooloar Buttons and Drop Down Lists The following table explains each toolbar button and drop down list NOTE _ The Data Designer feature also has a toolbar For information see Using the Data Designer on page 177 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 375
280. lendar Screen on page 315 e Viewing a Calendar on page 320 e Tips on Viewing a Calendar on page 322 e Adding a Calendar Event on page 324 e Understanding Event Types on page 327 e Viewing a Calendar Event on page 329 e Editing Calendar Events on page 331 e Deleting Calendar Events on page 333 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 313 Working with Calendars Understanding Calendars Before working with calendars you should understand the following points Ektron CMS400 NET supports several calendars at one time There might be a site wide calendar and other calendars for special interests such as an athletic events calendar Each date can display several events Only system administrators can create a calendar Each calendar is assigned to a content folder See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 Your ability to view add edit and remove calendar events is determined by your permissions for that folder The following illustrates the workflow of calendar tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 314 Working with Calendars View all calendars View information for one calendar view calendar jump to Add event View events linked web _ page ah Z Edit event Apply Accessing the View Calendar Screen The View Calendar screen collects general information about a calendar and provides toolbar buttons that let you per
281. lick on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Select any user and view all tasks assigned to that user To do so select new user from Assign to User drop down list and click Get Tasks Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column 349 Managing Tasks Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen On Hold All whose state is On Hold Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Pending All whose state is Pending Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Reopened All whose state is Reopened Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Completed All whose state is Completed Change to the following state Archive Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Sorting Tasks By Task Type On every View Task page you can sort tasks by the Task Type assigned to the task Y
282. lick the Add Form button E The New Form screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 141 Working with HTML Forms Metry Form peer a form from pain or mbeu with a blank form eni you ii be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Contact Information ch Contact information General Demographic Survey E General demographic survey Feedback Survey L amp Collect feedback from conference attendees 4 Choose the form that you want to begin with You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it You should select the sample that most closely matches the form you want to create After you create it you can add fields remove fields modify possible responses etc 5 Click the Next button Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the form within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the form 7 The next screen lets you assign a task to a user or user group If you do a task will be created every time a site visitor submits this form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 170 8 A new screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the form The choices are e Display a message See Composing the Pos
283. list of choices You can learn how to create such a screen by following the directions below The Form Toolbar Options Creating form content is similar to creating a standard content item See Adding HTML Content on page 578 The big difference is a special toolbar illustrated below to make it easier to insert form elements Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 145 Working with HTML Forms ia fab fab e e EE TA Select Button All tooloar options except the Select Button pull down also appear on a vertical toolbar to the left of the editor You can use whichever toolbar you prefer all options are the same Form Post back message Metadata Schedule Comment LBARMA Oo ye BAe are Normal 2010 pt A HI BsAA m fab fab e e EE Ta Select Button Place form elements here lv lab fc Z i a k Adding a Field to the Screen The major difference between the toolbars is how you add a field to the screen If you are using the horizontal toolbar place the cursor where you want field and click the toolbar button When using the vertical toolbar drag a button to the desired screen location Note that a context sensitive menu available by right clicking the mouse is also available to perform these actions You can right Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 146 Working with HTML Forms click the mouse then select Insert Field to display a context
284. ls while a column is a vertical series j Rows m Columns If you know how many rows and columns the table will be enter those numbers If you don t know the number of rows and columns you need when you create the table estimate how many you need You can add or remove rows and columns later Placement of Inserted Row or Column If you add a row it appears above the row in which the cursor was resting when you pressed Insert Row If you add a column it appears on the left side of the table Adding or Removing Rows and Columns To add or remove rows and columns after you create the table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell from which you want to add or delete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 469 Manipulating Your Table s Format 2 Right click the mouse A menu appears ort Eopy Paste Select All Insert Ao Insert Column Delete Rows Delete Columns Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HTML View as HTML 3 Click the appropriate action from the menu For example to add a row click Insert Row NOTE If you are working with nested tables and you add or remove a column then undo that action and redo it you must press the redo button once for each cell in the row or column specifying Table Width When you create a table you can set its width by specifying one of the following e perce
285. lumns but some of the data is moved down y Netscape File Edt View Go Communicator Help a a w Back Far a Reload Home Search Metscape ka Setting Table Width by Percentage To specify table width by percentage choose Percent in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the percentage at the Width field Insert Table Size Bows 2 Columns 2 Layout 100 C Not Specified i Percent Pixels i ene epee aah ae eee renier Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 472 Manipulating Your Table s Format Specifying Table Width by Pixels Specify table width by pixels if you want the table to remain the same size if a user resizes the browser For example if you specify that a table is 610 pixels wide and the user s browser is set to low resolution 640 x 480 pixels the table occupies the full width of the browser when it is maximized lf the user resizes the browser so that it only occupies the left half of the screen only the left half of the table appears A scroll bar appears at the bottom of the browser The user must move the scroll bar to see the rest of the table Netscape File Edt View Go Communicator Help a a a N Back Faneri Reload Home Search Hetscape If you set table width by pixels do not set it to more than 610 pixels Otherwise the table will not fully display on a monitor set to low resolution 640 x 48
286. mages are moved when you Physical Path insert them into Ektron CMS400 NET File Extensions Extensions of files that can be copied to this library folder For example doc and pdf Flle Upload path The folder to which library files are moved when you insert Physical Path them into Ektron CMS400 NET Your system administrator controls these settings searching the Library You can search the library to find items when you only know some information about them For example you know that an image s name includes Ektron but dont know its filename or folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 192 Library Folder To search the library first select the folder in which you want to begin the search The search only considers files in that folder and its child folders To search the entire library begin by selecting the Library root folder Next click the Search button from the library toolbar When you do a search screen appears with several fields that let you narrow your search The fields are described below C Keywords Specify one or more keywords that the search will use The search looks for keywords in the file s title The title is assigned by the user when the file is added to the library If a file s title matches the keywords the file appears on the search results screen The search also uses keywords to search through the file s e internal name for example airplane gif if
287. mation see Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 286 Any library assets images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu on page 287 External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 288 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 288 Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page 1 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Place the mouse on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 3 The menu appears 4 Click Edit Menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 285 Working with Menus 5 Inthe View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu Click the Add Item button GH The Add Menu screen displays a list of items you can add to the menu 8 Use to the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add that menu item Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 286 Any library assets images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu ltem on page 287 External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 288 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 288 Adding Content as a Menu Item To add content as a menu item follow these steps 1 Follow the
288. mitted Submitted version Pending Start Date Scheduled version pending start date Checked Out Not available lf content can be compared with another version the View Difference button fa appears in the content history area or the Web page view The Compare Content Window NOTE The first time the View Content Difference feature is opened a simple installation program runs See Also First Use of the View Content Difference Feature on page 101 The Compare Content window consists of the following e Toolbar on page 97 e Content Area on page 100 e View Tabs on page 100 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 96 Comparing Versions of Content F CMS Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer Toolbar a a a 2 x _ Welcome to RC InternNational RE 1 is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve RC racm EC ational has become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing and flying vehicles Oi sport and the enthusiasts who play tt has endeared our products te the RC communty We will co improve our affordable products and hope you will become an EC international member Content Area View Tabs Published ia Each area is explained below Toolbar The content comparison toolbar has five buttons explained below ioe tome e 5 Print Sends content to local or network printer Note This option prints the currently displayed content whether it i
289. mmand 438 Do not apply XSLT button 35 document creating document management functionality 241 importing into DMS 234 importing several into AMS 236 Office creating document man agement feature 229 document management feature adding documents to collections 252 ii adding documents to menus 252 checking in document 233 deleting document 252 document types 226 drag and drop files 247 exit without saving changes 234 file types 226 importing document 234 importing several documents 236 installing on client 16 introduction 225 managed files 227 241 Office document properties editing 232 Office document editing 239 Office documents 227 overview 225 reports 252 reports of document by status 252 saving recent changes 234 saving to local computer 234 security 228 submitting for publication 234 viewing documents in CMS 251 work offline 234 239 work offline option 239 workflow 250 document management functionality creating managed file 241 creating Office document 229 document management system approving file 252 documentation online accessing 363 drag and drop files using Ektron Explorer 223 drag and drop files document manage ment feature 247 E edit button floating toolbar 5 editing content block overview 6 content toolbar button 35 HTML 512 email address user editing 360 instant modifying 30 requirements 29 sending 28 where available 30 notification disabling 360 emailing workflow reports 115
290. mments e Web Alerts However to edit a form s Title Description form data or task values use the Edit Properties screen To edit a form follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to edit as described in Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 178 2 Click the Edit Form button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 183 4 5 Working with HTML Forms The Edit Form screen is displayed The screen is the same as the Add New Form screen For documentation of individual fields see Creating a New Form on page 141 Make the necessary changes to the form Click the Save button 1 See Also Working with HTML Forms on page 135 Editing a Form s Content You can edit the content associated with the form by a variety of methods including Accessing the content by the floating toolbar on the Web page Editing the content by the View Form screen Accessing the content by the View Form content properties screen This section explains how to edit a form s content from the View Form screen To edit a form s content follow these steps 1 a SS Y Access the View Form screen for the content as described in Editing a Form s Content on page 184 Click the Edit Content button CY The Edit Content screen appears Make the necessary changes to the form s content lf needed click the Postback Message Metadata Schedule
291. mporting one 241 importing several 243 manuals online accessing 363 marked for deletion content 546 menus accessing 276 add new content block via naviga tion link 290 adding new via content folder 278 via Menus module 282 adding to toolbar 386 appearance to content contributor 274 to site visitor 274 changing orientation 391 compared with collection and List Summary 272 creating 389 in any language 311 definition 274 deleting 307 editing 291 via content folder 291 via menus module 291 via navigation link 292 icons 4 items adding content block as 286 adding external hyperlink as 288 adding library asset as 287 adding submenu 288 adding to submenu 289 adding via content folder 283 adding via modules folder 284 adding via navigation link on Web page 285 definition 275 deleting via content folder 308 via menus module 309 editing content block 296 external hyperlink 300 library asset 300 submenu items 301 via content folder 293 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 via menus module 294 via navigation link 295 rearranging 306 moving from toolbar 391 multi language issues 309 rearranging on toolbar 389 removing from toolbar 386 structure 275 submenu definition 276 template link field 282 translating 309 URL link field 281 viewing via content folder 301 via menus module 305 via navigation link 305 merging cells 497 metadata definition 77 Microsoft Word editing in 407 editing XML do
292. n ww Preview Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 12 Logging In and Out 3 The Web site is now in preview mode RG international Home Products Support News Careers Search Calendar Logging into CMS300 is easy Simply click on the Login button below 4 pop up window Username adman and the password adran This login will allow you to browse through the All the functionality af CMS300 ts controlled fram this workarea NOTE The Ektron CMS300 sample site has 3 content sections that use XML RCC Human Resources After logging in please use the site navigation or the following is to work with XML within CMS300 Products Careers For a complete introduction to the administrator s workarea please refer to the CMS300 Logout 4 To turn preview mode off click the X lt Preview button on the login screen Logging Out of the Sample Site To log out of Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 Click the Logout button in the content s floating toolbar or click the Logout button Logout _ on the Web page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 13 Logging In and Out 2 The Logout confirmation box appears 3 Click the Logout button 4 You return to the Web page from which you logged out However it is in standard view not Ektron CMS400 NET view Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 14 The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Wo
293. n page 487 Specifying a Background Image fora Cell on page 489 Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 486 466 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Table Context Sensitive Menu The following menu appears when you right click the mouse while the cursor is in a table ont Eopy Paste Select All Insert Ao Insert Column Delete Rows Delete Columns Hege telle Split Cell Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HTML All items on this menu are described in The Context Sensitive Menu on page 393 except Tables which is described in The Insert Table Menu on page 461 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 467 Manipulating Your Table s Format This section explains how to manipulate your table s format by specifying e anumber of rows and columns e awidth e horizontal alignment e a background color or image e border color and size NOTE You can also apply most of these properties to individual cells within a table See Working with Table Cells on page 483 for details Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns Use the Size section of the Insert Table dialog box to specify the number of rows and columns in the table Insert Table Size Bows 2 Columns 2 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 468 Manipulating Your Table s Format A row is a horizontal series of cel
294. n 4sseb Control pe If a small red X appears try downloading the client installation program and running It For additional assistance visit Ektron s support page Close Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 19 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Understanding the Smart Desktop The Smart Desktop is one of Ektron CMS400 NET s main screens To access it from wherever you are working in Ektron CMS400 NET click the button in the top left corner circled below mr 927 768 G 2 77 COMMS a4 Content The Smart Desktop consists of three sections illustrated below Ha 1 x Smart Desktop for Application Administrator Smart Desktop 30 Tasks all open Tasks Assigned To Me e Assigned By Me Created By Me Assigned To Use f Content Awaiting Approval 1 L Content Currently Checked Out 1 Not Started Tasks 2 Tasks and Content Reports a Pending Form Submission Tasks 1 Popular reports and tasks this section also fe Content To Exp displays content block information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 20 The Workarea and Smart Desktop e The right frame displays Content awaiting approval content that you need to approve before it proceeds to the next approver or is published if you are the final approver See Also Approvals Reports on page 118 Content currently checked out all conte
295. n CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 327 Working with Calendars lf you assign a type to an event while creating it you can later display only events of that type This feature lets the viewer temporarily suppress unwanted events As a result the calendar display is cleaner because it only shows relevant information Adding a Recurring Event You can assign an event to occur multiple times on a calendar To do so follow these steps 1 Adda calendar event as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 324 2 Click the Recurring tab to assign the event for more than one day Location i Start End l oy o Wednesday April 06 2005 E Ee Wednesday April 06 2005 E EF Event Will Occur Event times Every Day 9 A C Every selected weekday Start 12 00 AM Every selected date of ever Month i End 12 00 AM a Every first selected weekday of every Month Yearly every selected date of Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 328 Working with Calendars 3 Refer to the table below to complete to the Recurring fields SS Start Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select a start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make
296. n Lets you For more information see Check Spelling Compare words in the editor to Microsoft Checking Spelling on WORD spelling list page 402 View as WYSIWYG HTML View and edit your page s HTML Viewing and Editing HTML on page 511 Picture Insert a picture Inserting Images on page 410 These options only appear if Work with XML tags Editing XML Web Pages your site is using on page 368 only available eWebEditPro XML in the eWebEditPro XML User Guide Insert Custom tag tag name tag Attributes tag name tag Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 395 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features Most of eWebEditPro XML s features are easy to learn For example to make your text bold you select the text and click the bold button B However some of eWebEditPro XML s features are more complex For example when creating a table you must make several decisions the number of rows and columns the size of the border the spacing between cells etc The following sections explain eWebEditPro XML s more advanced features Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 396 Copying from Other Applications You can copy information from most other Windows applications into eWebEditPro XML and retain the formatting from the original application In general copying from another application involves these steps Sign on to the application in which the in
297. n full right frame view and combination right left frame view When autohide is turned on the left frame is minimized unless you place the cursor to the left of the bar circled above If you place the cursor there the left frame appears As soon as you move the cursor back to the right frame the left frame disappears To turn on the autohide feature click the push pin icon near the top of the left frame on Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 27 The Workarea and Smart Desktop To turn off autohide move the cursor to the left frame and click the push pin icon When you do the push pin returns to its original position sending Instant Email Ektron CMS400 NET lets you send email instantly to a user or user group from many screens available from the Smart Desktop Your ability to send instant mail is indicated by a small mail icon next to a user or group name indicated in red below i Content Awaiting Approval 1 jew All Approvals ttle Request Type Start Date Submitted by Trinity In Line Pipe Publish None Specified Edit John When you click a user group name or email icon the email screen appears as shown below Once you complete the screen and click Send an email is sent to designated users Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 28 The Workarea and Smart Desktop To jedit ektron com From jeditt ektron cam Subject Content Trinity In Line Fipe Times
298. n page 122 Pending Content Approved and pending a start date Content Pending Start Date Report on page 123 Refresh Reminder Report End date has been reached Refresh Reminder Report on page 124 Expired Content Expired date has been reached Expired Content Report on page 125 Content to Expire Will expire within specified number Content to Expire Report on of days page 125 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 253 Working with Collections Working with Collections A collection provides a list of content that can be placed on a Web page to offer readers links to them In the following illustration the circled content Home KL International is an example of a collection on a Web page Products Support Hews Careers RO Sportster RC Cars RC Cheetah RC Lilly RC Redstar Product Name RC Ghe Description RC Internationals most entry in to the competit racing world is the RC RC Cheetah is designed core RC enthusiast The You can also use a collection to display other listings such as job postings press releases and knowledge base articles The following graphic illustrates the use of a collection on the landing page of Ektron s Knowledge Base Highlighted Knowledge Base Articles IMFO INFO INFO INFO INFO Release notes for eWebEditPro 2 ML v4 2 Release notes for eWebEditPra 4 2 evVWebEditPro 3 amp
299. n view its information in the Forms folder To view a form follow these steps 1 Access the Forms folder as described in Accessing the Forms Folder on page 139 Click the form you want to view 3 The View Form screen displays The following table explains the information on the screen See Form Title Title used to reference the form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 177 Working with HTML Forms e Form Data The type of form data Mail or Database See Also The Structure of Form Data on page 137 Assign Task to Users and groups to whom a task will be automatically assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 170 Content Displays the properties of the form s content Properties Content Title Title of content associated with form Note The content name is the same as the Form name _ The content name is the same as the Form name Content ID Content ID number assigned to content The status of the content Last Editor Last user to edit the content Start Date Date and time when the content will go live on the Web site if set for a future date End Date Date and time when the content will be removed from the Web site if set for a future date Date Created Date and time when content was created The View Form screen also contains several buttons to perform actions To learn about the buttons see Form Module Toolbar on page 185
300. naging Image Selection gt Examples of Implementing Image Selection gt Selecting Files from the Server Media File Selection File Selection OF I Resolve Image Paths Select New File Layout Width Cancel Options ldg Picture Height Border Thickness Alignment Maintain Aspect Ratio Spacing Horizontal Vertical Title Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 410 Inserting Images Hedia File Selection x File Selection OF Cancel Ud Images Select Server File Select Hew File Picture Options Width Height Border Thickness jo Alignment Reset W Maintain Aspect Ratio Spacing Horizontal i Vertical Title You can also access this dialog box to modify a picture after you insert it To do this follow these steps 1 Click the picture 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Picture from the menu If you see the first dialog box proceed to Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 411 If you see the second dialog box proceed to Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box on page 415 Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box When the first Picture Properties dialog box appears click the Select New File button When you do the Insert Media Item dialog box appears This box and lets you insert a picture from your computer and any network folder available to your computer
301. nd Background Color Manipulating Your Table s Format FHE W Unassigned Background Image Select Image Your Webmasier determines which images are available to you To insert a background image 1 2 3 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears Click the image of your choice Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a table it applies to the entire table including the borders if the table is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the table if the image is larger than the table the top left corner of the image aligns with the top left corner of the table The rest of the image fills as much of the table as possible you can also apply an image to individual cells see Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 489 make sure that the image does not obscure user s ability to read the table text Deleting a Background Image 1 Move the cursor to any cell on the table and right click the mouse Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 478 Manipulating Your Table s Format 2 Click Table Properties from the menu Eii Lopy Paste Select All Inzert Aor Inzert Column Delete Rows Delete Columns Menge ells Split Cell Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HT RAL View as HTML 3 Select the value in the B
302. ne eee ee 65 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 000 66 Setting a Start Date pra aapniseneeaneqeenconiaenaenneees 66 Setting an End Date on Content cccccesseeseeeeeenseeeeeeseeeseennees 69 Setting Archive OptiOns cccccsssseesceesseeesesseeeseenseeseeeneeeees 70 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 i Adding a Content Summary cceeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeees 73 Creating Summaries sic iesicaictuncewsntntsnanrdeacuheenniedonacstrannsensiteessiadsrns 74 Editing a Summary wttiinnimerititicion een 75 Adding or Editing Metadata ccssccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 77 Entering Custom Metadata ccccccseccesseeseseeseenseseeneeseenees 78 Entering Title and KeywordsS ccccssseeeeeseeseenseeenseeseeeneneenees 80 Entering or Editing Metadata scccssseesssseenesseeseesseneeeees 82 Approving Declining Content cccsecesseeseseseeeeeeees 85 Approve Decline One Content Item c ccsseeesseeeeneeeeees 86 Approve Decline Several Content ItemS esesseeeeees 88 Example of an Approval Chain scccsssssessesseeceeneseeesenseenes 89 Comparing Versions of Content ccseseeeeeeeseeeeeees 95 When Can I Compare Content cccccssseseeeeeseeeeeenneeeeeensenens 95 The Compare Content WINdOW ccsssscesseesseeeceeneeseeeeneeees 96 First Use of the View Content
303. necessary information according to the following table Description Enter a title for the file to be copied Filename Enter the folder path to the file to be copied You can use the Browse button to find the file Description You can enter a full text description to help other users identify this file The Description appears on the View File screen It also accompanies the file on the Search Results screen if the user selects Mixed when viewing the search results See Also Displaying Search Results on page 194 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 197 Library Folder Below is a description of the buttons on the screen SSS Preview View file to make sure it s correct before uploading it Note An application that can display the file must be installed on your computer Add file to the library Return to previous screen After you enter the necessary information and click the Save button the file is copied Now users with permissions to the selected folder can insert the file into their content Viewing Files Once a file is copied to the library you may preview it To preview a copied file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the library folder to which the file was copied 2 Click the file you want to preview 3 The View File screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 198 Library Folder View Library Item in Folder Contenti files Ti
304. ng text of the email See Also Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields on page 182 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 179 Working with HTML Forms Cc Send data in XML A green check means email data will be in a structured XML Format packet A red X means the email data will be in a standard mailto format For more information see Sending Data as XML in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Forms chapter Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form In the Mail Properties section of the Edit Form screen you can select email addresses submitted on the form to be inserted into any of these Mail Property fields e To e From e CC So instead of entering a static email address it can be dynamically retrieved from the user s form submission For example you want to retrieve the from field of an email from the information the user enters when completing the form To do this use the OR to addresses in field dropdown lists circled below These lists contain fields that dynamically retrieve data from the submitted form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 180 Working with HTML Forms tit Form Compose Email itle Compose Email escription Write and send an email message orm Data Mail Database ssign Task To unassigned Select User or Group a 399 Mail Properties Toi fo to addresses in field No fiel
305. ng the First Picture Properties Dialog BoX s 000 411 Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box 415 Moving an Image to the Servel cccccsssseeesesseeseeenneeeeeeneeeees 423 Deleting a PCOS se staciccict cis aunesauasiadaonrsanioaacinauntranctaaaieanninies 423 CNET WEA Co E seen AA nie 425 usma WeDimage F A ssassn 425 Toolbar Buttons and Menu Commands cseceeeeeeeeeeees 427 Specifying Color Depth cccccsssseccsenseeecensseeesenseeeeeensees 456 Introduction to TADIGS winciicccsaccccedeneccccsenccesseeceieeustencucdewntinocs 457 Creating a Table se inkiciactesecawincsacacipsessachesrenniinteniasesiwensiatsedestsieines 458 Deleting a as recat ep ees aan a a a 459 Inserting a Table within a Table ccccccsseseeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeneees 460 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus c sscceeseeseeseeeeeeeeenees 461 The Insert Table Menu ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 461 The Table Properties Dialog BOX cccssseesesseeseeneeseeneeees 463 The Cell Properties Dialog BOX ccccsssssseeesseneeeeseeneeeseennees 465 The Table Context Sensitive Menu cccccsssesssseeseeseeneeees 467 Manipulating Your Table s Forimat ccssssssseeeeeneeeeeenes 468 Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns 000000 468 Specifying Table WidHtn cccccsssseessenseesceeneeeseesseeeseennees 470 Specifying Horizon
306. ng the item Deleting Library Items You can delete obsolete items from the library By deleting an item you prevent users from adding it to their content A deleted hyperlink quicklink or form quicklink remains on your Web server so any existing links to them are not broken On the other hand if an item is a file or image the delete window displays an additional prompt Remove from the server that lets you remove the item from the server This feature is available to help reduce disk space taken up by these files Before removing an image or file from your server you should review all content with links to it and remove or update the link To delete an item from the library follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 198 2 Click the Delete button fi 3 The Delete Library Item screen is displayed If appropriate check the box next to Remove from the server see above 5 Click the Delete button fi Adding a Library File to Content After a file is copied to the library users can add it to content See Adding a Library File to Content on page 205 You can also insert an item into the library while adding it to content See Adding a File to the Library and Inserting it into Content on page 206 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 204 Library Folder If you insert an image file it appears within the
307. ning 540 green content border color meaning 540 H height work page Customizing for user 361 help online accessing 363 history button view floating toolbar 5 content accessing from Web page 49 103 accessing via Workarea 49 103 viewing 37 window 104 horizontal flip WeblmageFX command 441 horizontal line inserting 382 HTML cleaning 513 editing 512 inserting 512 viewing 511 hyperlinks 505 adding as menu option 288 creating 505 definition 188 editing 510 entering manually 507 library adding 208 adding to content 208 editing 208 viewing 208 preventing 510 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 iil removing 510 testing 508 to a bookmark in another web page 509 to content block finding 36 using a Quicklink 506 icon menu 4 Ignore All field eWebDiff 99 Ignore Case field eWebDiff 99 Ignore Format Attributes field eWebDiff 99 image extensions library setting 192 image info WeblmageFX command 441 image upload from Microsoft Word document 408 inserting picture from computer 413 media file selection 411 images adding space around 421 aligning 419 background cell inserting 489 table inserting 477 border color 418 thickness 418 deleting 423 deleting from server 413 editing 425 inserting 410 from server into editor 412 inserting from your computer 413 library adding to content 209 editing titles 209 overwriting 209 uploading 208 viewing 209 locking in position 3
308. nk The URL link for the external hyperlink For example www google com 6 Click the Save button H NOTE When adding an External Hyperlink menu item the URL does not get added to the library nor is an ID assigned to it So when you save the menu item it is not added to the CMS database nor can it be retrieved for future use Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item To add a submenu as a menu item via content folder or menus module follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 288 Working with Menus _h Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 283 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 284 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 285 2 Click the radio button next to Submenu 3 The Add Menu screen is displayed 4 Complete the fields using Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 279 as a reference 5 Click the Save button H Adding an Item to a Submenu 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus 2 Select the menu 3 Find the submenu to which you want to add items Submenus have a folder icon t next to them view Menu My test View In Hadal 4 select language English US L Contact Ektron B L Home Fage Content B T LA submenu on my submenu amp B Tm L support Page B Tm www ektron com E m Related web Sites amp B Tm Another submenu amp
309. nline manuals are in a PDF format which makes it easy to navigate online and print See Also Accessing Online Manuals on page 365 Both formats provide the same information Choose the format that best suits your needs Accessing Online Help To access online help for any screen click the help icon illustrated below View Contents of Folder Content views English U S Title Language ID Status Date Modified Last Editor 1033 12 G 3 7 2005 10 25 30 AM Administrator Applicatior i by F a el Sr a D CYocronne 11 A7 1 0 AR Adeeieicbe ator feelin atioe When you do an online help screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 363 Online Help E Viewing a Folder Microsoft Internet Explorer lt BACK lt PREVTOPIC NEXTTOPIC CONTENTS 2 F Working vith Folders and Content Blocks Viewing a Folder To view any folder under the content folder follow these steps z 1 Access the Workarea as described in Site Preview 2 Click Content from the left lower side of the Workarea The following table describes the buttons available on every help screen Se Returns to help topic you last viewed Moves to prior topic in the manual This refers to the topic sequence arranged by the manual s author Moves to next topic in the manual This refers to the topic sequence arranged by the manual s author Divides the help into two panels CONTE
310. nneessooees 505 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 vi Testing a Hyperlink Semen ere epee apie san sien Beas e nnn i eenen renee snr 508 Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page 509 Editing a Hyperlink acesinniasasecesansatnntesansunesabonssensemauianausnaeetieoues 510 Removing a Hyperlink ss sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 510 Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink 000 510 Working WIth HTML cccceccesccesseeesecessenssenseeneeoeseeeeeees 511 Viewing and Editing HTML cccccssesccssesersseseeessnsessseseeneesens 511 OY eM SOUCO snoin 512 Cleaning Source Code ccccccssscseeeeseesseeeseeeesseeeseeeenseeessenenss 513 Inserting Content from MS Office 2000 assssnsnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnn 514 Section 508 COMpliaNnce cccssseccssseccsenseecenseeeenseeesenees 515 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML cssceeeees 515 Using eWebEditPro XML without a MOuSE cceeeeseeeees 516 Section 508 TAOS sccinsscrsssnatssepesvcnnssceesaeradtesasiewvaxanacecietncnedsamnnes 518 Inserting Comments within Content ccscssesesseeeeeees 525 Adding Comments to Content ctccccessesseeesseneeeeseeneeesnennees 526 Viewing COMMING INN itasss roecasanvreareriacacicsncretuiettendesmuncsnnnnnmaninl 527 Adding Another Comment csccccesseeeceesseeseeenneeseeeneees 527 Updating CONSE siwanisiinrs
311. nneneeeneaes 9 Fror gU OS avissini dace encseanntemnea dane ssimenaanseancenaanet 9 Logging into the Sample Web Site ccsssseessseseeeeeeseeeeeenees 9 Site Pe Ey arias ensraniee ieee 11 Logging Out of the Sample Site ccccccessssseeeseeseeessenneeeeeens 13 The Workarea and Smart DeSktop ccsesseseeeeeeeees 15 Accessing the Workarea ccccsesecsensceesseeeeseeeseeeeneeeeeeeenaneenenes 15 Installing the Document Management Functionality 16 Understanding the Smart DeSktop ccccssseseeeseeeseeeeenseeeeeees 20 Navigating Within the Smart DeSktop cssssseesseeseeseeees 22 Sending Instant Email sisiccceniaavessevesianvsavsvctanceneeiownunvtndeenmninion 28 Working with Folders and Content ccsscccsesseeeeeeeeees 32 Workarea Toolbar Buttons c scsecceeseeceeeeeeeeseeseesseneeseeseees 34 Viewing a F ldet geen eee tenet Maree nisn ia 37 Viewing Content sissandi naana aaa 40 Expanding the Content Area ccccsssseesssesseeseessseeseesneeseeens 44 Adding Content acasin a 46 Editing Content peter tte tt ert errr ere at tn erent eet ttn 49 Deleting COMtenmi tits cds a vrovasaece es eriraccecepeceacescomscninacsdactesaceninccuens 51 Searching the Workarea scccssssseessensseeeesseeeseeseeesseeeseeees 54 Adding SUIT ONO GES ecard secccrsatectstecceienireevaneccecneenetebiacasedeetsenntce 62 Deleting gre 2 ge ee eee ee ees Sere oni on seen a
312. ns functions Button Add Calendar Event E Add Content In a content folder opens the editor and allows you to E create new content See Also Adding Content on page 46 Add Content Folder In a content folder allows you to create a subfolder to further organize your content See Also Adding Subfolders on page 62 Add Library Item In the library folder allows you to upload an image or file Description Adds items in several places Accesses the add calendar event screen in the Workarea or add a hyperlink or Quicklink to use in content See Also Library Folder on page 190 z Add Task Assign task to a user See Also Managing Tasks on ih page 331 H Approvals View approval chain for folder or content See Also Approving Declining Content on page 86 Bo me Approve content that awaits your approval s Approve All In the approvals folder approves all content awaiting your approval with one click Archived Content If current content is being displayed switch to display archived content a a If archived content is being displayed switch to display current content See Also Setting Archive Options on page 71 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 34 Working with Folders and Content Name Description Return to previous screen Calendar Lets you choose when content will go live See Also Working with Calendars on page 30
313. ns for what to do next They are explained in the following table You can carry out any option by clicking an Ektron CMS400 NET toolbar button Edit Content Content Search Data fe or a Document Management menu option illustrated below 7 pA 7 al n m HE Te 2 Sni ro 4 a eo pe Pd ee La Pea ee Pek fe Po eo poe Petre Poet ee Pel ee pees Ped be Poe Pe Pek ee Pee Pete pote E Pope pe Po ee oe ee ed pee Tithe test English U 5 Content Search Data Comment Tasks File Edit View Insert Format Tools Table Help ete etre eine Undo CheckOut Check In Publish Save To Document Server Work Offline Properties Document Toolbar Management Menu button Option Check document in so you and others Check in can continue to edit it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 233 Using the Document Management Functionality Document Toolbar Management Menu button Option Submit document into approval chain Publish or submit for Upon approval publish content to Web publishing site Save recent changes Use to save latest Save to DocServer changes before continuing Save file to local computer Work Offline See Also The Work Offline Option on page 239 Discard changes made in current editing Undo Check out session Importing One Office Document Your computer or network may have Office documents that you want to manage using DM Follow these
314. nt from a Web page To delete content from a Web page follow these steps Sign in 2 Browse to the content you want to delete 3 Click the Delete button i The View Content screen for the selected content appears See Viewing Content on page 40 5 Click the Delete button Dl 6 The following message appears Bie Microsoft Internet Explorer E x p Are you sure vou wish to submit this content block to the approvers For deletion 3 This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block Continue Cancel 7 Click OK to delete the content Deleting Content from the Workarea 1 Access the View Content screen for the content you want to delete as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Click the Delete button fl Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 52 Working with Folders and Content 3 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer E Xx Are vou sure vou wish bo submit this content block to the approvers For deletion This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block dea Continue 4 Click OK to delete the content Deleting Several Content Items in a Folder On the View Content Folder
315. nt in a checked out status This content cannot be edited by other users until the user who checked it out or the system administrator checks it in See Also Checked Out Report on page 120 A list of tasks assigned to you See Also Managing Tasks on page 335 Any form submission tasks assigned to you See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 170 The Content to Expire Report see Content to Expire Report on page 125 NOTE The number to the right of each category lists the quantity of content items in that category for you When you click an item up to five content items in a category appear To perform tasks on that content and to view additional content in that category click the category lf you select a folder from the left frame the right frame displays content in that folder If you select content from the list information about it fills the right frame e The top left frame displays the folder tree for the Smart Desktop folder which has two subfolders Tasks See Managing Tasks on page 335 Content Reports see Content Workflow Reports on page 108 e The bottom left frame displays the top level folders in Ektron CMS400 NET Your display may be different depending on whether you are an administrator Content folder see Working with Folders and Content on page 32 Forms folder see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Working with HTML Forms
316. ntage of the window the table s width varies as a user adjusts the browser size e fixed number of pixels the table s width stays the same as a user adjusts the browser size You can also not set a width but instead let information you enter into the table s cells determine its width Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 470 Manipulating Your Table s Format NOTE To set the width of a table column adjust the width of one of the cells within the column as described in Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 483 Usually this change affects all other cells in the column Specifying Table Width by Percentage Specify table width by percentage if you want the table to be resized as the user resizes the browser NOTE In order for the table to resize with the browser the Word Wrap attribute must be turned on in all of a table s cells For details see Word Wrap on page 498 For example if you specify that a table is 100 wide and your browser displays 14 inches across when it is maximized the table fills the screen except for the browser border a Netscape File Edt View Go Communicator Help Back Forward Reload Home Search Netscape Frint Security Shop Table Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 471 Manipulating Your Table s Format If you resize the browser to half the screen the table will be about 7 wide You still see both co
317. o Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 372 Or you can choose a toolbar option or tab from the top of the Edit Content window These options are described in Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 47 and Tabs on the Add Content Screen on page 48 Translating Content to Another Language NOTE The following procedure only works with HTML or XML content You cannot translate other file types as described below Use this procedure when you want to initialize a new foreign language content item with content from a source language This copying should facilitate the translation For example an editor is translating content from French to German The editor copies the French edition to new content whose language is German As the editor translates the French edition into German he deletes the French content Any images in the content would usually remain and all formatting tables bullets etc is retained To copy content into new content block of a different language follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 50 Working with Folders and Content 1 Goto the View Content screen for the content you want to translate From the View drop down list select the original language 3 Use the Add drop down list in the upper right corner to select the language into which you want to translate the content Danish Lerman standard 4 The Edit Content screen
318. o anyone who completes a form Whenever a site visitor submits the form a task is assigned to your sales department s administrative assistant He uses the information collected by the form to schedule a demonstration The sales manager can review the task history to audit sales leads and ensure demonstration requests are being handled in a timely manner To set up a task that it is assigned to users or groups whenever a site visitor completes the form follow these steps NOTE You should be familiar with tasks before beginning this procedure See Also Managing Tasks on page 331 1 If you are creating a new form assign the task at Step 5 of the Forms Wizard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 170 Working with HTML Forms If you are editing a form assign the task on the form s Edit Properties screen In both cases you identify only users and groups to whom the task will be assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form Ektron CMS400 NET assigns the remaining task information You complete the form and make it available on your Web site A visitor to your site fills out and submits the form A task is created and assigned to users and groups you identified in Step 1 5 Any Ektron CMS400 NET user can view all tasks created via form submission in the Smart Desktop See illustration below See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 20 Content Awaiting Approval O L Content C
319. o f admin Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Mot Started Due Date 11 Jun 2004 Start Date 10 Jun 2004 Description Remember to view your approval list every day and approve any content blacks on the list Comments Date Timeladded By Comments 10 Jun 004 10 47 AM _ O Be sure to check this list every day for John Edit content blocks needing approval 3 The Comments window opens with the comment displayed 4 Update the comment 5 Click the button Deleting a Task You can easily delete a task that is no longer needed For example the user who assigned a task would typically delete it when it is completed To delete a task follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 355 Managing Tasks 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 347 2 Click the Delete button 7 3 A confirmation message appears Click OK Viewing a Task s History Ektron CMS400 NET maintains a history of all events in the life of a task as well as any comments entered As examples the task history shows when and by whom the task was created when it changed to Active when it was linked to content when its state changed when it was approved etc You can view the task s history until the task is purged To view a task s history follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Task screen as explained in Viewing a Task
320. of pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding Cell Spacing 5 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 500 Using Bookmarks Use a bookmark to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another place in a file On your Web page text appears in a different color to indicate that additional information is available at the bookmark s location For example if your Web page includes meeting minutes the top of the page could list the meeting dates You could then assign a hyperlink to each date and a bookmark to each set of minutes The user sees that a date is in a different color so clicks the date to jump to the bookmark that marks the location of the meeting minutes Creating a Bookmark on page 501 describes how to set up a hyperlink to a bookmark within a file You can also set up hyperlink to e another Web page This procedure is described in Using Hyperlinks on page 505 e a bookmark within another Web page This procedure is described in Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 509 This section explains e Creating a Bookmark on page 501 e Changing the Destination Window on page 504 Creating a Bookmark When creating a bookmark you must specify a e source the text or image that the user clicks to move to the bookmark Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 501 Using Bookmarks e bookmark the p
321. ollow these steps 1 Place a checkbox type field v onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 146 2 The following dialog appears Checkbox Field Hame Tool Tips r Default value C True checked False unchecked men Fields on the Checkbox Dialog D Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt QI into this field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 151 Working with HTML Forms pre i Tool Tips Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want this field to be checked when the screen first value appears click True Otherwise click False Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Inserting a Hidden Text Field When the form is submitted this field can pass information that the site visitor doesn t need to know about such as a tracking number This is typically data to be stored in the database and or emailed along with the rest of the data To insert a hidden text field follow these steps 1 Place a hidden text field fab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 146 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 152 Working with HTML Fo
322. ommargin 0 gt lt TABLE WIDTH 100 BORDER 0 CELLPADDING 0 CELLSPACING 0 background graphics header_back gif gt lt TR gt lt TD lt IMG SRC qraphics header gif gt lt TD gt lt header graphic note photoshop file Cheader psd included to change company name gt Ea e Keywords are searched by leading search programs along with the page s title Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 81 Adding or Editing Metadata After content is published to the Web site you can view the page source to see its metadata Below is the source of a sample Web page elcome to RC International Microsoft Internet Explorer ile Edit View Favorites Tools Help E index 1 Notepad File Edit Format view Help lt Copyright 2002 Ektron Inc CMS sample site Al information in the sample site is fictional gt lt html gt kTitle welcome to RC International lt Tit le gt lt meta name Keywords content RC International RC racing remote control airplanes cars gt Intern as Ne lt Tink rel stylesheet href default css type text css gt the spc lt HEAD gt ving tc lt BoDY topmargin oO leftmargin O marginheight 0 marginwidth 0 Ew Feg ightmargin 0 bottommargin 0 gt lt TABLE WIDTH 100 BORDER 0 CELLPADDING 0 CELLSPACING 0 background graphics header_back gif gt lt TR gt Initys n gines lt TD gt lt I
323. on page 200 The only difference is that you edit a hyperlink title instead of a file title You can also edit the URL Adding Hyperlinks to Your Content Once a hyperlink is added to the library users can add the hyperlink to their content To add a hyperlink to content follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 204 The only difference is that you add a hyperlink instead of a file Images For a definition of the term images see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 188 Uploading Images You must copy images to the library before content creators can insert them into content To copy an image to the library follow the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 208 Library Folder procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 196 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file Viewing Images To view an image follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 198 The only difference is that you view an image instead of a file Editing Image Titles To edit an image s title follow the procedure described in Editing a File on page 200 The only difference is that you edit an image s title instead of a file title Overwriting Images When an image in the library becomes out of date or if the wrong version of an image was copied you may overwrite that image with a new or correct version Overwriting images minimize
324. on page 73 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 66 13 If desired you can edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 232 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 231 Using the Document Management Functionality 14 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would a content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 232 and Adding Content on page 46 Editing a Document s Properties If the host application such as Microsoft Word has a Properties screen you can access it by clicking File gt Properties or the Properties option on the host application s Document Management menu NOTE CMS400 NET installs the Document Management menu on the Office application Documenti Properties e Fx General Summary Statistics Contents Custom Title Expense Report January 2005 Subject Travel expenses 00 Author Jon Wily Manager Jim Beaner Company Ekron Category Expenses keywords trav comments Does not include trip to corporate headquarters in Cincinnati on 1 15 05 Hyperlink Tr base Template Mormal dot m Save Preview picture Save Check in and Publish Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 232 Using the Document Management Functionality When you finish editing a document you have four optio
325. onality described in this section is not supported when using an Apple Macintosh for editing content The Document Management Functionality DM lets you import Microsoft Office documents and most other kinds of files into Ektron CMS400 NET Non Office files are known as managed files Collectively these files are known as documents After being saved in Ektron CMS400 NET documents can be updated and tracked like HTML and XML content If you re familiar with how that content is handled most of what you know also applies to documents For example documents e can be stored in folders with other content or in separate folders that you create just for them e are assigned content ID numbers e capture summary metadata comment task and schedule information e inherit permissions and approvals from their folder properties e progress through a workflow check out check in publish e provide a history and let you restore an earlier version e can be searched including some Office document properties e can have foreign language editions e can have a task assigned to them e appear on content reports e update the Smart Desktop listing of files awaiting approval checked out tasks to expire When a file is imported to the CMS then saved a copy of it is saved to the asset management server Then whenever a user Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 225 Using the Document Management Functionality edits
326. only click the Select Event Type to View drop down list illustrated below Then choose an event type See Also Undersianding Event Types on page 327 show All Company Holiday Trade Show Company Event The page is refreshed and the calendar displays events of that type only Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 321 Working with Calendars From here you can perform the following tasks Note that the Add and View buttons appear on each calendar day while the Return button is on the toolbar at the top of the screen Click on More Information Add Calendar Event Adding a Calendar Event on page 324 View Calendar Events Viewing a Calendar Event on page 329 Return to Previous Screen Return to previous screen il i Event title within Jump to calendar event s calendar sample Web page if available below Es Ed RC International Announces the RC See Also Working with Calendars on page 312 Tips on Viewing a Calendar e The monthly calendar displays the current month In the intranet sample today is highlighted in yellow illustrated below At the top of the calendar are the previous and next months Click them to view those months lt lt March April Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday aa all birthday party LSS oe Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 322 Working with Calendars e Where an event appears
327. ont color and other attributes Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Move Up Move Down Remove Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox Note that if Only One is selected under Allow selection above only one item can be selected Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 164 Working with HTML Forms Inserting a Select List Field Use a Select List field when you want the site visitor to select from a predetermined list of choices Although similar to the choices field when you insert a Select List field the site visitor only sees the first option in a drop down box Age range Payapa He must click the down arrow to see the remaining values and select one ge range Select So the Select List field occupies less room on the screen than a choices field Also the site visitor can only choose on item on the list In contrast you can allow a visitor to select several choices if you use a choices field To insert a Select List field follow these steps 1 Place a Select List field e onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 146 2 The following dialog appears
328. ontent Summary Search Data Schedule select file ta be uploaded 8 Click the Browse button 9 Browse through your computer and network to the file you want to import When you do the file s path appears within the File field 10 Insert a Title 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 12 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule and comments See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 73 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 e Managing Tasks on page 335 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 66 13 Click the appropriate button to either check in Ei or publish ES the file See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 232 and Adding Content on page 46 14 A window appears indicating that the file is being uploaded to the DM server Importing Several Managed Files To import several managed files into DM follow these steps See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 238 and Drag and Drop File Uploading Vs the Add Content Buttons on page 250 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 243 1 Using the Document Management Functionality From the Workarea select the Content folder Select the folder in which you want to place the files See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 Click the down arrow next to the add
329. or from the Web server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 411 Inserting Images to which your computer is connected Both choices are described below Insert Media Item Microsoft Internet Explorer Inserting a Picture from the Server The top left corner of the dialog box Illustrated below lists the pictures on the Web server 7 E a Insert Media Item Microsoft Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 412 Inserting Images Pictures that you previously inserted appear on this list as do pictures inserted by other users connected to that server To insert a picture from the server follow these steps 1 Click the picture from the To Select an Existing File field that you want to insert 2 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 3 If you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box Click OK The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the properties of the picture For more information see e Adjusting a Picture on page 416 e Setting a Border on page 418 e Aligning the Picture on page 419 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 421 6 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Deleting a Picture from the Server To delete a picture from the server select the picture and click the Dele
330. ou sort by Task Type using the Show Task Type drop down box It is located in the upper right corner of the Workarea NOTE Task Types only appear in the Show Task Type dropdown box when they have _ been added to a task Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 350 Managing Tasks Not Specified l Mar 2005 Mar 2005 l 1 Mar 2005 To sort by Task Type click the drop down box and choose a Task Type Words in bold Italics are Task Categories You cannot sort by Task Categories Sorting Tasks By Column On every View Tasks page you can sort the information by most columns Information can be sorted by the following Alphabetically by title of associated content By task state from first to last Priority By task priority High appears first followed by Normal then Low Due Date By due date beginning with dates closest to today Assigned To Alphabetically by user to whom the task is assigned Note Once set a task s assigned to user does not change throughout the life of the task Assigned By Alphabetically by user who assigned the task Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 351 Managing Tasks Last Added Comment Alphabetically by the most recently created task comment Create Date By date task was created beginning with dates closest to today emailing Tasks You can email the contents of any Task screen emailing tasks works the same as emailing reports See
331. ou want to add a recurring event see Adding a Recurring Event on page 328 Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select a start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Start Time Click the clock icon amp to display a clock From it select a start time Click the clock icon E to display a clock From it select an ending time for the event Display the times Check this box if you want the calendar to display the event s start and end for the event times illustrated below company meeting Location montreal room Start 1 00 PM jEnd 2 00 PM The time also appears on the event detail if this box is checked Company meeting Friday April 01 2005 Location Montreal Room Start 1 00 PM End 2 00 PM Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 326 Working with Calendars SS Hyperlink You can link a Web page to this calendar event The Web page could contain more information about the event directions to it etc If you insert a hyperlink when this event appears on the calendar the reader can click the event to jump to that page To enter any page on the internet enter its Web address For ex
332. ound image to a cell Your Webmaster determines which images are available To insert an image into a cell follow these steps Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu oe YS Move the cursor to the Background Image field of the Cell Properties dialog box Custom Background Background Color if Unassigned Background Image Select Image 5 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears 6 Click the image of your choice 7 Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a cell Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 489 Working with Table Cells e Ifthe cell is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the cell e fthe cell is smaller than the image the top left corner of the image appears in the top left corner of the cell The rest of the image fills as much of the cell as possible e Make sure the image does not obscure a user s ability to read the cell text if any exists Deleting a Background Image Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu ee ee Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt Using the Color Box Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner
333. out adding content links to a collection see Assigning Content to the Collection on page 264 Removing Content from the Collection To remove a content link from a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 256 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 258 3 Click the Remove button The Delete Items from Collection screen appears Click boxes next to links that you want to delete Select All Clear All Title ID UR HomePage Content 1 JCI L Support Page 8 ct IY Plastic Molder 123 13 fa RC Cheetah 5 fcr L RC Redstar 7 JQ M Contact Ektron 15 CI C New Content Block 17 CI Click Select All to select all boxes Click Clear All to remove all check marks 6 Click the Delete button Reordering Collections List After a collection is created and more than one content item is assigned to it you can reorder the collections list To do so follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 268 Working with Collections 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 256 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in V
334. owing options on page 41 emailing Reports You can email any report You might do this for example to notify a user that several content items are checked out to him All information in the report appears in the email A sample appears below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 115 Content Workflow Reports Content To Expire in 70 Days tsmith ektron com To tsmith ektron com Title ID Last Editor Email End Date F CMs Developer 12 Edit John 1113 2005 9 45 00 Ph CMs Entwickler 12 Adminstrator Application 11 1Sf2005 S4540 PRE CMS Ealsateur l2 Adtmurustrater Application 11 1sf2005 9 44 40 PR You can click any content item on the report and proceed to that page of your Web site To email any report follow these steps 1 Display the report that you want to email nananana nn 3 A list of all users and user groups in your Ektron CMS400 NET appears Wiser or Group Mame 7 O E admin O jedit E jsmith O E tbrown O tjones EO vs Administrators 18 Everyone NOTE Users appear first in alphabetical order by username followed by user groups The icon for user groups has two heads see below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 116 Content Workflow Reports CO tione E vs LIES Administrat B everyone 4 Click inside the checkbox of every user or group to receive a copy of the report Searching for
335. page and your browser is Internet Explorer move to eWebEditPro XML by pressing lt Tab gt until the cursor lands in the editor To move from the editor to the next field press lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt Using Netscape If the eWebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields on a page and your browser is Netscape your Webmaster needs to create custom toolbar buttons that let you move into and out of the editor This procedure is described in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 515 Section 508 Compliance Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse As explained in Customizing Your Toolbar on page 385 the eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more toolbar menus Menus have buttons that you click with the mouse to perform actions such as copying text This section explains how to perform those actions without using the mouse 1 With the cursor in the eWebEditPro XML editor press the application key Eh 2 A menu appears Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tag 3 Press the down arrow key to select Menus Menus becomes highlighted Menus Cut Cnr 4 Press lt Enter gt A new menu lists all toolbar menus available to yOu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 516 Section 508 Compliance lf
336. peech or Braille For more information see hitp msdn microsoft com library default asp url workshop author dhtml reference properties abbr asp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 523 Section 508 Compliance Fit Poserinton Categories Sets or retrieves a comma delimited list of conceptual categories associated with that tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see http msdn microsoft com workshop author dhtml reference properties axis asp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 524 Inserting Comments within Content While editing Ektron CMS400 NET content you can insert comments to the content Comments might be an author s note to himself or other authors about the content For example you could insert a comment explaining why you are using a certain style class Comments are only visible during editing they do not appear when the content is published on your Web site 2 Headquarters 5 Northern Blvd Bldg 6 Amherst WH 03031 USA Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 afoibektron conf Ektron CMSComments Microsoft Internet Explorer uropear Comments Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt bi A Ja H Ji B Bom ye A edia Co Torn Please review the text to verify accuracy Gl Bill Partners wl r E j Done loading B B B F Internet ve Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 R
337. piece of content select it When you click Select a new window appears From this window you can navigate through folders to find the content You can only select a piece of content whose language matches the user language selected above See Also Selecting Content for the Task on page 340 Priority Select the priority of the task Your choices are High Normal and Low The priority appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by priority Task Category Select a category for the task When a Task Category is chosen the Task Type drop down box is auto filled with task types associated with that category See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 342 Task Type Select the Task Type for this task You must specify a Task Category before you assign a task type See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 342 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 338 Managing Tasks By clicking the Add link you can add Task Categories and Task Types See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 342 Note If you Add a Task Category or Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes By clicking the Edit link you can edit the Task Type chosen in the Task Type drop down box See Also Editing a Task Type on page 344 Note If you edit a Task Type w
338. port on page 127 Also you can now filter report data by folder and email workflow reports See Selecting Content by Folder on page 112 and emailing Reports on page 115 e Improvements to HTML forms A wizard makes it easier to create HTML forms See Creating a New Form on page 141 New field types and validation give you more flexibility when creating forms See Inserting Form Fields on page 147 and Validation Options on page 155 You can assign a task to a form See Assigning a Task to a Form on page 170 e The Library search results can include a thumbnail of any images found See Displaying Search Results on page 194 e Macintosh support has been improved See Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients on page 529 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 i What s New in the 5 1 Release Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 ii Table of Contents What s New in the 5 1 Release ccc cceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET cccssseseseeeeeees 1 What is a Content Block ccccsseseeseesseeeeeeseeeseceneeeseenseeseoees 1 Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET ccccsssseecesseesssseeeeeseeseees 5 CRITE COMEN scrinia A 6 The Lifecycle of Content ccccssseeessesseesensseeesesseessenseeesenees 7 Logging IN and Out ecceeceeeeeeseeeeneecneeensesensese
339. ption Title of the new external hyperlink menu item URL Link The URL link for the external hyperlink For example www google com 5 Click the Save button E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 300 Working with Menus Editing a Submenu Menu Item To edit a Submenu menu item via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu for which you want to edit the menu items for by referencing to Viewing a Menu on page 301 2 The View Menu screen opens displaying a list of all menu items 3 Click the submenu icon 5 to display its contents To edit a See this section Content Editing a Content Menu Item on page 296 Library Editing a Library Asset Menu Item on page 300 Asset External Editing an External Hyperlink Menu Item on page 300 Hyperlink Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 279 Just like editing an existing menu you can view a menu via Viewing a Menu e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page When viewing a menu via the content or menu folder you get an internal view of information entered by menu creator When viewing via a navigation link on a Web page you get an external view of the menu as seen by anyone navigating Web site View a Menu via its Content Folder To access a menu via its content folder follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 301
340. pttConventions Terminaloc Browse Please select a replacement file If desired enter a Description for the new file To preview the file before you copy it click Preview file name The file is previewed in a separate window Click the X button in the top right corner of the screen to close it and return to the Workarea 10 To overwrite the current version of the file with this version click the Update button f 11 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer E xX WARNING You are about to overwrite a library file e we 3 The filename of the local file will be changed to match the existing filename This will ensure that web links to this library item do not break Continue 12 To overwrite the file click OK Library Link Searching Link searching indicates all content that includes a library link It is useful when you want to delete a library item With the click of a button you see all content that you need to update to reflect the change you are making Performing a Library Item Link Search To perform a library item link search follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 203 Library Folder 1 Access the View Library Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 198 2 Click the Link Search button a 3 A list of all content that references the library item is displayed You should edit that content before deleti
341. r p _ English U 5 4 Content Meta Data Schedule ccc D ret Apply Style Normal 200p A J 4 Click the calendar button next to the Start Date field Start Date None 5 A calendar pops up 6 Select the date and time when the content will become visible on the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 67 Scheduling Content to Begin and End http localhost cMs4oo fa Bf ee December 2005 Jan gt gt i Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu u E i s ail re yu ene Sees EEE eee ESS Ea PM w beaeeacsesecmsssmsers szes j Done Cancel 7 Click the Done button 8 The date and time appear in the Start Date field NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not go live at the intended time What Happens After I Set a Start Date After you save the content it appears on the Content Pending Start Date report which helps you keep track of content with a future start date See Also Content Pending Start Date Report on page 123 After you set a go live date and the content completes the approval chain two scenarios may occur e The content is new e The content already exists Each scenario is now explained Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 68 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Setting the Go Live Da
342. r screen Ce Title given to the calendar The title identifies the calendar within the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 317 Working with Calendars SS ID number automatically assigned to calendar This is used to display the calendar on a Web page Description given to the calendar Location Label Label for the calendar s location information This label appears on the calendar when a location is assigned to a calendar event Pu Su YYTE LI Ta El 1 E E Company meeting Location New York conf room Start 12 00 PM End 1 00 PM Start Time Label Label for the calendar s start time This appears on the calendar when a start time is assigned to a calendar event End Time Label Label for the calendar s end time data This appears on the calendar when an end time is assigned to a calendar event Table Properties A green check 4 means the calendar displays every day of the Display Weekends week A red X means the calendar displays weekdays only Forward Only If a green check appears next to Show only events that fall after the viewing day and the user viewing the calendar is not logged in the calendar only displays events from the viewing date forward No past events appear A logged in user can view past calendar events Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 318 Working with Calendars SS Event Type Label Indicates if event types are
343. r New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 154 Working with HTML Forms Ss Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field See Validation Options on page 155 If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is initially surrounded by red dashes in Data Entry mode If the user s response does not meet the validation criterion the field remains surrounded by red dashes The system administrator determines whether or not the user can save an invalid document Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s Message response to this field does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is telephone number the error message could be Please enter 7 or 10 digits It would appear if the user entered for example S061882 By default the error message Is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Validation Options NOTE Your Web developer can customize validation options For details see the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Guide section Customizing Validation Option Characteristics of Valid Response No validation Response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Non negative whole
344. r instead of the document server To do so click the Work Offline button 5 If you do the document remains in a checked out state and only you or a system administrator can check it in to work on it again When you check it in the file on your local computer is loaded into the Workarea As a result you can edit the document on your local computer anywhere without a network connection When you are ready to return it to the document server check it in save it or submit it for publishing You must check the document in on the same computer on which you checked it out NOTE A system administrator can check in any checked out document If he does the most recently published document gets checked in Editing an Office Document After an Office document is saved follow these steps to edit it 1 From the Workarea select the document s folder See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 From the View Contents of Folder screen click the document The View Content screen for the document appears If the document is checked in it appears on the Content tab in the Workarea but you cannot edit NOTE Your administrator controls the initial view of a document The following table shows the different ways you can preview a document Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 239 Using the Document Management Functionality Mode Image Preview Turned on View Content Test Asset Managemen
345. rame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus 2 The Menus Report screen displays all menus 5S Modules ONEONE ONEONE EONIA ESAO al ee 44 Collections Title ID Description Fath a Menus Sample menu 6 a Calendars Products 1 Products H5 MemberShips 3 Continue from the section Click the menu you want to view on page 302 View Menus via Navigation Link on a Web Page To access the menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page on which your Web developer inserted the link to display the menu 2 Click the link that launches the menu on the Web page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 305 Working with Menus 3 A DHTML menu is displayed along with all menu items on the menu For information on how to display a menu on a Web page refer to the section on menus in the Developers Manual Reordering Menu Items To rearrange the items on a menu follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu you want to rearrange See Viewing a Menu on page 301 Click the Reorder button 24 The Reorder Items screen appears Reorder Items Products BC Planes save Visit Ektron com The Trinity Exhaust Pipe RC Cheetah RE Sportster Products Page 4 gt 4 Click the item you want to move 5 Click the up arrow to move it up or the down arrow to move it down 6 When finished click the Save button I Ektron CMS400 NET User
346. rchived See Also Setting Archive Options on page 71 IMPORTANT The search only considers content forms and assets whose Content Searchable box is checked The Content Searchable box appears on the item s View Properties screen Specifying a Search Word or Phrase In the Search Text field enter one or more words that you want to find within content forms and assets The search returns content that includes these words Entering one or more words here is optional That is you can use fields on the lower portion of the screen to find content without knowing any words contained in the content For example you can find every piece of HTML content that was modified by a certain user within the last 30 days If you check off HTML and Form content you can enter no search criteria and get a list of all HTML and Form content on your site However if you enter search text the search only finds items that include the search text and satisfy other criteria on the screen See Also e The Noise Files on page 57 e Specifying Match Criteria on page 58 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 78 The Noise Files If you are searching for assets Windows has a noise file that screens from the search every single letter of the alphabet as well as common words Examples of common words are about after all and also Avoid entering such words into the Search Text field because the search ignores them Ektron CMS400 NET U
347. re e No validation response is not checked e Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked If you assign Cannot be blank the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 169 Working with HTML Forms SS Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field Message does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Implementing a Form on a Web Page After you create the form you need to link it to another page on your Web site You would insert the link as you would any form link See Adding a Library File to Content on page 206 Next open your Web Site navigate to the host page and click the hyperlink to access the form Now you can test the form and make Sure it works as you expected If needed you can return to edit mode change the form and test it again until you are happy with it Assigning a Task to a Form While tasks typically help Ektron CMS400 NET users track content activities you can also assign a task to users or user groups whenever a form is submitted For example your Web site offers a free product demonstration t
348. rent folder Your system administrator should be able to assist you in choosing a style sheet Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 63 Working with Folders and Content SS Template File Specify a template for the content in this folder The Name for this template is used when Quicklinks are generated for the Folder content See Also A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet on page 191 A drop down list of templates already being used by your Web site appears below this field You can select any template from the list If you leave this field blank the template from the parent folder is inherited Important If you change a folder s template that action does not update quicklinks for existing content in the folder It only affects new content created after the template is changed Your system administrator should be able to assist you in choosing a template XML By default content and folders inherit XML configuration Configuration settings from their parent folders To break or restore inheritance place or remove a check in the checkbox next to Inherit XML Configuration For more information see the Managing XML chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator s manual Should Office Specify if Office documents in this folder are published documents to the Web a
349. ria Selecting Content by Type After viewing any report you can select a content type and only view the content of that type that satisfies the other report criteria For example the Checked in Content Report can show only Office documents To select a content type follow these steps 1 From the Smart Desktop select a report 2 Use the file types pull down to select a file type 3 The screen refreshes and only displays files of that type Hi All Types All Types HTML Content Office Documents Managed Files UF orrris Sorting and Filtering Content Reports Upon viewing a report s content you have additional options for filtering report data by user and content folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 113 Content Workflow Reports The filtering options for each content report are identical The following section uses the Checked In Content report as an example Filter by User To display only content that was checked in by a user click the name of the user in the report display When you do the report redisplays showing only content which that user checked in Filter by Content Folder To display only content checked in to a selected folder click the folder on the report display When you do the report redisplays showing only content in that folder NOTE You can also select a folder and view reports in that folder only See Also Selecting Content by Folder on page 112 Perfo
350. rkarea select the Content folder See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 3 Select the CMS folder in which you want to place the documents being imported 4 On the View Contents of Folder screen click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view a list of items you can add 5 Select Office Documents 6 Click the Add Several Files button I Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 236 Using the Document Management Functionality View Contents of Folder Content Ele Ly La Qe ie oe E Bem All Types HTML Content Lanquage ID Status Date Modifiec Office Docu ments 1033 15 I 26 May 2004 1033 ef A 04 Dec 003 Home Paqe Content 1034 1 A 04 Dec 003 7 The View Contents of Folder screen splits into two sections resembling Windows Explorer The left side displays the folder structure of your PC and its network drives The right side displays files in the selected folder Edit Content Title y English fU 5 4 M Add to Quicklinks table M Content Searchable Content Summary Search Data Schedule i as Me ermi CO 400 doc 21 KB Microsoft Word Doct H au O la AssetData xml 52KB XML File aC a E pae l OF calendar day wording doc 21 KB Microsoft Word Doci Sl M bonera eels a gm Calendar Observations doc 30 KB Microsoft Word Doci T E i einai sides gm DMS documentation topics doc 31KB Microsoft Word Doci z pa Recycl
351. rkarea and Smart Desktop The Workarea is a central screen from which you can perform all activities within Ektron CMS400 NET From it you can e access the Smart Desktop e view the system s top level folders e navigate through the folder structure e perform actions on content This chapter describes using the Workarea and Smart Desktop through the following subtopics e Accessing the Workarea on page 15 e Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 20 e Navigating Within the Smart Desktop on page 22 e Sending Instant Email on page 28 Accessing the Workarea To access your Workarea follow these steps 1 Click the Workarea button at the bottom of the screen workarea or the Workarea button in the content s floating toolbar The Workarea appears 3 The following illustrates one of several screens that may appear in the Workarea Your system administrator determines which screen appears for you Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 15 The Workarea and Smart Desktop G axi Smart Desktop TE Smart Desktop SME Tasks ta Content Awaiting Approval O B Reports L Content Currently Checked Out 6 Tasks 2 Form Submission Tasks 1 fs Content To Expire 0 Closing the Workarea To close the Workarea click xj in the upper right corner of the window When you close the Workarea you return to the Ektron CMS400 NET view of your Web site You
352. rkflow Reports The reports folder contains several reports to help you manage the workflow of content through Ektron CMS400 NET In most cases you choose a report that corresponds to the content s status then view all content in that status If appropriate you can perform tasks on selected content For example you can check in checked out content This chapter explains how to access the reports folder in your Workarea set criteria that determine the information on the reports and actions you can perform on them See Also e Accessing the Reports Folder on page 108 e List of Standard Reports on page 109 e Common Report Topics on page 110 Accessing the Reports Folder To access the Reports folder follow these steps 1 Log in to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site and access the Workarea 2 To access the Smart Desktop from anywhere in Ektron CMS400 NET click the button in the top left corner circled below G 92 768 G 2 77 COMMS 44 Content 3 Click the Reports folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 108 Content Workflow Reports 4 Alist of available reports appears Smart Desktop aC Tasks a Reports Approvals Checked In Content Report Checked Out Content Report New Content Report Submitted Content Report Content Pending Start Date Report Refresh Reminder Expired Content Report Content To Expire Site Update Activity Content Report ee Note The App
353. rming an Action on Several Content Items You can perform the following actions on several or all content items in the Approvals Checked in and Checked out reports Report Action you can perform Checked in Submit for publication To select several reports check the relevant checkboxes illustrated below To select all reports click Select All Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 114 Content Workflow Reports Content isi Checked Out Content sia is Sane all sap all All Title ID Last Editor C Ektron Introduces an Enhanced Workflow Suite 18 Administrator AI C Ektron Supports Rapid and Efficient Globalization Strategies on the Web 19 Administrator 4 C Microsoft ASP NET Programming with Microsoft Visual C NET 25 Administrator Ay J Example of dynamic content within content 29 Administrator Ay Then click the button at the top left to perform the action on the selected content items Viewing Editing Content on the Report To view and possibly edit any content on a report click it It appears on the View Content screen illustrated below View Content ASP NET Unleashed Content a Meta Data Title 45P NET Unleashed Subject Computer Programming ISBN 067232542 Genre MNon FictlonPublisher Sams The View Content screen provides several toolbar options that you can perform on the content These options are explained in After you select the content you have the foll
354. rms Hidden text field Name Tool Tips Value Cancel Fields on the Hidden Text Field Dialog Ftd Bewerotion Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 H into this field Tool Tips Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field Value Enter the value that will be saved with this field when the form is submitted Inserting a Text Field Use a plain text field when you want the user to enter an unformatted free text response To insert a plain text field follow these steps 1 Place a plain text field lab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 146 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 153 Working with HTML Forms Plain Text Field Hame Field2 Tool Tips Field J Default value Validation Validation No validation Error Message Fields on the Plain Text Field Dialog a ne Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field Tool Tips Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it value here For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York ente
355. rom this page you can view sort update or add tasks To learn more about the View Tasks screen see Viewing a Task on page 347 To learn about sorting by Task Type see Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 350 Creating a Task via the Task Folder See Also Task Module Toolbar on page 357 To create a task follow these steps 1 Access your Tasks folder as described in Accessing the Tasks Folder on page 336 2 Click the Add button E5 3 The Add Task screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 337 Managing Tasks 4 Enter information for the task using the following table Field Description Task Title Enter a title for the task for example Update Content The title appears in the left column of the View Tasks screen Assigned To Your user name appears e If you do not have Redirect permissions you cannot assign tasks to other users If you have Redirect permissions your user name appears followed by Select User or Group To assign the task to yourself proceed to the next field To assign the task to someone else click Select User or Group and choose a user or group When you complete the screen an email is sent to the selected user or user group informing him of the assigned task Note email is only sent if email notification is enabled for Ektron CMS400 NET Select the language of the user who will perform the task Content If this task involves a
356. rovals Checked Out and Content to Expire Reports are also available _ from the Workarea The reports are described below List of Standard Reports Report Displays content in this For more information see status Approvals Requiring your approval Approvals Reports on page 118 Checked In Content Checked in Checked In Report on page 120 Checked Out Content Checked out Checked Out Report on page 120 New Content New that is created and saved New Content Report on page 121 but never published Submitted Content Submitted for publication Submitted Report on page 122 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 109 Content Workflow Reports Displays content in this For more information see status Pending Content Approved and pending a start date Content Pending Start Date Report on page 123 Refresh Reminder Report End date has been reached Refresh Reminder Report on page 124 Expired Content Expired date has been reached Expired Content Report on page 125 Content to Expire Will expire within specified number Content to Expire Report on of days page 125 Site Update Activity Content created or updated in Site Update Activity Report on Content Report selected folders and within a page 127 selected date range Asynchronous Log File A log report of the Asynchronous Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Report process manual gt Web Alert Feature gt Setting Up
357. rrow to the right of the Horizontal Alignment field Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Layout width alls Not Specified i Percent R Word Wrap i Pixels Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 494 Working with Table Cells 6 Click your choice from the list and click OK Setting Vertical Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the vertical alignment of a cell You have four choices e top e middle e bottom e along the baseline of the first line of text the term baseline is defined in Aligning the Picture on page 419 This example illustrates the choices Top pm Bottom Baseline To set vertical justification for a table cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu CE eS YS The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Vertical Alignment field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 495 Working with Table Cells Cell Properties Spar Rows Spanned Columns S panned 50 Layout width C Not Specified f Percent I Word Wrap C Pixels Horizontal Alignment x Vertical Alignment ki 6 Click your choice from the list and click OK Splitting a Cell You can divide a cell into two If you split a cell each cell occupies one h
358. rt features select the language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 270 3 Click the Collections button Z NOTE If you access the collection via the Collections folder you cannot choose the collection s folder It is automatically placed in the Content folder View Collections in Folder Human Resources eee Pe a ee oe pe ee ee ee ee eee ee Title ID Date Modified URL Link Main Jobs listing 2 04 Nov 2002 03 36 PM CMS300Sample hr asp Click the Add button Gp The Add Collection screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 261 Working with Collections Add Collection a Title New Collection Template CMS300Sample jindex asp Leave the above template empty if you wish to use the Quicklinks Description New collection with various content blocks M Include Subfolders 6 Complete the screen using the following table Field Description Assign a unique title to the collection Template Enter the default template for the collection This template is used to display the content of the links generated if no template is assigned in the custom function If left blank the links use their respective Quicklinks See Also Default Template vs Quicklinks on page 262 Add a more detailed description for the collection Include Subfolders Check if you want to add to the collection content in subfolders of the content folder
359. s 5 The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the document under a different language click the dropdown list and select the language nglsh LS Mar 2005 03 29 Mar 2005 01 14 6 Click the Add Content button 4 7 The Insert New Document Object screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 230 Using the Document Management Functionality Insert New Document Object a E E x atte f Create New Microsoft Excel Chart Cancel Csscs en ee Microzott Excel Worksheet Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Microsoft Word Document Result lnserts a new Image Document object into your k document NOTE The list of object types is determined by the applications installed on your computer For example an MS Project file type only displays if MS Project is installed 8 Ifthe document does not yet exist check the Create New button Then select the type of document you want to create and press OK If the document already exists see Importing One Office Document on page 234 9 The application assigned to the document type appears within Ektron CMS400 NET 10 Enter a Title and add content to the document 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 12 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule and comments See Also e Adding a Content Summary
360. s w Brightness Mel Brightness Choose Color Standard Toolbar Button pes Description Lets you choose the color of an annotation before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 433 Choose Font Color Ei ES Basic colors al See nel ee DE f imi i ie oe ff ioe ff I m Custom colors iLL aS a a HEBER Define Custom Colors gt Cancel Standard Toolbar Button Description Dialog Box A ina Editing Images Lets you choose the color of annotation text before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 434 i tale ji Bold F Arial Unicode M5 Bold Italic F Batang Berling Antiqua O Book Antiqua Color Depth Standard Toolbar Button Description Changes an image s color depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 456 Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Editing Images 435 Editing Images k Color Depth Contrast Standard Toolbar Button Description Increases or decreases an image s contrast that is the difference between light and dark ar
361. s right click the mouse and click Preferences When you do a dialog box appears in which you can enter formatting information about the HTML code View Preferences i i Cancel Font Size Font Name Caune These settings will be used whenever you view as HTML The settings are ignored when you view the page in WYSIWYG mode and when the user views the page 3 To return to normal view click the View as WYSIWYG button E or right click the mouse and click View WYSIWYG Editing a Section of a Page If you want to edit only a section of the HTML on your Web page follow these steps Select the portion of your Web page that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Edit Source from the menu The HTML code appears Edit the HTML code as desired Click OK Ce Se YS Inserting Source lf you want to insert HTML source code into your Web page follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 512 Working with HTML 1 Place the cursor at the spot on the page where you want to insert the HTML Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Source from the menu The Insert Source dialog box appears Paste or type your HTML code 5 Click OK Cleaning Source Code eWebEditPro XML lets you clean the HTML source code for your Web page You would typically use this feature after entering HTML text or pasting HTML code into eWebEditPro XML from another application The Cl
362. s they are arranged alphabetically Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 134 Working with HTML Forms WARNING The functionality described in this section is not supported when using an Apple Macintosh for editing content Ektron CMS400 NET provides powerful online form capabilities allowing you to create an online dialog with visitors Now anyone in your organization not just a developer or Webmaster can create and deploy Web forms to capture visitor information Support marketing strategies by getting feedback on their needs Follow up on their interest in your products and services Register people for events Form capabilities include e Creating a form and its postback message e Adding validation criteria to form fields e Automatically assigning tasks for follow up activities to form submissions e Reporting on form information e Exporting results to Microsoft Excel A sample form appears below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 135 Working with HTML Forms BBE MAA oo Fe 2868 AVE B ns om i gi Tl gi il I ih Mormal 2010 pt z A Ja Braale a eE ea EE Te Select Button M f fab pe E lt l Request for White Paper a Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e maill white paperd required fields IMPORTANT to avoid delays please provide accurate informatio EE Company Personal Website Doo Ere
363. s 382 add button calendar event 34 library items 34 task 34 workarea toolbar 34 content block button 34 folder button 34 screen buttons 47 responding to fields 47 tabs 48 content block 46 address email user editing 360 AddSubMenu 289 alignment cell 493 image 419 table 474 text 381 Apple see macintosh approval chain example 89 approvals toolbar button 34 approve all toolbar button 34 button floating toolbar 4 workarea toolbar 34 one content block 86 several content blocks 88 approving content 85 from approval report 118 approving file document management system 252 archived content toolbar button 34 archiving definition 70 options 70 restoring archived content 71 assign task button floating toolbar 4 auto hide feature of Smart Desktop 27 B background color applying to text 380 cell applying 487 deleting 488 removing from text 380 table applying 476 deleting 477 background image cell deleting 490 inserting 489 table deleting 478 inserting 477 bidirectional editing 383 blur WeblmageFX command 431 bold toolbar option 380 bookmarks 501 border image color 418 thickness 418 border color cell 486 content block meaning 540 table 479 border size cell 483 table 481 brightness WeblmageFX command 432 broken links finding 53 bullet toolbar option 380 button text displaying in title bar 361 buttons adding to menu 386 rearranging on menu 388 removing from menu 386 C calendars add e
364. s PDF files This property appears when added to this the Publish as PDF property is checked in Settings gt folder be Configuration gt Setup Sais as See Also Updating Setup Information on page 22 Note This property only appears if Ektron s Document Management functionality is installed For more information see PDF Generation on page 849 Metadata tab See Entering Custom Metadata on page 79 Web Alerts tab See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alerts Feature 6 Click the Save button fA Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 64 Working with Folders and Content Deleting Folders You can delete folders that are no longer needed NOTE The ability to delete a folder is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Delete Folder button i on the View Contents of Folder screen you do not have permission to do so CAUTION Deleting a content folder permanently deletes its content quicklinks and subfolders To delete a content folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder you want to delete Click the Delete Folder button i A confirmation message appears lf you are sure you want to delete the content folder click OK m a w ry The screen is refreshed and the folder is deleted Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 65 Scheduling Content to Begin and End scheduling Content to Begin and
365. s disk space and the number of copied library images NOTE Overwriting images is a permission that your system administrator may or may not assign to you To overwrite an image follow the procedure described in Overwriting Files on page 201 The only difference is that you overwrite an image instead of a file NOTE You can only overwrite an image with another image of the same extension that is gif gt gif not jpg gt gif Adding Images to Your Content Once an image is added to the library users can add it to content To add an image to content follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 204 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file The image is placed into the picture properties dialog box where you can change it before inserting it For information about the picture properties dialog box see Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 411 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 209 Library Folder Quicklinks and Forms For a definition of the terms quicklinks and forms see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 188 Adding a Quicklink or Form to Content After new content is created users can insert a quicklink or form to it into any other content To do so follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 204 The only difference is that you add a quicklink or form instead of a file
366. s of two or Merging Two Cells on page 497 more selected cells into one Split Cell Divides a cell into two Each cell Splitting a Cell on page 496 occupies one half the size of the Original cell Table Properties Displays and lets you edit table The Table Properties Dialog Box on properties such as the number of page 463 rows and columns cell padding and borders Cell Properties Displays and lets you edit cell The Cell Properties Dialog Box on properties such as width and page 465 alignment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 462 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Table Properties Dialog Box The Insert Table dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a table s appearance Insert T able Size Rows E Columns ib Fan x Cancel Layout Borders 3 75 Use Default Color C Not Specified f Percent C Pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding Horizontal Alignment Cell Spacing Custom Background Background Color W Unassigned Background Image From File The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 463 Field s Size Rows Columns Layout Width Layout Horizontal Alignment Background Color Background Image Borders Use Default Color Border Color Cell Padding C
367. s the compared published or staged content Save Saves a copy in HTML format on your local machine or network When saved as a physical file the HTML may be edited However the changes are not saved to the Web Server Note The save option saves the version of the content you are viewing Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 97 Comparing Versions of Content oe tome e a Setup Opens setup dialog box to configure the settings Typically only an administrator would use this For more information see Setup on page 98 a Displays additional information about the compare feature Closes the window Setup Click the Setup button a to open the setup dialog box Typically a system administrator would edit these settings w Ektron eWebDiff f Compare visual aspect f Compare source code Whitespace Other C ignore All f Smart Detect f Detect All ignore Case gnore format Iv attributes You can change the setup options to better suit your needs The following table explains each option Ci ccai Kaaa Compare Options Compare visual Compares content as it would appear ona aspect Web page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 98 Comparing Versions of Content ee Compare source Displays compared content as source HTML code Whitespace Options Ignore All Blank whitespace characters are ignored Smart Detect One or more consecutive w
368. s them NOTE Your system administrator determines which library folders you can access and which functions you can perform on library items within the folders Button Description For more information see wooo Search library Searching the Library on page 192 G View the library s properties Library Folder Properties on page 191 Bh screen fs Add an image file quicklink or Copying Files to the Library on hyperlink to the library page 196 Select the type of Library file to A JImages r 4 work with Library Folder Properties To view the library folder s properties follow these steps 1 Click the Properties button E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 191 Library Folder 2 The Library Management screen appears Library Management m Image Extensions gif jpeg jpg bmp ong Image Upload Path This path is relative to the site CMS300Sample UploadediImages Physical Path cInetoub wwwrootCMeSs00Sample uploadedimages Verified File Extensions ppt odt xls dac File Upload Path This path is relative to the site CMS300S ample UploadedFiles Physical Path cINetpub wy wrootCe Ss s00Sample uploadedFiles Verified 3 The screen displays the following settings Le a Image Extensions File extensions of images that can be copied to the library folder For example gif and jpg Image Upload path The folder to which library i
369. screen you can delete several content items at one time To do so follow these steps 1 Access the content folder that contains the content you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Content button L 3 The Delete Contents of Folder screen is displayed Check boxes next to content items you want to delete NOTE Check off the box in the header cell to select all or deselect all 5 Click the Delete Content button CA 6 A confirmation message is displayed 7 Click OK to continue Checking for Broken Quicklinks The Check Links button 8 locates all content that includes a Quicklink to the displayed content This feature is useful before deleting content because it informs you of every content item that will include a dead link after you delete the selected content You should then edit that content and remove or change the obsolete Quicklinks To use the link checker follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 53 Working with Folders and Content 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose links you want to check as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Click the Check Links button 3 A page lists each content item that links to the current content Click the title to access the View Content page for the selected content From there you can remove or change the Quicklink searching the Workarea You can search any folder to easily and quickly locat
370. sensitive menu of all commands Form Comment SABHA oo Ye aAA AZ Yeo Normal 2010 pt A J BFAA l l w TIE c FE A Select Button xI Place form elements here E a b Checkbox Field Plain Text Field Hidden Field Pass yyord Textarea Choices Field Select List Field 2 Done loading Calendar Field al al E iii Ws e Inserting Form Fields The final screen of the Forms setup lets you arrange the screen so that it collects exactly the information you want To create the screen you insert fields that prompt a site visitor to enter information Then add buttons that let the user submit the data on the screen If you chose a sample form at the beginning the screen includes fields If you did not the screen has only a Submit button NOTE In addition to inserting fields you can add explanatory text lines images etc onto the form screen If you want to place fields in columns insert a table and place the fields within table cells The table below explains each field type you can enter Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 147 Inserts this kind of field Checkbox Hidden Text Field Text Field Metadata Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Description User s response is either checked or unchecked Information a site visitor doesn t need to know about Free text field user cannot format text A password field Same as Te
371. ser Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 294 Working with Menus 3 The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all items on the menu Tho following illustration lists the four types of menu options For more information on working with these options see Icons on the View Menus Screen on page 293 View Menu Products Pc Planes B P T RE Lilly D LIRC Redstar 3 0 L save 3 0 isit Ektron com External hyperlinkj The Trinity Exhaust Pipe D Internal web page DRC cheetah Y t LIRC Sportster amp I Es Pave Da lore Info Editing a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the template where you inserted the link to display the menu Click the Menu Navigation link title on the Web page 3 A DHTML menu is displayed along with all menu items on the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 295 Working with Menus 4 Click Edit Menu 5 The Edit Menu Item screen appears 6 See Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on page 293 Editing Types of Menu Items This section explains how to edit the following types of menu items e content on your Web site e library asset e link to an external Web site e submenu Editing a Content Menu Item To edit a content menu Item via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu you want to edit b
372. ser Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 57 Working with Folders and Content To find the list of noise words search your computer for files named noise xxx where xxx is a three letter abbreviation for the language For example noise eng lists English noise words You can open a noise file with a simple word processor program such as Notepad to view any language s noise words You can also edit the file For example you can remove words that users should be able to search on Specifying Match Criteria NOTE This field is only applicable if you entered one or more words in the Search Text field From this dropdown list select criteria for how the search word or words must appear within the content of the files being searched 1 LIDFary 1 INCIIOe Afcnlyed Search Text Seg All ords i Al We of cd 5 Any org i Exact Phrase f Your choices are described below Title Choice A search returns content that has For more information All Words all words in the search field All Words on page 59 Any Word any word in the search field Any Word on page 59 Exact Phrase all words in the order specified in the search field Exact Phrase on page 59 Contains match partial any part of any word in the search field Contains Match Partial words Words on page 59 Match Criteria Examples Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 58 Working with Folders and Content The examples
373. seryer system UAC AAA AAA A A SERWER LICENSE INSTRUCTIONS Caii koss AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA 1 Run the cMs400severLicense exe utility which was delivered with this 2 A screen appears Copy the ServerIb from the top text field 3 Email to license ektron com the SerwerIiD with your request for a server You can use the host application to edit the file then switch to the View Content screen to insert supporting information such as summary and metadata Use standard toolbar buttons to perform actions like view history submit for publishing and delete For more information see Working with Managed Files on page 241 security For the purposes of security documents are treated like other content Your system administrator applies security to each folder determining which user groups can perform which tasks on the content in a folder For more information see the Setting Permissions chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Working with Office Documents This section explains how to work with MS Office documents through the following subtopics Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 228 Using the Document Management Functionality e Notes on Working with Office Documents on page 229 e Creating a New Office Document on page 229 e Importing One Office Document on page 234 e Importing Several Office Documents on page 236 e Importing Files Individually vs Several at
374. sil This chapter explains how to perform all form actions through the following topics al E ri We A H e Overview of Form Processing on page 137 e The Structure of Form Data on page 137 e Accessing the Forms Folder on page 139 e Creating a New Form on page 141 e Creating a Form s Content on page 144 e Form Validation on page 150 e Form Fields on page 151 e Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 170 e Assigning a Task to a Form on page 170 e Viewing Form Reports on page 173 e Exporting Form Reports on page 177 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 136 Working with HTML Forms e Viewing Form Information on page 177 e Editing a Form on page 183 e Deleting a Form on page 185 e Form Module Toolbar on page 185 Overview of Form Processing Step Formore information see 1 Create a form Creating a New Form on page 141 2 Assign it to a Web page Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 170 3 Site visitor goes to your Web site and completes form Form is mailed to an email address saved to a database or both 4 View submitted form data and Viewing Form Reports on page 173 download it to a spreadsheet The Structure of Form Data Forms reside within the Forms folder or one of its subfolders see example below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 137 Working with HTML Forms gt
375. sions on page 106 View History View summary list of all versions The Content History Report rr Window on page 104 Remove XSLT Remove XSLT applied to XML Removing Applied XSLT on XML Content Only content page 106 Actions are explained below Restoring a Previous Version NOTE The ability to restore content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Restore button p on the View Content History screen you do not have permission to do so Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 105 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content 1 Select an historical version of the content that you want to restore from the left pane Click the Restore button Ep The content history window closes and you return to the View Content page or the Web page with the content in a checked in status 4 lf desired check out the content to make additional changes Select the workflow to perform on the content 6 When the historical version is placed in the approval chain and approved it is published to the Web site Comparing Historical Versions After you select an historical version of content you can view the differences between it and the current version To compare an historical version follow these steps 1 Select an historical version of the content from the left pane 2 Click the View Differences button ER The historical and the current versions are compared To learn mor
376. sk Type to edit 3 Click the Edit link next to the Task Type drop down box roe eT EE CEE TE ET EEE TEE Tee EET EE EET Ee ETT ET TE ESET ET TTT TPES Te TEE SEE ESET T ET EET TEESE ELITE TOTES TET TET NE TEE ETT EIT SPT eee eerie ere ere ete laa qj ete poet ra Pike Peet in Pome ee Pot ee Peete Pout ie Pokies fob es fob ttn feted ee fue tee e To Pas i ni e yf atte gaa T ani pet a e aaa a e a i ea a eaa Pom tee ea a ai ei Assigned To E jedit Select User or Group Language English U S Content Select Priority Task Category Task Type Start Date oOo Due Date ae Description ol l 4 The Edit Task Type screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 344 Managing Tasks Edit Task Type Task Type Task Type Description Documents that need to be reviewed Task Type Availability Not Available From this screen you can edit the following e Task Type e Task Type Description e Task Type Availability See Also Task Type Availability on page 343 NOTE As a user if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 5 Edit the information 6 Click Sa
377. sks add button 34 assign button floating toolbar 4 assigning to content block 338 to HTML form 170 to user 338 comments adding 353 updating 354 creating via content block 346 via task folder 337 definition 335 deleting 355 due date 340 editing 352 priority assigning 338 relationship to content blocks 335 start date 339 state assigning 339 toolbar buttons 357 viewing 347 options 348 sorting options 351 template link field on Add Edit Menu screen 282 text aligning 381 in columns 460 within a cell 493 direction menu 383 indenting 381 remove formatting 380 replacing 398 searching 398 selecting 374 WebImageFX command 452 title bar displaying button text 361 toolbars buttons 34 375 collections 260 customizing 385 floating 4 buttons 4 redisplay 389 restore 389 trademark character inserting 379 twain acquire WeblmageFX command 453 twain source WeblmageFX command 454 U underline toolbar option 382 undo toolbar option 376 WebImageFX command 454 uppercase words spell checking 405 URL link field on Add Edit Menu screen 281 user email address editing 360 language editing 360 users profile customizing work page height 361 customizing work page size 360 customizing work page width 361 landing page after login 361 see profile set Smart Desktop as start location 362 V validation HTML form 150 version number viewing 381 vertical flip WeblmageFX command 455 View Content Awaiting Approval 118 vi
378. soft Word Document doc New Text Document txt amic On Drag files into this window and A 1 Example anetBasic s Release hase Orc After you drag and drop the files the following screen appears ME Uploading Uploading file 4 of 5 Ektron DMS Ene nnn OUND OIE File Name New Microsoft Excel Worksheet_xls Location C Documents and Settings shughes1 Bytes Transfered 7694 of 7 694 When DM uploads the files they appear in the Workarea lf you do not see a file you selected to upload check the following e your administrator allows the file type to be uploaded to DM Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 249 Using the Document Management Functionality e the Asset Types dropdown box is set to the type of file you are looking for Files upload to the correct category regardless of what is selected when you drag and drop them Drag and Drop File Uploading Vs the Add Content Buttons e Drag and drop lets you add files quickly without having to fill in details The details can be entered later e A file added via drag and drop is submitted into the approval process for that folder e Drag and drop requires fewer mouse clicks You choose a folder use Windows Explorer to find the files and drag and drop them The files are then added to DM Alternatively by using the Add Content buttons 73 Le you can add supporting information summary comment and metadata while uploading When
379. ssary update the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 279 5 Click the Save button I Editing a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Navigate to the Web page that contains the link to display the menu Click the menu link 3 The menu appears Click the Edit option The View Menu screen for the menu appears Click the Edit button CY The Edit Menu screen is displayed os oe et SS As necessary update the fields by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 279 9 Click the Save button 1 Editing a Menu Item You can edit a menu item via Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 292 Working with Menus e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page See Also Working with Menus on page 274 Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder To edit a menu item from its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 301 Click the menu you want to edit The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all menu items View Menu Products oS 2t LY OF amp view In English US Tj Ad Submenu S2c Cars B OC FRc Planes B P Ej LIRC Lilly G LIRC Redstar gt 0 E save D J he Trinity Exhaust Pipe amp
380. st a Press Releases collection error qif 1 6ED6 4506 B441 0EECEO2DAFEA gif 6 H Purchase Orders explorerd GIF C B364 498C 9044 CoO0B366BF86 G1F 6 replication Luplnadedimages replication gif ink RHA Fate bare So LEa j Sl i es E per eee ean 6 From the file types dropdown list select the kind of file you want to insert 7 All library files of that type in the selected folder appear on the screen 8 Click the file you want to insert NoTE You can preview the file by clicking the preview button La 9 Click the insert button to insert the file 10 A hyperlink to the file appears in your content y X nbsp amp TM Punctuation rules You can click the link to open the file Adding a File to the Library and Inserting it into Content Use this procedure to insert an image into content that has not yet been copied to the library This procedure inserts the item into the library then into the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 206 Library Folder 1 Invoke the editor by adding or editing content in Ektron CMS400 NET Edit Content in Folder Press Releases Title Ektron Announces Winner of All Stars Customer Compet English U S amp Apply Style Normal x 2 10pt A Qe e TUA X BABBAR PA o a a fan PJ Dad E HM amp p M W a 2 4 mp oem gi OE amp g Ektron Announces Winner of All Stars Customer Competition m
381. st the alignment of the picture Alignment For more information see Aligning the Picture on page 419 WARNING If you substantially adjust the picture s height and or width the picture may be distorted when users view your Web page Pixels A pixel is a single point in a graphic image Computer monitors display pictures by dividing the screen into thousands of pixels arranged in rows and columns The pixels are so close together that they appear connected Below is an image shown at regular size and then enlarged so you can see the pixels that make up the picture Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 417 Inserting Images regular size enlarged to show pixels Setting a Border To add a border around a picture enter the border s thickness in pixels in the Border Thickness field on the Picture Properties dialog box Layout width fi G Height fi b Border Thickness p Alignment Mot set b Reset Here is a picture with a 1 pixel border Ml Here is the same picture with a 10 pixel somes Wl lf the picture is not a hyperlink its border is black If the picture is also a hyperlink the border is the same color as a hyperlink for example blue or purple if visited Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 418 Inserting Images Aligning the Picture To align a picture use the Alignment field on the Picture Properties dialog box Layout width
382. st user who accessed the content Each folder also provides the following toolbar options NOTE Depending on your permissions you may not see all toolbar buttons E Add Content Opens the editor and creates new Adding Content on content in the current folder page 46 men Add several Open a new window that lets find and Using the Document oik content items transfer non CMS files to Ektron Management CMS400 NET Functionality on page 227 Add Folder Adds a subfolder to the current folder Adding Subfolders on page 62 E Archived If current content is being displayed Setting Archive Content switch to display archived content Options on page 71 If archived content is being displayed switch to display current content kil Delete Folder Deletes the current folder Deleting Folders on f pageb Note You cannot delete the Content folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 39 Working with Folders and Content Collections View and work with collections Working with assigned to this folder Collections on page 256 Fes Menus View and work with menus assigned Working with Menus to this folder on page 273 Search Look for content in the folder Searching the Workarea on page 54 View View the folder s properties Properties Viewing Content You can view all content in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Viewing content allows you to see the content metad
383. strator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content NOTE Your screen may differ from the example below Your system administrator determines the appearance of the Edit Metadata screen Edit Content in Folder Content ec b nl gt k cms Developer English U 5 9 Content Summary Meta Data Schedule Comment title CMS Developer Title _ Defaut current character count 13 500 mas keywords leweaogo NET CHS _ Default current character count 15 500 max Separator Character J description eys4aoo developer section Defaut current character count 24 500 max Separator Character J Not Included Included 4 Edit the metadata Note that Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 83 Adding or Editing Metadata e Required fields are red and marked with an asterisk You must place at least one response in such fields before the content can be saved e Your system administrator may prevent you from editing a field In this case the field has a gray background and you cannot place the cursor there e Fields may appear in two columns In this case the system administrator provides a list of terms that you can apply to the content You can only select terms from the list you cannot enter free text One column is labeled Not Included and the other Included Move terms between lists by clicking the arrow gt g
384. sure the settings apply to the default user End Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select an end date for the series of recurring events Event will occur Select the frequency of the event from among the choices 4 Finish your edits Start Time Start Time on page 326 Display the times for the event Display the times for the event on page 326 Hyperlink Hyperlink on page 327 Launch Link in New Browser Launch link in a new browser on page 327 Event Types Event Type on page 327 5 Click the Save button E Viewing a Calendar Event Once events are added to a calendar you can easily view them To view a calendar event follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 329 Working with Calendars 1 Access the Show Calendar screen for the calendar that contains the event you want to view as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 320 2 Place the cursor on the event you want to view April May 2004 Thursday weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Star 12 00 AM End 1 00 PM weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Star 12 00 AM End 1 00 PM 18l weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Start 12 00 AM End 1 00 PM 4 The View Events screen appears listing all calendar events for that date If an event is part of a series of recurring events the following icon
385. system administrator can add or remove the Accessibility button from the Insert Table dialog Size Cancel Roms Columns Accessibility i LL aaa a en r Borders ane 7 The Accessibility dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 520 Section 508 Compliance Accessibility Ea Heading Rove 0 Heading Columns 0 Cancel Summary en Caption Horizontal Caption Alignment Vertical Caption Alignment Accessibility Dialog Respond to the fields in the dialog They are described below a aa Heading If you want your table to have a horizontal header enter Rows the number of rows that it should occupy Beginning with the top all cells in the specified number of rows are designated as table headers Heading If you want your table to have a header enter the Columns number of columns that it should occupy Beginning with the left column all cells in the specified number of columns are designated as table headers Summary If desired enter the table summary Non visual browsers can use the summary to explain the contents of the table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 521 Section 508 Compliance Field Description O Caption If desired enter the table caption The caption appears centered below the table when viewed Horizontal If desired enter the caption s horizontal alignment Caption Alignment Gee
386. t 3 os Tt Le amp L m A vi p 3 view English U S v ne Ektron Asset Control Preview Only il al al j i 4 Test Word Doc for Asset Management Preview Turned off View Content Test Asset Management Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 240 Using the Document Management Functionality Click the Edit button C 5 The document opens in the host application Edit the document as well as its summary metadata schedule tasks or comments See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 73 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 e Managing Tasks on page 335 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 66 7 If desired edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 232 8 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would any content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 232 Working with Managed Files This section explains how to work with managed files through the following subtopics e Creating a New Managed File on page 241 e Importing One Managed File on page 241 e Importing Several Managed Files on page 243 e Editing a Managed File on page 245 Creating a New Managed File Unlike an Office document you cannot create a managed file within Ektron CMS400 NET Instead you must create it on your computer using the host application After creating the file import
387. t Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 90 Approving Declining Content Sports Editor logs into Ektron CMS400 NET navigates to his desktop where he sees a link Content Awaiting Approval User jedit pa A ee Ble Sais x Ne ee Basil he wv anc fs ic Pen a8 ca LA ee EN SEES EE NEST LN wee OEE ESET EA OEE A AEEA ene TS MOR ee NH ah EESO M EEEO Wyn EEEE ay OEE Hwee Winn eva EEE EET fee w NWN Rea UN ea wet ew Payee eM Smart Desktop for John Edit Content Awaiting Approval 2 L Content Currently Checked Out 2 Tasks 0 He clicks the link and sees all content awaiting his approval The approvals folder window displays information such as title who submitted it go live date etc The Sports editor clicks the submitted content View All Content Approval Content Meta Data A Alatusza MET Oantant The View Content Awaiting Approvals window appears listing all information necessary to decide whether to approve or decline the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 91 Approving Declining Content At the approval window the Sports Editor has several options Send content to next approver in approval chain Approve Ea ma oe 1 Send email to creator notifying him her that Decline E ai content was declined 2 Remove content from approval chain Invokes the editor From here the approver can change the content For demonstration purposes we ll choose
388. t and lt lt Or move all terms between lists by clicking All gt gt e You may see a semi colon as a separator character Use the separator character to separate items in a field e lf default metadata is defined for a specific data type you can click the Default button at the bottom of each field to restore it e Below each field is a Characters Left field which counts the number of metadata characters You cannot exceed the maximum 500 characters 5 Click the Save button 1 6 The View Content screen reappears The content is now in a checked out state to you For the changes to take effect on the Web site check in the content and submit it to the approval chain See Also Approving Declining Content on page 85 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 84 Approving Declining Content Approving Declining Content Your site administrator establishes an approval chain for each folder or even specific content items The approval chain is a list of people or groups who must approve new or edited content before it is published to the Web site If a user group is part of an approval chain any member of the group can approve the content The administrator also determines the sequence of approvers in the chain When a new or edited content is submitted to the approval chain it is reviewed by users who may e change it e approve or decline it e publish it to the Internet it is published
389. t and End dates Web Alerts Add or modify Web Alert Information Description Insert content For more information about using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor see Introduction to eWebEditPro XML on page 365 Enter or edit the summary for the content See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 74 Enter or edit this content s metadata Note All required metadata must be added before the content can be submitted into the approval chain See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 78 Briefly describe the content or comment on changes made when editing content The history comment appears on the View Content and Content History screens If you do not want to submit the content to the approval chain immediately enter when it will be submitted See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 67 If appropriate enter a date when the content will no longer be viewable on the Web site See Also Setting an End Date on Content on page 70 See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 48 Working with Folders and Content Editing Content Ektron CMS400 NET content can be in any of several statuses as described in Appendix A Content Statuses on page 523 You can only edit content for which you have permission and in one of the following statuses e published e checked in e checked out by
390. t button to insert it Using Image to Replace Title Text Alternatively you can have the image replace the menu text so that only the image appears to indicate the kind of information on the menu To do this check the Use image instead of a title checkbox These fields are not required CMS400Example Image Link i Use image instead of a title ams Fit icMs4annexamnied Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 280 Working with Menus SS URL Link After you create a menu your developer links it to text or an image on a Web page by modifying a page template As a result when a user reading that Web page moves the cursor over the text or image the menu appears In the illustration below the menu appears when the user moves the cursor over Products Product Support Hews Careers You can also assign a URL link to a menu using this field If you do and the user clicks the link text or image he jumps to the specified page For example in this field you assign the product landing page CMS400Example products aspx In the illustration above if the user moves the cursor over Products the assigned menu appears However if the user clicks Products as indicated by the hand he jumps to CMS400Example products aspx Entering the Path to the Landing Page This path must be relative For example 400sample index aspx This URL path can be a static template path like the on
391. t is checked in it is accessible to all users who have permissions to edit it They can check it out and change it Keep in mind that the content seen on the template is not the same as the content in the editor view Content ktre Title About Us Checked In by Application Administrator Ektron is a recognized international leader in Web content authoring and publishing Ektron s easy to use affordable a full featured content management systems address the c organizational need of simplifying dynamic Web content mananement Wath Eetron s hroweser haced csoliitinns hrisiness See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 89 Each option you may perform on checked in content is described below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 542 Appendix A Content Statuses ee a ee Edit Check out the content to Editing Content on page 49 change it Edit Summary Edit its summary Adding a Content Summary on page 73 Edit Metadata Edit its metadata Adding or Editing Metadata on page 77 Submit Publish Submit content into approval chain If you are last approver in the approval chain the publish button appears If you click it the content is immediately posted to Web site published yet View Published button displays content live on the Web site Delete Submit a request to delete the Example of an Approval Chain content into approval chain If on page 89 you are the l
392. tal Alignment scccsssseesssenseesseees 474 Table BackgroundS sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 476 Setting Table Borders cccssssececssseesseenseescesneeeseeeneeseeennees 479 Working with Table Cells ccccsssseesssseeceeseeseeseesenees 483 Specifying the Width of a Cell cscseeesssseeeeeeseeeseeenees 483 Lute e tyre a Celerra 484 DELENO a C Beemer ment ene meee aa 485 Setting a Cell s Border Color ccccccsssseecsssseeseeeeeesseeees 486 Specifying a Cell s Background Color cccssssseeseeseeseeeees 487 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell ccsssseeeeeees 489 Spanning Rows or Columns ccccscceeecseeseeeseenseeseenseesseeees 491 Aligning Text Within a Cell ccscesssssseeeceeseeeseeeseeseeeenees 493 SPINO a Cel oara i a a 496 Merging Two Cells vo stcsecssitncvisaisenainsnevigsntanakeieauimsssisusiianvadaostinaens 497 OR N a a E E ETE 498 Setting Cell Padding and Spacingd cccesseeeecesseeeseeenees 499 Using BOG Eso cara ttanscetisscaintesinies eisai 501 Creating a BOOKmall k sccsssssececsesseeceensseesennssesseesseeeseass 501 Changing the Destination WiINdOW ccssssseseesseeseeees 504 Using HyperiNKS ct scesantesteceucasvosetccced setcertoedneneecenccevateeresseeds 505 Creating a Hyper link ccccccsssseeecceseeeeceeseeeseesseesse
393. tart location in the enter the Workarea click inside this check box Workarea See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 20 If you leave this check box blank when you enter the Workarea you go to the folder of the content specified at the Landing Page after login field Inherit Task This area indicates your task permissions and if you Permissions From inherit them from user groups to which you belong User Groups For more information seethe Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Managing Tasks section Task Permissions User Properties the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Custom User Properties See Custom User Properties in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual 7 Click the Update button i Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 362 Online Help Online Help Online help provides access to important and useful information about using Ektron CMS400 NET Help is provided in two formats e online help accessible from most screens by clicking the help currently viewing Online help is in HTML format so it opens in the browser you use to surf the internet After viewing a help topic you can browse to related topics as well as access a table of contents index and search to expand your quest for information See Also Accessing Online Help on page 363 e online manuals can be viewed searched and printed like a paper manual O
394. tback Message on page 143 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 142 Working with HTML Forms e Redirect to a file or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested An example of a page is one that lets the visitor download your product e Redirect to an action page and forward form data Use this option to redirect posted form data to an action page The action page must satisfy these criteria its extension must be aspx it must reside in the current domain its path must not be fully qualified The posted data is saved to the database before it goes to the action page 9 Now that you have completed information about the form you can enter the form s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 144 Composing the Postback Message The postback message can contain text or graphics just like any other HTML content Typically tt acknowledges the site visitor s completion of the form For most sample forms provided sample text appears in the editor Modify it as you wish using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor to change the font size style color insert library items etc You can also insert fields that retrieve form information upon its submission Use the Insert Fields pull down to do this illus
395. te button Inserting a Picture from Your Computer Use the lower left corner of the dialog box to insert pictures from your computer and any network folder available to your computer into the editor Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 413 Inserting Images To Select a Local File Browse Enter a description tor the file r NOTE You can only select files in the To Select a Local File field if your computer has permission to upload files to the server To insert a picture from your computer follow these steps Click the Browse button 2 Navigate to the file that you want to insert and press Open to insert it Your Webmaster can set a maximum size in kilobytes for images If you select an image that exceeds the maximum an error message appears and you cannot insert it Your Webmaster can also restrict the type of image file you can insert For example if your Webmaster does not authorize you to insert bitmap bmp files and you try to do so an error message lists valid file extensions and you cannot insert the image AN You have not selected a file with one of the valid extensions gihjpg png ped iit 3 Click in the Enter a description for the file field Enter a title to describe the file 4 After you insert the picture the title appears in the dialog box s top left corner to identify the picture to you and all users connected to the same Web server Ektron CMS400
396. te on New Content When you set a go live date on new content it becomes viewable on the specified date and time as long as it completes the approval chain If a user accesses the page that contains the content before then he sees only the template This occurs within Ektron CMS400 NET and when the content is viewed on the Web site Setting the Go Live Date on Existing Content When you set a go live date for changes made to existing content and it completes the approval chain the content has a grey border within Ektron CMS400 NET until the date specified When you view content on the Web site you see the previously published version When the go live date occurs the new content replaces the previously published version and the content s status changes to Active setting an End Date on Content NOTE To set an end date for content follow these steps 1 Access the editor by adding new content or editing an existing one If adding new content enter a title and content Click the calendar button next to the End Date field A calendar pops up a ge a Select the date and time you want the content to be removed from the Web site Click the Done button 7 The date and time appear in the End Date field When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not be removed at the intended time Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1
397. tent as file on your computer or network Since Ektron CMS400 NET s editor only works with htm and xml files you should save the file using one of those extensions Save File H4 Display hide Borders Display or suppress table and cell borders Display or suppress formatting characters that do not appear when content is published c gt Display hide Invisible Elements Display a dialog that lets you change the appearance of the HTML source code View Preferences Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Delete a Delete selected content I Underline Ctrl U Make the text underlined Remove alignment settings applied to selected content M Selena Create a bookmark Using Bookmarks on on page 501 l hori line Ctrl P Print the editor content Print El Ctrl A Select all content Select All Bj Deselect all selected content Select None Position Objects Options These buttons let you absolutely position elements pictures tables etc anywhere on a page Remove alignment WARNING Some older browsers for example Netscape 4 do not display absolutely positioned elements Absolute position uses the style attribute If you use this feature the content is not compatible with all browsers aoe Position Lets you move selected table or image anywhere on the screen Locks s
398. ter button Then click the text where the formatting is to be applied Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 539 Appendix A Content Statuses Appendix A Content Statuses The table below describes all possible content statuses The rest of this appendix explains each status in more detail Border Color Letter fae _ Approved Through the workflow and published on the Web site red Checked Out Currently being edited Has not been checked in Checked In Checked in for other users to edit Submitted for Approval green green Saved and submitted into the approval chain See Also Approving Declining Content on page 85 yellow yellow Marked for Deletion Requested for deletion Pending Go Live Approved but the Go Live Date date hasn t occurred yet grey Awaiting Completion of Associated Tasks Task s assigned to content are not complete More Information Active Content on page 541 Checked Out Content on page 544 Checked In Content on page 542 Submitted Content on page 544 Marked for Deletion Content on page 546 Pending Start Date Content on page 546 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 540 Appendix A Content Statuses Letter Border Content state More Information Color Pending Deletion Content was created with a future start date then checked in and deleted This status only rem
399. that it was a mistake use this command It re applies the changes from the command that occurred before you pressed Undo See Also Undo on page 454 Reset Zoom Ratio Standard Toolbar Button Description Displays image at full size See Also Zoom In on page 455 Zoom Out on page 456 Rotate Standard Toolbar Button g5 Description Turns an image a specified number of degrees Note that the dialog box lets you rotate the image e left or right e 90 180 or 270 degrees e any number of degrees between 1 and 359 Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 448 Editing Images w Hotate 0 C Right C 180 270 a0 1 3553 e Save Standard Toolbar Button m Description Save changes to an image If required information is missing such as the image name you are prompted for this information Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 449 Editing Images Ei Ed Save Image As Save ire A4DOBEAPP image Gear Program Files EDE C Inetpub CI PSFONTS CFUSION Install L System Volume i Config Msi OnE dit_M anual Tech Pubs der Documents and Settings mapelnt Temp EktronD ew MSSOL unzipped ewebeditpra My Music x file drop Norton Systemworksz001 w40 vbroker framemaker test poartutility YiewletBuilderz History Deskto P EN 1 My Documents pn ean My Compute i on File name Untitled a im Save as type
400. the Filename Search checkbox is checked e description if the Description search checkbox is checked A keyword can be a complete or partial word But you can only enter a partial term for one word For example you can enter Adv and have the search return the content titled Adverse Drug Reactions But if you enter Adv Drug the search returns nothing You can enter several complete search terms but they must be in the correct sequence For example to find the topic titled Adverse Drug Reactions you can enter Adverse Reactions but cannot enter Reactions Adverse To find all files in a selected library folder enter nothing in this field Or to find all files in a selected library folder of a type for example images select the type and enter nothing in this field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 193 Library Folder SS Filename Search If you check this box the search considers the file name when returning search results Otherwise the file name is not considered by the search For example if you enter ppt into the keyword field the search returns all files that include that string Such as all Powerpoint presentations Only search items The search only considers library assets that were last modified by last edited by myself you One or more of the search criteria set by your system administrator in the Metadata Definitions screen NOTE Some search field check boxes are circles w
401. the Message Queue and Asynchronous Processor gt Asynchronous Log File Reporting Search Phrase Report Frequency of search terms Search Phrase Report on page 132 Common Report Topics The following topics apply to the reports Information on the Reports on page 111 e Report Toolbar Options on page 111 e Selecting Content by Folder on page 112 e Selecting Content by Type on page 113 e Sorting and Filtering Content Reports on page 113 e Performing an Action on Several Content Items on page 114 e Viewing Editing Content on the Report on page 115 e emailing Reports on page 115 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 110 Content Workflow Reports Information on the Reports Each report displays the following information about its content Field Description Title of content Internal number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Date Modified If a Start Date was assigned to the content it appears here Last Editor The user who last edited the content Folder location of content Report Toolbar Options email this report to selected users emailing Reports on page 115 Select a folder whose content appears on Selecting Content by Folder the report Content in other folders is on page 112 ignored Ca i i ee Select the language of the content you we Eng _ want to see on the report Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Releas
402. the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit the error message could be Please enter at 8 or more characters with at least one digit By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Inserting a Text Area Field Use a text area field when you want the site visitor to enter an unformatted free text response A text area field is similar to a Text Field except it scrolls vertically to accept more text To insert a text area field follow these steps 1 Place a text area field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 146 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 159 Textarea Hame Tool Tips Default value Validation Validation Working with HTML Forms Field2 Field 2 Mo validation Error Message Ea Fields on the Textarea Dialog e e E Tool Tips Default value Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the
403. tional Options on the Dialog Box on page 399 3 Click Find Next to find the next occurrence of the find text Finding and Replacing Text 1 Inthe Find What field type the text that you want to find Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 398 Finding and Replacing Text 2 Inthe Replace With field type the text to replace the find text 3 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 399 4 If you want to replace all occurrences of the find text with the replace text click Replace All NOTE You can undo replacements one at a time using the Undo button E replace only the highlighted term with the replace text click Replace find the next occurrence of the find text and optionally replace it with the replace text click Find Next change the highlighted term using the editor exit the Find and Replace dialog move to the term and edit as needed To restart the search press the Find Next button S 5 Continue to find and optionally replace or edit until you reach the end of the text Additional Options on the Dialog Box The dialog box also lets you do the following e Specifying a Search Direction on page 399 e Considering the Case of a Search Term on page 400 e Whole Word Match on page 401 Specifying a Search Direction The search begins where the cursor is when you click Find
404. tions Change Change all Change all Cancel e The Spelling Dialog Box The Spelling dialog box displays e the word not in the dictionary in the Not in Dictionary field e suggested spellings for the word in the Suggestions field The most likely replacement is selected at the top of the list e buttons that let you ignore the word change the word or exit Replace the word with one of the suggestions and continue Click the suggested word spell checking the page _ Click Change Replace every occurrence of the word with one of the Click the suggested word Suggestions and continue spell checking the page _ Click Change All Correct the spelling of the word by typing it and continue Click in the Not In Dictionary spell checking the page field Correct the spelling Click Change Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 404 Checking Spelling Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page Click Ignore You would normally do this if a word such as a company name is spelled correctly even though it is not in the dictionary Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page Click Ignore All ignoring all other occurrences of the word Stop spell checking Click Cancel Spell Checking Selected Text To check the spelling for a single word or a group of words follow these steps 1 Select the text that you want to spell check 2 Press the manual spell check but
405. tle Ektron Partners and Customers Filename CMS400Example uploadedFiles ektron_partners_customers ppt Library ID 41 Parent Folder 9 Content Last User To Edit 2dministrator Application Last Edit Date 9 19 2005 2 55 05 PM Date Created 1 11 2005 3 04 34 PM Description Marketing description of Ektron s relationship with its partners Preview Ektron Partners and Customers The table below describes each field on the screen Field Deseripon Title assigned by user who copied or edited it Filename and location on the server Library ID ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET when file was originally copied Parent Folder File s parent folder Users need permissions to this folder to insert the file into content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 199 Library Folder lf the file can be displayed in your browser a preview of it appears at the bottom of the screen If it cannot display in the browser a link to preview it in its host application appears instead NOTE You may need to download some files before you can be view them for example mdb mp3 zip etc The following table describes the buttons on the View Library Item screen Button Description For more information see yx Edit the items title and description Editing a File on page 200 Overwrite the library item Overwriting Files on page 201 a Find content linked to the library item Library Link Searching
406. to simply by selecting an item from a drop down menu Quick Link Quicklinks are quick because you do not need to enter or know the URL of the destination Web page your Web master has already stored that information for you To apply a Quicklink follow these steps 1 Select the source text or image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 506 Using Hyperlinks 2 Click the Hyperlink button B The Hyperlink dialog box appears Hyperfink gt Hyperlink Information OK Tee Http Cancel Link http Bookmark Text Target Frame Quick Link l selectlink 000 o 3 Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field A list of Web pages that your Web master has pre loaded appears 4 Click an item from the list to select it 5 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 504 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 6 Click OK Entering a Hyperlink Manually To create a hyperlink follow these steps 1 Select the source text or image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 507 Using Hyperlinks 2 Click the New Hyperlink button The Hyperlink dialog box appears Hyperlink Hyperlink Information Type http Link http Bookmark
407. ton 3 The spell checker reviews the words in the selected text and stops at any word not in the dictionary For documentation of options when a misspelled word is found see The Spelling Dialog Box on page 404 4 When the spell checker finishes reviewing the words in the selected text it displays the following message Finished checking selection Do you want to check the rest of the document Click Yes to spell check the rest of the document including text above the selected text Click No to stop the spell checker setting Spell Check Options eWebEditPro XML can use Microsoft Word s spell checking feature your Webmaster makes this decision lf your installation uses Word Word s Spelling amp Grammar window available from the Tools gt Options menu has settings that affect the operation of the spell check Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 405 Checking Spelling Track Changes User Information Compatibility File Locations View General Edit Print Save Spelling amp Grammar Spelling I Hide spelling errors in this document M Always suggest corrections T Suggest from main dictionary only I Ignore words in UPPERCASE M Ignore words with numbers I Ignore Internet and file addresses Custom dictionary custom DIc T Dictionaries Grammar T Check grammar as you type Writing style I Hide grammatical errors in this document Technical T check
408. trated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 143 Working with HTML Forms Business Phone Home Phone All form fields appear on the list In addition the following fields can be used to insert form information into the postback message although they re not completed by the person submitting the form e Form title e Form description e Date form was submitted by site visitor For example your postback message may be Thank you Full Name for completing the Form Title gt When the postback message appears it looks like this Thank you Jay Kohler for completing the breakroom survey Creating a Form s Content Here is an example of form content that you can create Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 144 Working with HTML Forms Request for White Paper Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e mail white paperdektron cam required fields First Name Last Name a Company Name Company Personal Website RRS Email hone Oo oo Phone kaaa SERGE o o o State Province Select for JSA or Canada Only v SES SEES SE ESSE ESSE EES EEE SE SESE ESSE SESE SEES eee EEE ESSE SES ESSE ESSE TT sees eser se rssersrersrsrsssrsssssres ee E ail Country United S states fl aie eee E ee ee ee AE ee Request White Paper Note that some fields are required and some provide a dropdown
409. tron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 530 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients PITH SatarlLlontentul The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below MS YS a0 st S124 dials o He z u amp t 4 ty The menu items and toolbar buttons allow you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables i i Table of Menu Items Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists The following table explains each menu item toolbar button and drop down list Spelling Begin spell checker Button 7 Menu Tools gt Spelling Keystroke F7 Automatic Spell TEF Turn on or off spell check as you type Check Button Fe feature Menu Tools gt Disable Check Spelling As You Type Keystroke None Accessibility Button None Provides an report on how accessible your page is according to Section 508 WCAG Priority 1 and WCAG Priority 2 Report Menu Tools gt Accessibility Report Keystroke F8 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 531 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Paste Special Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 Button None Menu Tools gt Word Count Keystroke None Button Menu Edit gt Find Keystroke Control F Button Menu Edit gt Cut Keystroke Control X Button Menu Edit gt Copy Keystroke
410. ttons 34 add 34 add calendar event 34 add content block 34 add content folder 34 add library items 34 add task 34 approvals 34 approve 34 approve all 34 archived content 34 calendar 35 check in 35 check out 35 collections 35 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 delete 35 delete content 35 delete folder 35 do not apply XSLT 35 edit 35 insert library item 35 link check 36 overwrite 36 preview 36 publish 36 remove 36 reorder 36 restore 36 save 36 search 36 show calendar 36 submit 36 view date 36 view difference 37 view history 37 view published 37 view staged 37 WYSIWYG view as 378 X XSLT removing from XML content block 105 Y yellow content border color meaning 540 Z zoom in WeblmageFX command 455 zoom out WeblmageFX command 456 vii
411. type text and then use toolbar buttons illustrated below and menu options to change the text s appearance or perform functions on it such as spell checking S BBO Sloal e ee Be E eo amp Apply Style Normal Times New Roman 3 12 pt k A aa E if UA Organization of this Documentation The next section Creating a Simple Web Page on page 370 walks you through the steps required to create a simple Web page The following section Toolbar Buttons on page 374 explains e each toolbar button e functions that appear when you right click the mouse Many of these functions are simple and require only a brief explanation The last section Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features on page 396 explains how to use the more advanced features Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 369 Creating a Simple Web Page This section walks you through the process of creating a simple Web page using only a few of the many features available Later sections explain all of the features and how to use them Your Finished Web Page When you finish this exercise your simple Web page will look like this i 2 B8088 S oo ye Aee aal maal s E E Apply Style Normal Times New Roman 3 12 pt hi A J E 7 U A This is some sample content You can make the text bold a e or underlined with the push of a b also easily add hyperlinks You can bean a line with bull
412. ubject and Preamble Fields You can retrieve data from a submitted form directly to the form s Subject and Preamble fields The subject is a standard mail field and the preamble is text that appears at the beginning of the email For example the form may provide a list of your products While the user is completing the form he selects a product that he is interested in The product then becomes the subject line of the email Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 182 Working with HTML Forms NOTE Since a Textarea field can span multiple lines it can only be used with the preamble However a plain text field can be used with both the subject and preamble To retrieve data dynamically from a form field into the email s subject line or preamble follow these steps 1 Adda form field that collects the information you want to insert into the email s subject line or preamble See Also Inserting Form Fields on page 147 2 Go to the Edit Form screen gt Mail Properties section See Also Editing a Form on page 183 3 Move to the field labeled Subject or Preamble 4 Atthe dropdown list following OR use text in field select the field you created in Step 1 Editing a Form After you create a form it can easily be edited if information needs to be changed You can update the following information by following the procedure below e the form fields e post back message e metadata e schedule e co
413. under CUSTOMER agrees to return all copies of the Software and this License upon notification and demand by Ektron 3 Copyright The Software including any images applets photographs animations video audio music and text incorporated into the Software as well as any accompanying written materials the Documentation is owned by Ektron or its suppliers is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaties and contains confidential information and trade secrets CUSTOMER agrees to protect the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation CUSTOMER agrees that it will not provide a copy of this Software or Documentation nor divulge any proprietary information of Ektron to any person other than its employees without the prior consent of Ektron CUSTOMER shall use its best efforts to see that any user of the Software licensed hereunder complies with this license 4 Limited Warranty Ektron warrants solely that the medium upon which the Software is delivered will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal proper and intended usage for a period of three 3 months from the date of receipt Ektron does not warrant the use of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free nor that program errors will be corrected This limited warranty shall not apply to any error or failure resulting from i machine error ii Customer s failure to follow operating instructions iii negligence or accident or
414. urrently Checked Out 6 Tasks 2 Form Submission Tasks 1 View All Tasks Title ID State Priority Due Date Assigned To Assigned By Last Added Comr Blank Form Wot Started Normal Not Specified Everyone admin Not Specified Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 171 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can also view and update tasks assigned to them via the Task screens on the Smart Desktop See Viewing a Task on page 343 and Viewing a Task s History on page 353 Task Information The task created upon form submission has the following information a Task Form Submission Task Category Category Task type Form Submission Task Created by User who created or last edited form State Not started Not specified Start date Not specified Description Data from form form name was received on date time form description Name of every field on the form value submitted by user into that field email Automatically Generated Upon Form Submission Also an email is automatically sent to every user named in Step 1 above who has a valid email address in the User Information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 172 Working with HTML Forms Screen The email s subject line is the form name The body of the email contains the following information for each field on the form name value submitted by user Vie
415. use the buttons and menu options to edit it The rest of this chapter describes those buttons and menu options Saving the Image When you finish editing the image you can insert it into the content by pressing the Exit button Wis Alternatively you can save the image to a local or network folder using the Save button lel When you insert the image into the content WeblmageFX checks the file extension If the image is a gif file it is saved as a png file in your temporary directory For example test gif is saved as C Documents and Settings your user name Local Settings Temp test png Any other file type is saved in your temporary directory without changing the file extension unless you use the Save As option For example you save test jpg as test png Assigning a Name to a New Image If you create an image in WebImageFX and then exit WebImageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML the system assigns the image a random name such as WIF50A jpg lf you want to assign a different name and or folder to the image use the Save as command See Also Save As on page 450 Toolbar Buttons and Menu Commands The following tables list each toolbar button and menu command They are followed by a more detailed description of each function Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 427 Editing Images File Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see Create New Creates a ne
416. ust like an HTML content block The host application s toolbar appears below Ektron CMS400 NET s tabs on the Edit Content screen i English U 5 4 Add to Quicklinks table M Content Searchable tent Search Data Schedule Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Help fimmt tierce ee SSY SB O lo BMsale E Bob s powerpoint project ih Bf Common Tasks Bob s powerpoint project md You can insert summary metadata schedule comment and task information for the Office document From the View Content screen you can use standard toolbar buttons to perform actions such as view history submit for publishing and delete For more information see Working with Office Documents on page 228 Managed Files Ektron CMS400 NET can track and manage any non Office type of file that runs on your computer for example PDF gif and zip When editing these file types the host application appears in a separate window The Ektron CMS400 NET View Content screen remains in the background Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 227 Using the Document Management Functionality Edit Content F k F Title Machine server license English U 5 4 Content Search Data Schedule fs machine server license tKt Notepad File Edit Format Help The server license 15 Intended for use on a single server with unlimited web sites All sites must run from a single web
417. utton 36 replacing text 398 reports content approving content from report 118 awaiting approval 118 checked in content 120 checked out content 120 content to expire 125 declining content from report 118 editing content blocks 115 expired content 125 new 121 pending start date 123 refresh reminder 124 sorting and filtering 113 submitted 122 viewing content blocks 115 workflow 108 emailing 115 selecting content by folder 112 folder accessing 108 site update activity 127 restore toolbar button 36 restoring content 105 right to left editing 383 rotate WeblmageFX command 448 rows table adding 469 deleting 469 spanning 491 specifying 468 S save toolbar button 36 WeblmageFX command 449 save as WeblmageFX command 450 scanning an image 453 scheduling content 66 search 398 considering case of search term 400 content folder 54 direction 399 library 192 toolbar button 36 whole word match 401 search for content using Ektron Explorer 221 search phrase report 132 search screen 55 noise files 57 specifying kind of content to search 56 match criteria 58 word or phrase 57 searchable properties creating 82 editing 82 section 508 compliance 515 tables 518 select all menu option 394 select WeblmageFX command 451 selecting text 374 server moving picture to 423 sharpen WeblmageFX command 451 shortcuts keyboard 375 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 show calendar toolbar button 36 Site
418. value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 160 Working with HTML Forms SS Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Allow maximum of 1000 characters Site visitors entry cannot exceed 1000 characters If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is Surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field Message does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Inserting a Choices Field Use a Choices field when you want the site visitor to select from a predetermined list of choices You can allow the site visitor to select only one or more than one choice You can also determine the list of choices and the appearance of the list To insert a choices field follow these steps 1 Place a choices field s onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 146 2 The follow
419. ve lal 7 The Task Type information is changed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 345 Managing Tasks Creating a Task from the Web Site To create a task from a Web page follow these steps Sign in 2 Browse to the content for which you want to assign a task 3 Click the Add Task button 4 4 The Add Task screen appears The content you were viewing is assigned to the task 5 Follow the directions in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 337 The only differences are e the content s ID number and title appear on the screen e the language of the content is the default language Creating a Task via the Content Folder The above section describes assigning tasks from the Tasks folder You can also assign task via the content folder as illustrated below View Content ASP NET Unleashed LY Ge Gia les ce G amp S Best amp view English U S Content Meta Data 2 ee Tithe 435P WET Unleashed Va Subject Computer Programming ISBN 0672352542 Canro bioae_ietinnDuhlichar Came Assigning a Task from the View Content Screen To assign a task from the View Content screen follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the content to which you want to attach in a task as described in Viewing Content on page 40 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 346 Viewing a Task Managing Tasks Click the Add Task button C Follow
420. ve Menu Menu Option Lets you For more information see Menus View all toolbar menus Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 516 Cut Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory If you later cut or copy more information into memory the information in memory is lost Copy Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on page 397 where it is If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Paste Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste Text Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain text That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Select All Select all information on your page After you select it you can cut it copy it etc Clean Source Remove unnecessary HTML tags Cleaning Source Code on page 513 Hyperlink Create a link to another Web page or a Using Hyperlinks on spot within the current page page 505 Edit Source Edit your page s HTML source Editing a Section of a Page on page 512 Insert Source Insert HTML source onto the page at the Inserting Source on cursor location page 512 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 394 The Context Sensitive Menu Menu Optio
421. vent button 34 authorization for creating 314 button to display in Workarea 36 definition 312 event types 327 events adding 324 assigning event types 327 button for viewing 36 deleting 333 display times 326 editing 331 end time 326 insert hyperlink 327 location 326 recurring adding 328 start date 326 329 start time 326 viewing 329 screen information on 316 viewing 320 cells background color 487 background image deleting 490 inserting 489 border color 486 invisible 486 deleting 485 inserting 484 merging 497 padding 499 spacing 499 splitting 496 text alignment 493 width 483 check in toolbar button 35 check out toolbar button 35 checked in content definition 542 report 120 checked out content definition 544 report 120 choose color WeblmageFX command 433 choose font WeblmageFX command 434 cleaning HTML 513 collaboration content 525 collections adding content 264 changing sequence of links 36 compared with menu and List Summary 272 creating 260 creating new content block for 266 default template 262 definition 254 deleting 270 editing content blocks 267 finding 255 folder using to find collection 257 information editing 269 multi language 270 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 removing content 268 reordering content blocks 268 toolbar button 35 toolbar buttons 260 using default template or quicklinks 262 viewing 258 color background cell applying 487 deleting 488
422. w image Create New on page 437 Selects an image to edit Open on page 443 Saves changes to an image Save on page 449 Save As Saves the current image under a Save As on page 450 different name or format Twain Acquire Performs a single page scan Twain Acquire on Before scanning you must select a page 453 source using the Twain Source command Twain Source Allows the user to select a source for Twain Source on acquiring an image such as a page 454 scanner or digital camera Exit Save changes and return to Exit on page 439 eWebEditPro XML Exit without save Ignore changes return to Exit without Save on eWebEditPro XML page 440 Edit Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see Copies a selected area of an image Copy on page 437 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 428 Editing Images Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see paste as new Inserts copied image or area into a Paste as New Image image new file on page 445 Reverses the most recent action Undo on page 454 mu redo Reapplies the changes from the Redo on page 447 command that occurred before you pressed Undo select Selects an area of an image You Select on page 451 can then perform actions on the area such as blur and delete ol crop Removes everything outside of Crop on page 437 sele
423. when the last user approves it The chart below illustrates the approval process Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 85 Approving Declining Content Approval Chain Publish to Web site You can approve and decline all content that has been submitted to you from the approval folder The following topics guide you through the approval or decline of this content Edit e Approve Decline One Content Item on page 86 e Approve Decline Several Content Items on page 88 e Example of an Approval Chain on page 89 Approve Decline One Content Item 1 Click the Smart Desktop button circled in red below Men eet Menla 2 Click Reports 3 Click Approvals Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 86 Approving Declining Content 4 Click the content you want to approve or decline l CONTACT EKTFON Lie C Support Page Put E roa Page Put L RC International Announces the RC Cheetah Del E Alana nart arnt Duk To select all displayed content click Select All at the top of the screen i All Clear All Title M Contact Ektron if Support Page W Products Page M RC International Announces the RC Ct 5 The content appears You can view the content summary metadata etc A toolbar at the top of the screen lists tasks you can perform on the content Bar Publish Accept changes to the content and publish it to the site Note If there is another approver in the
424. which you want to add a calendar event Your calendar display is determined by your system administrator June 2004 Sunday Tuesday Wednesday 1 Bal 9 Bal E RC International Hosts RC Conference 3 Click the Add Event a button 4 The Add Calendar Event screen appears NOTE Folder information appears at the bottom of the screen only if the folder has subfolders or content under it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 324 Working with Calendars Add Calendar Event Bij ne f ai dl mo ET EE pen ia a Event Title Event Location Cine Time Recurring Oy Date Wednesday April 06 2005 Start 12 00 AM a End 12 00 AM a i Display the times for the event Hyperlink l Launch link in a new browser Event Type Svallable Selected Company Holiday gt Mo Event Types Trade Show Company Event 5 Respond to the fields using the following table as a reference eS Event Title Enter a title for the event Note If you enter a Quicklink in the Hyperlink field the Quicklink s content title replaces this title You can then edit the new title if desired Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 325 Working with Calendars i sas Event Location If desired enter a location for the event for example Conference Room 1 or Cafeteria One Time If you want to enter a one time only event continue reading Recurring If y
425. wing Form Reports lf a form is set to store data in the database you can run a report that displays the submitted data To view a form report follow these steps 1 o O N o ae w N 9 Access the Forms folder as described in Accessing the Forms Folder on page 139 Navigate to the folder for which you want to view the report The Form Modules screen appears Click the form you want to view The View Form screen appears Click the View Reports button in The View Forms Report screen appears Enter report criteria using the following table as a reference Fd Peserinfon Start Date If desired specify a start date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or after the start date End Date If desired specify an end date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or before the end date Report Display Choose to display the report horizontally or vertically Data Type Specify the data type to filter the report by Click the Get Result button to display the report Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 173 Working with HTML Forms Display Formats Table of Values The table of values shows the following information for each completed form e a checkbox that lets you delete the response e an internal identification number of the response e date response was submitted e descriptive name of each form field appears in the column header the value ent
426. wing a previous versions of content you can replace the current version with any previous version NOTE This section explains how to view and possibly restore older versions of content To see a change by change comparison of two content items use the View Content Difference feature explained in Comparing Versions of Content on page 96 NOTE The Purge History feature deletes historical versions of content according to user defined criteria Therefore some previous versions may be unavailable See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual gt Managing Content Folders gt Folder Properties gt Purge History The View and Restore features are explained through the following subtopics e Accessing Content History on page 102 e The Content History Window on page 104 e Restoring a Previous Version on page 105 e Comparing Historical Versions on page 106 e Removing Applied XSLT on page 106 Accessing Content History By default all users can view the history of Ektron CMS400 NET content You can access content history from two places e The Workarea s View Content page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 102 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content e The icon menu for content on a Web page Once you access the history the functionality is identical The following sections explains how to access the content history from both places Accessing the Content History
427. with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET s Menu feature lets users create and maintain a dropdown menu system for your Web site The menu options can link to content library assets external hyperlinks and submenus Below is a sample menu Products Support Hews Careers hii In this example delivered with Ektron CMS400 NET the menu appears when the person viewing the Web page moves the cursor over Products The above display illustrates the menu s appearance to a visitor to your site However if a content contributor with permission to edit menus signs in to Ektron CMS400 NET then views the menu it has additional options for editing the menu or adding content here t NOTE For more information on adding content see Adding Content on page 46 This chapter describes the following aspects of managing menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 274 Working with Menus e what they are e how they can be used e how to the add edit view and delete a them What s In This Chapter The following information is included in this chapter e The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 275 e Access to the Menus Feature on page 276 e Adding a New Menu on page 277 e Adding a Menu Item on page 283 e Editing a Menu on page 291 e Editing a Menu Item on page 292 e Viewing a Menu on page 301 e Reordering Menu Items on page 306 e Deleting a Menu on page 307 e
428. xplorer ed E This action will approve all the ted content changes awaiting your approval A This may cause some content blocks to become published or deleted Do you wish to continue 4 To continue click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 88 Approving Declining Content 5 The approved content is either submitted to the next publisher published immediately to the Web site or deleted depending on the approval chain set for the content Example of an Approval Chain The approval chain begins when a content contributor submits a new or edited content If email is enabled an email is sent to the next approver in the approval chain The following example follows a typical content block from creation to publication Three users make up this approval chain e Sports Writer creates sports content e Sports Editor edits and publishes all sports articles e Editor In Chief edits and publishes all articles Each user has different permissions that correspond to their roles The example uses the following topics to explain a typical approval chain e Creating Content on page 89 e First Approver on page 90 e Second Approver on page 92 Creating Content The first step is to create content To create new content follow these steps 1 Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET as a SportsWriter 2 Create content as described in Adding Content on page 46 3 Click the Submit button
429. xt Field except field scrolls vertically to accept more text Several choices appear on screen User checks any number of appropriate boxes Same as Choices except options appear in a drop down box and site visitor can only select one choice Lets user insert a date by clicking a calendar Working with HTML Forms For more information see Inserting a Checkbox Field on page 151 Inserting a Hidden Text Field on page 152 Inserting a Text Field on page 153 Inserting a Password Field on page 157 Inserting a Text Area Field on page 159 Inserting a Choices Field on page 161 Inserting a Select List Field on page 165 Inserting a Calendar Field on page 168 10 After you complete the form you have the following options Postback Message See Composing the Postback Message on page 143 page 601 page 67 Edit the metadata for the content See Also Metadata on Assign start or end dates or both for when content is published to Web site See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on 148 Working with HTML Forms Comment Enter history comment to indicate changes made to content Web Alerts Assign or update Web Alert information for the form See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Submit content into approval process E Submit Ry Publish content to Web site Publish et Note If the content has any active tas
430. y referencing Viewing a Menu on page 301 2 The View Menu screen displays the menu items Click the edit icon fy next to the content 4 you want to edit The Edit Menu Item screen opens Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 296 Working with Menus Edit Menu Item Title PrintFoms SSS S Image Link jcms4ocExamplel OOOO bB Use image instead of a title Description Target C Popup Self Parent Top Link Quicklink Menu Template 5 Using the table below as a reference make changes to the content menu item Fields on the Edit Menu Item Screen eve The name that was given to the menu item by the creator Edit if needed Description Add a more detailed description for the content menu item that is being edited Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 297 Working with Menus SS Image Link You can have an image appear next to or instead of the menu title For example Document Management Solution Web Authoring Tools Web Image Editor Store 4 Download Center To do this follow these steps Note Before beginning these steps the image must reside in the library if it does not add it before proceeding For more information see Copying Files to the Library on page 196 1 Click the image icon 2 The library window opens 3 Navigate to the folder that contains the image you want to use 4 Click the Insert button
431. y screen opens Navigate to the folder whose assets you want to add In the right frame select the type of asset to insert image hyperlink etc NOTE To insert assets the menu s folder must contain library assets However you can insert library assets from other folders for which you have permission T 8 Select a library asset and click the Insert button 4 The Add New Item screen appears Use the following table to complete that screen ese Title of the library asset When you insert the asset the title is used for the title of the menu item You can change it if needed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 287 Working with Menus SSS Browse Library If you want to insert a different asset click the Browse Library button to browse the library and select another asset 9 Click the Save button E Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item To add an external hyperlink as a menu item via a content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 71 e S P Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 283 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 284 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 285 Click the circle next to External Hyperlink Click the Next button The Add New Item screen is displayed Complete the fields as needed Description Title of the new external hyperlink menu item URL Li
432. ying you that content needs approval You look it over change it as needed then pass it on to the next approver If you do not agree with the changes you can decline the request In this case the user who made the edits is informed that the change is not approved The following graphic illustrates the content approval cycle Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 7 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Create or edt content Publish to Web site To help track content s position in this workflow Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a status to each content item The status determines what you can do with it and indicates what must occur in order for it to get published to the Web site For more information see Appendix A Content Statuses on page 540 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Release 5 1 Revision 5 8 Logging In and Out Logging In and Out This section explains how to log in and out of Ektron CMS400 NET and to use the site preview feature through the following subtopics e Prerequisites on page 9 e Logging into the Sample Web Site on page 9 e Site Preview on page 11 e Logging Out of the Sample Site on page 13 Prerequisites Once your Webmaster or administrator installs Ektron CMS400 NET you need the following items before you can use it e URL Web address of Ektron CMS400 NET Web site e Username and password Once you acquire both you can log into Ektron CMS400 NET and be

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Effet métal texture  PDF-Download  Craftsman 917.2565 Lawn Mower User Manual  Medisana Minibreeze  Gefen 4x2 HDMI Switch User Manual  取扱説明書 - 川口技研  slides  BDF-XX-S - FEMa.ES  口唇閉鎖力データ解析ソフトアップデートの手順 手順 1：アップデータ用の  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file